Home

GM Chassis Application 1986-2004view - ZR

1. BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER SERIES 5TH SOTEM TYPE CONFIG T B7 Chassis 4WAL 4 Sensor Class 2 OBD II C2 D C Series 4WAL 4 Sensor Class 2 OBD II C2 C T Series 4WAL 4 Sensor Class 2 OBD II C2 B W4 Series ABS Class 2 OBD II C2 2004 VEHICLE COVERAGE 2004 BUICK PASSENGER CARS ABS ETS MSVA TIM BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Park Avenue Ultra C Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS Le Sabre H Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS Century Regal W DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 67 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2004 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH SE TYPE CONFIG CTS D Delco Bosch 7 2 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS Deville DHS DTS K Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 Seville SLS and STS DRP TCS MSVA 2004 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEE 4TH STS TEM TYPE CONFIG Cavalier J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS Classic N DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM Impala Monte Carlo W DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP ETS MSVA TIM Corvette Y Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS VES 2004 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Alero N DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM 2004 PONTIAC PASSENGE
2. BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SNP TYPE CONFIG Roadmaster B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Wagon B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Electra C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS Reatta E Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Riviera E Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Le Sabre H Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS Skylark N Delco VI UART GM ABS Regal W Delco Moraine III UART GM ABS 1991 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODE 4TH DIGIT BYXDEREM TYPE CONFIG Deville C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS Fleetwood C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS Brougham D Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Eldorado E Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Seville K Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 17 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1991 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MOBDEE 4TH DIGIT EM TYPE CONFIG Caprice B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Corvette Y Bosch 2S Micro UART GM B ABS SEL 1991 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODRE 4TH DIGIT SEPTEM TYPE CONFIG Custom Cruiser Wagon B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS 98 Regency C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS Touring Sedan C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS Toronado E Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Eighty Eight H Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS Achieva N Delco VI UART GM ABS VES Cutlass Calais N Delco VI UART GM ABS VES Cutlass Supreme W Delco Moraine III UART GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 1
3. GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 6 Precautions for GM Chassis Application 2 Operating Precautions PRECAUTIONS FOR GM CHASSIS APPLICATION LOSE ABS BRAKING The following screen is displayed upon initial communication with newer GM vehicles This new screen notifies you that ABS systems does not operate when ABS TCS MIL Lamps are illuminated Caution Y ABS Braking is not available when CAUTION Caution Y ABS TCS lamps are illuminated Caution A Press ENTER to Continue CHECK TESTER INDUCED DTCs Under some conditions the tester can cause trouble codes to be set Generally these codes are associated with the serial data link It is important to determine if the trouble codes are set by the tester or are due CAUTION to a true malfunction in the vehicle Check for trouble codes at the start and at the end of testing If there are codes set at the end of testing but not at the start you may assume that they are caused by the tester and should be cleared and ignored E K V or Y Body vehicles can use on board diagnostics or the GM Body System application to check ECM BCM or CCM codes GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 7 3 VEHICLE COVERAGE Use this section to assist you in operating your Vetronix tester and Chassis Software It covers everything needed to get your tester connected to the vehicle and begin performing the Chassis system diagnos
4. 1 BLEED BASE BRAKE SYSTEM NORMALLY 2 FOLLOW SERVICE MANUAL INSTRUCTIONS 3 TURN IGNITION ON 4 TURN THE ENGINE OFF CONNECT REQUIRED EQUIPMENT PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER PUMP BRAKES CONTINUOUSLY PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER LR SECONDARY CIRCUIT BLEED OPEN LR BLEED SCREW STOP PUMPING RELEASE BRAKE PEDAL PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER CLOSE LEFT REAR BLEED SCREW PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER LEFT REAR CIRCUIT COMPLETE PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE RELEASE BRAKE TEST IN PROGRESS Y TEST REPEATS ABOVE SEQUENCE FOR RIGHT REAR CIRCUIT CLOSE RIGHT FRONT BLEED SCREW PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER 1 OPEN RF BLEED SCR 2 CLOSE RF BLEED SCR PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE RF SECONDARY CIRCUIT BLEED OPEN RF BLEED SCREW PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER RIGHT FRONT CIRCUIT PUMP BRAKES COMPLETE PUMP BRAKES PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUOUSLY CONTINUE Y RELEASE BRAKE TEST REPEATS ABOVE SEQUENCE TEST IN PROGRESS FOR LEFT FRONT CIRCUIT PUMP BRAKES AUTOBLEED PROCEDURE COMPLETE PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE PUMP BRAKES CONTINUOUSLY RELEASE BRAKE RELEASE THE PRESSURE FROM THE TEST IN PROGRESS EQUIPMENT DISCONNECT BLEED EQUIPMENT PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE APPLY amp H
5. BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT QD TYPE CONFIG Camaro F Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TCS Cavalier J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS Metro M Delco ABS VI UART OBD II C2 ABS Malibu N DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM Lumina Ww Delco ABS VI UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 Monte Carlo W DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM Impala W DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM Corvette Y Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA Active Handling 2000 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Alero N Delco VI Class 2 OBD Il C2 ABS ETS VES TIM Intrigue WW Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS VES GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 54 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2000 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS 2000 SATURN PASSENGER CARS Saturn BODY VIN 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM DBC7 ABS ETS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT QD TYPE CONFIG Firebird Formula F Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TCS Bonneville H Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS DRP ICCS3 MSVA TIM Sunfire J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS Grand Am N Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS VES TIM Grand Prix Ww Bosch 5 3 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16R Class 2 ADAPTER CONFIG OBD II C2 2000 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS VANS MPVS BO
6. 1 Go Clear codes Freeze the display of the latest trouble code Display the next trouble code Return to the SELECT OBD CONTROLS menu MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The ABS snapshot helps isolate problems of intermittent ABS operation Information is captured before and after a trigger condition The manual and automatic trigger can be selected You will also be allowed to review a stored snapshot from this menu Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 299 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS Submode Solenoid Tests Isolation Valves The Solenoid Test valves activates the selected wheel circuit isolation valve placing it in the pressure hold position When in the pressure hold position the valve does not allow master cylinder pressure to be delivered to the hydraulic wheel circuit This is done under ABS operating conditions because the EBCM has determined that the wheel is moving too slowly so it holds additional master cylinder pressure from it in an attempt to allow it to rotate at an appropriate speed The scantool commands the valve to close which should allow the technician to spin the wheel even though an assistant is applying pressure to the brake pedal Perform the test as follows 1 Ignition OFF 2 Install the scantool 3 Turn ignition to RUN 4 Raise vehicle such that wheels are about
7. 2 Press the key to return to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 328 Teves Mark IV ABS TCS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes TCS Passed no problems SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID F1 AUTO BLEED F2 TCS SYS TEST ABS DTC s Present TCS PASSED SYSTEM TEST TCS FAILED CHECK THE EBTCM FOR DTC S Engine Not Running ENGINE MUST BE RUNNING TO CONTINUE DIAGNOSTICS Brake Pedal is Depressed TCS UNAVAILABLE WHEN BRAKES ON IF BRAKE IS OFF CHECK BRAKE SWITCH AND PMV PRESSURE SWITCH IF EQUIPPED CIRCUITS SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID F1 AUTO BLEED F2 TCS SYS TEST FIGURE 5 99 F2 TCS System Test ACTIVE KEYS G Select TCS SYS TEST Initiate a procedure Increment procedure steps Return to OBD CONTROLS menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 329 6 FINISHING UP After using the application do the following 1 If the repairs are complete clear the codes from memory before test driving to see if they recur or before releasing the vehicle to the customer Ifyou have cleared the codes for a component but the codes are still set then the conditions which caused the codes to be set may still be present Refer to the OEM service manual to isolate the problem 2 If the repairs are not yet complete or if you want to continue testing at a later time do not clear the co
8. SELECT SYSTEM F0 ABS TCS F1 VES SELECT MODE F0 DATA LIST F2 DTC s F4 MISC TESTS IMPORTANT Follow Service Manual Steps to Diagnose A VES TEST FEEDBACK CURRENT 800 MILLIAMPS A ON yz OFF FIGURE 5 24 F1 VES Test ACTIVE KEYS Ga Select VES from the SELECT SYSTEM menu OBD CONTROLS Turn ON Feedback Current Turn OFF Feedback Current Return to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 161 Bosch 2U Select Ride System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes BOSCH 2U SELECT RIDE SYSTEM The selection FLASH DTCs or FLASH CODES is displayed when testing a Y car with Selective Ride Control and when the SEL system is selected on the tester When selected the tester causes the Ride Control Lamp to flash any trouble codes that are present Refer to the F1 function for clearing trouble codes The Selective Ride Control tests allow you to view trouble codes associated with the ride control system The codes are flashed on the Ride Control Lamp Selective Ride Control system MODE F0 FLASH CODES To select Flash Codes do the following 1 Press from the SELECT SYSTEM menu to view trouble codes related to the Selective Ride Control system 2 Press to FLASH CODES on the Selective Ride Control Lamp 3 Press GP to select CLEAR CODES The tester instructs you to press the key to clear all Select Ride trouble codes 4 Press CX to return to the
9. button on the CCC displays the next available system selection This allows the display to be stepped through all system choices GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 183 Bosch 5 0 RSS ELC SWPS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 3 Depressing the OFF button on the CCC stops the test type selection process and return the display to the next available vehicle system selection NOTE Refer to GM Service Manual for additional information SELECT MODE F0 RSS CALIBRATE F1 ELC TRIM SET F2 SWPS ROAD SENSING SUSPENSION RECALIBRATION PRESS ENTER ENTER ENSURE VEHICLE IS ON A FLAT AND LEVEL SURFACE BE SURE ENGINE IS OFF AND IGN KEY IS IN THE RUN POSITION IS VIN CORRECT 1G6ET1299SU601797 SELECT DESIRED RSS CALIBRATION F0 ETC VIN INFORMATION DOES NOT MATCH VEHICLE SEE SERVICE MANUAL TEST IN PROGRESS RSS CALIBRATION COMPLETE NO RSS DATA CHECK DLC MAKE SURE ING KEY IS IN RUN POSITION NO DATA RECEIVED FROM RSS MODULE FIGURE 5 36 F0 RSS Control Module Calibration 1995 96 Cadillac with RSS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 184 Bosch 5 0 RSS ELC SWPS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F1 ELC TRIM SET This tester mode is available when testing most 1993 96 E and K body vehicles with Electronic Level Control ELC and Road Sensing Suspension RSS systems
10. Bosch ABS C Data List Parameters REAR WHL SPEEDS DELCO MORAINE Ill amp DELCO VI MPH or KPH 0 to 255 Rear wheel speeds are displayed such that the LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED is on the left hand side and the RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED is on the right hand side The rear wheel speeds are generated by the change in flux as a toothed ring passes in front of a variable reluctance sensor A sinusoidal waveform results at a frequency proportional to speed VEHICLE SPEED DELCO MORAINE Ill amp DELCO VI MPH or KPH 0 to 255 Vehicle speed is an internal Antilock brake controller parameter It is computed from all four 4 wheel speeds and may not be exactly the same as the vehicle speedometer reading Abnormally high low or irregular speed indications are usually the result of defective wheel speed sensors or wiring BOSCH ABS ABS FAILED YES NO If the ABS has failed the tester will display YES ASR SWITCH STATE ON OFF This parameter indicates the state of the ASR Switch AVERAGE REAR WHEEL UNITS RANGE The average rear wheel speed is indicated in MPH and KPH BRAKE FLUID LOW OK The tester displays the status of the brake fluid level BRAKE SWITCH ON OFF The brake switch is an input to the Antilock brake controller that identifies the state of the brake switch which must be ON for the ABS to operate GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 344 Bosch ABS C Data List Parameters ECU ID NUME
11. DTCs must be cleared from memory using the scantool Removing power from the EBCM does not clear codes as on other systems CLEAR CODES YES NO YES CODE 2 DETECTED Approximately 5 seconds OPEN WINDING ISOLN VLV SOLNOD CLEARING CODES UNABLE TO CLEAR CODES 5 seconds CHECK VALVE CODES CLEARED CONNECTIONS amp RESISTANCE gt Return to 3 TO 6 OHMS 5 seconds CHECK CIRCUIT 901 450 FOR OPENS FIGURE 5 85 VCM RWAL ABS Systems ACTIVE KEYS o Determine what DTCs to clear Display the next DTC Freeze the display of the latest DTC EXIT Terminate DTC display GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 288 ZP RWAL ABS Systems 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ZP RWAL ABS SYSTEMS MODE F2 TROUBLE CODES Clearing Trouble Codes On vehicles built after August 6 1990 certain detected faults no longer result in the EBCM Latching the red BRAKE warning lamp circuit The lamp lights only while the fault exists and continues being lit for the rest of the ignition cycle for codes 6 and 9 Code 10 turns OFF when 12 NOTES volt signal is received from the brake switch After February 1993 only codes 5 13 14 and 15 latch a hard code Use A scantool to read soft codes Grounding DLC terminal A to H results in a false code 9 and erases the true code The EBCM installed in ZP RWAL applications does not have a volatile
12. ES es 4 Install the appropriate adapter to the tester DLC cable Refer to Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations on page 80 for information on selecting the correct adapters 5 Locate the vehicle s DLC Connect the DLC cable or the adapter attached to the end of the DLC cable to the vehicle Continue to Powering Up the Tester on page 75 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 72 Setting Up the Tester 4 Getting Started TECH 1A Before you operate the Tech 1A do the following 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Connect the tester DLC formerly called the ALDL cable to the tester and tighten the screws 3 Insert the application into the Master Cartridge slot on the bottom rear of the tester Verify that no other Master cartridge is installed in the tester If the system being tested uses Class 2 data type Alliance and aftermarket service centers using a Tech 1A tester must also insert the OBD II Interface Cartridge into the top slot of the Tech 1A FIGURE 4 2 Inserting a Cartridge into the Tech 1A Tech 1A A A Application Cartridge or Mass Storage SW Cartridge MSC 4 Install the appropriate adapter to the tester DLC cable Refer to Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations on page 80 for information on selecting the correct adapters 5 Locate the vehicle s DLC Connect the DLC cable or the adapter attached to the end of the DLC cable to the vehicle Continue to Powering Up the Teste
13. To calibrate the RTD system do the following 1 Select RTD Calibrate by pressing 2 Key ON engine OFF 3 Follow user instructions on the scantool screen 4 Refer to the factory service procedure for more information GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 195 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes DELCO ABS SYSTEMS DELCO MORAINE ABS III The Delco Moraine Antilock System III also known as Powermaster III is designed to prevent wheel lock up during heavy braking This provides improved driver control by reducing the distance required to stop vehicle The major component parts of the system include antilock brake controller 4 wheel speed sensors 2 dash mounted warning lights front and rear enable relays and Powermaster III booster master cylinder assembly The Powermaster III consists of Hydraulic accumulator Electric pump motor 3solenoids Pressure switch MODE F0 DATA LIST Diagnostic data parameters are monitored by the scantool The vehicle can be driven while these diagnostic data parameters are being displayed Intermittent analog signals can be monitored to determine if the signal varies Input output parameter status is also displayed Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F1 DTC HISTORY DTC HISTORY identifies the following information for Delco Moraine ABS III systems The first five faults displayed in the order in whic
14. B IF YOU RE HAVING EEN EE EE EELER AE EE E ER 332 BLANK SCREEN EE 332 DISPLAYSSOLIDBARS uses ete pk dedere Re RP RR rd 333 MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING 333 WRONG DISPLAY AFTER POWER APPLIED sese 334 NO DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS CONTROLLER 22000005 334 INSTALL BOSCH ABS ADAPTER uus eh imer ER dence 335 NOCOMMUNIC ATION dE E ctos deo E ded 336 CHECK FOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT sssssssssss esses 336 CHECK CLASS 2 COMMUNICATION HARDWARE ss sesseeeeee 337 KEYBOARD OR DISPLAY LOCKED UP OR PROGRAM INTERMITTENTLY RETURNS TO TITLE SCREEN eme Ree RRRR hmm ee snb 338 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 TOC vi b DATA LIST EE erch Ae X3 POR dope ERO ERE A 339 DELCO MORAINE III amp DELCO VI ABS onoono ee 340 EE 344 TEVES ADS AE ENEE ANE EE en 348 KELSEY HAYES RWAL AWAL ABS ooann eel 349 EE EE 851 RIDEVO ROREM 851 D GLOSSARY AND ABBREVIATIONS eee 354 Feiere E NEE Index 362 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 TOC ii 1 GM CHASSIS APPLICATION DESCRIPTION The GM Chassis application software is used to diagnose and troubleshoot General Motors passenger cars and trucks that are equipped with anti lock brakes ABS and chassis control systems OPERATING MODES The test modes available vary according to the specific configuration of the vehicle being tested and the system you wish to test Before testing can begin the
15. CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION 8 To go to the Select Menu press to clear the trouble codes If the codes are successfully cleared the tester displays ABS CODES CLR D then returns to the test selection menu At this time you should cycle the ignition GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 114 Mode F2 DTC s 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 9 f you press the following message displayed on the tester HISTORY DATA WILL BE LOST CLEAR CODES YES NO This gives you the opportunity to examine more information which the ABS controller has saved about the ABS trouble codes Press QY 9 if you do not want to clear the codes Pressing causes ABS codes to be cleared Press 2448 to return to the Select Mode menu 10 If the CODE CLEAR FAIL message is displayed re enter the DTCs mode and try to clear codes again If it fails again then you probably have an intermittent connection to the serial data link SDL It is also possible that the controller is malfunctioning GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 115 Mode F2 DTC s 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Y TROUBLE CODES F0 DATA LIST F1 CODE HISTORY F2 TROUBLE CODE WAITING FOR DATA Approximately 2 Seconds INDICATES CURRENT CODE TROUBLE CODES ABS CODE A007 C REAR RELAY CNTCS OPEN FUSE OPEN 3 Seconds INDICATES HISTORY CODE TROUBLE CODES ABS CODE A048 H RF W
16. Kelsey Hayes 4WAL ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes KELSEY HAYES 4WAL ABS 1990 92 LIGHT TRUCKS EXCEPT FWD VANS The Kelsey Hayes 4 Wheel Antilock 4WAL brake system is used to prevent wheel lock up during heavy braking This allows driver to maintain steering control while stopping vehicle in shortest distance possible The system consists of Electro Hydraulic Control Unit EHCU 4 wheel sensors warning lights electrical wiring and hydraulic lines The EHCU consists of an Electronic Control Unit ECU hydraulic control unit 2 accumulators pump motor and a relay The hydraulic control unit consists of an Isolation Solenoid Valve ISO Pulse Width Modulated PWM valve a High Pressure Accumulator HPA Low Pressure Accumulator LPA and a reset switch on each channel If overhaul or repair to any component on the EHCU is necessary complete assembly must be replaced 1993 95 ASTRO C AND K SERIES G SERIES SAFARI S AND T SERIES The Kelsey Hayes 4 Wheel Antilock 4WAL brake system is used to prevent wheel lock up during heavy braking This allows driver to maintain steering control while stopping vehicle in shortest distance possible The system consists of Brake Pressure Modulator Valve BPMV or Electro Hydraulic control Unit EHCU Vehicle Speed Sensor VSS buffer warning lights electrical wiring and hydraulic lines On all except 1995 C and K series the BPMV consists of
17. When diagnosing the Bosch ABS 2S Micro system using the scantool the 12 12 Pin Bosch Adapter P N 02001033 must be connected to the ALDL connector The ALDL connector is located below the left side of the instrument panel The ABS system is disabled by the EBCM when testing the system using a scantool The service ABS light comes on while performing ABS tests when the ignition is turned ON Ensure ignition is OFF before disconnecting or connecting the scantool GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 131 Bosch 2S Micro ABS ASR System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes CAUTION Once scantool is disconnected ensure ignition is OFF at least 10 seconds before road testing vehicle This allows the system to return to normal e operation When testing is completed ignition must remain OFF for at least 10 seconds to return ABS system to normal operation MODE F0 DATA LIST Wheel speed and brake switch status parameters are monitored by the scantool The vehicle can be driven while the diagnostic data parameters are being displayed See Mode F0 Data List on page 111 for more information MODE F1 CODE HISTORY In this mode trouble code history data is displayed on the scantool History data includes how many ignition cycles since trouble code occurred brake switch status vehicle speed and ABS state when trouble code occurred Up to 3 trouble codes are included in ABS history data See Mode F2 DTC s on page 113 f
18. If You re Having a Problem ECU is malfunctioning Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Verify that ignition is in RUN e Verify that tester is plugged securely into the RWAL AWAL ADAPTER Verify that ADAPTER is plugged securely into the DLC Verify Adapter power plug is connected to the back of the DLC Perform RWAL AWAL ADAPTER TEST Check continuity on serial data link CHECK CLASS 2 COMMUNICATION HARDWARE Check Class 2 Communication Hardware EXIT Most Likely Cause Tester does not have the OBD II hardware kit installed See Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations on page 80 Other Possible Causes OBD II Interface Cartridge not seated properly in the top cartridge slot of the Tech 1A OBD II hardware is malfunctioning Recommendations e Verify that the OBD II hardware is installed in tester refer to Chapter 3 e Re seat the Tech 1A interface cartridge Unplug and reset the tester and try the vehicle selection again Reselect the correct vehicle GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 337 Keyboard or Display Locked Up or Program Intermittently Returns to Title Screen B If You re Having a Problem KEYBOARD OR DISPLAY LOCKED UP OR PROGRAM INTERMITTENTLY RETURNS TO TITLE SCREEN GENERAL MOTORS CHASSIS 1986 2004 Vx x ENTER Most Likely Cause DLC cable loose Other Possible Causes Master cartridge has loose or dirty contacts Cigare
19. If the display reads MASTER CARTRIDGE IS MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING This means that the tester is receiving power but the cartridge is not making good contact or else the wrong DLC cable and or adapter are installed If this happens do the following Remove and reinsert the cartridge making sure that the cartridge is properly seated Verify that the correct DLC cable is installed e See Step 4 to determine if the vehicle you are testing requires a DLC cable adapter If an adapter is required verify that the correct one is installed If the display is blank the tester is not receiving power In this case perform the following checks Disconnect and reconnect the tester DC power plug at the cigarette lighter socket Make sure that both the tester DC power plug and cigarette lighter socket have good clean contacts Verify that 12V power is available at the center contact of the cigarette lighter socket and that the outside contact of the lighter socket is grounded e Check the vehicle s cigarette lighter fuse Check the fuse in the cigarette lighter plug on the end of the tester DC power cable If the display is still not correct Appendix B lists possible causes for the malfunction and recommendations to remedy the problem If the problem persists perform the tester Self test as described in the basic tester Operator s Manual NOTE The tester Self test will not operate with the GM Chassis Software Cartridge
20. KEEP IN PARK NEUTRAL A DAMAGE TO ABS MODULATOR MAY RESULT IF TEST ISOVER USED DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL FIRMLY BRAKE OFF Brake depressed If cooling is required ABS VOLTAGE TEST START TEST ABS IGN 13 4V ABS BATT 12 9V SYSTEM MUST COOL DUE TO HIGH CURRENT USED WAIT XX SECONDS If brake is released ABS VOLTAGE TEST BRAKE RELEASED IN PROGRESS ABS IGN 13 4V TEST TERMINATED ABS BATT 12 9V 6 10 Seconds ABS IGN amp BATT VOLTAGES lt 10 0V CHECK VEHICLE ELECTRICAL SYST ABS VOLTAGE TEST ABS BATT INPUT VOLTAGE 10 0V CHECK SWITCHED BATT FOR HI RES PASSED FIGURE 5 63 F7 Voltage Load Test ACTIVE KEYS Select VOLTAGE LOAD Test from the SELECT TEST menu Advance the tester display after performing a requested action EXIT Return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 241 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F8 Lamp Test The Lamp test allows you to manually control two or three ABS Lamps for diagnostic purposes Different vehicles allow control of different Lamps and ABS VI provides feedback for some Lamps but not for others The tester displays the list of Lamps for the vehicle you are testing Figure 5 64 is for the 1993 F Body To select Lamp Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTR
21. PONTIAC LIGHT TRUCKS VANS MPVs CONTINUED BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 5TH SR TYPE CONFIG GMC Safari M L Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor Chevrolet S 10 Pickup S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor Chevrolet Blazer S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor GMC Sonoma S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor GMC Jimmy S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor Chevrolet Venture U V X DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS Oldsmobile Silhouette U V X DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS Pontiac Montana UNIX DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS Cadillac Escalade C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 Escalade EXT 4WAL 3 Sensor RTD EVO Forward Control P Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R ABS Chevrolet Trailblazer S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL GMC Envoy S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL Oldsmobile Bravada S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 2002 MEDIUM DUTY TRUCKS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 5TH x TYPE CONFIG C T Series T55 T85 Kelsey Hayes Hydraulic UART GM 16R Medium 4WAL 4 SENSOR TILT 86 0 BBC F6 F7 D C Series C Series Kelsey Hayes Hydraulic UART GM 16R Crew Cab 4WAL 4 SENSOR C7 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 64 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2002 MEDIUM DUTY TRUCKS CONTINUED BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 5TH SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG
22. Select this mode to set the trim for the vehicle height at the vehicle s suspension resting position It requires removing excess weight and entering the fuel level at the time of the trim set To select the ELC Trim Set do the following 1 Press a from the RSS SELECT TEST screen to select ELC TRIM SET Follow the instructions provided on the screen of the tester NOTE This procedure requires the function to be performed with the key ON and A the engine OFF 2 Vehicle must be on a level surface with doors closed and with no passengers or extra weight in car 3 Check for rear position codes If codes are present repair before continuing 4 Check for RS valves in diagnostics RSS Data Parameters SD13 and SD14 using the CCC IPC to be sure they are within range If not check for bent RS Brackets or disconnect sensors 5 Find fuel level reading in IPC Data Parameters ID40 and round up to the nearest gallon Example 12 1 gallons rounds up to 13 0 gallons 6 Connect scantool to DLC 7 Key ON engine OFF NOTE EH Do not sit in vehicle while performing trim height procedure 8 Follow user instructions on scantool screen GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 185 Bosch 5 0 RSS ELC SWPS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE F0 RSS CALIBRATE F1 ELC TRIM SET F2 SWPS ELECTRONIC LEVEL CONTROL TRIM SET ENSURE VEHICLE IS ON A FLAT AND LEVEL SURFACE AY B
23. TYPE CONFIG Park Avenue C Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS DRP ICCS3 MSVA TIM Le Sabre H Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS DRP ICCS3 MSVA TIM Century Regal W DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TCS MSVA TIM 2001 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Eldorado E Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS DRP ICCS3 MSVA TIM DeVille Seville K Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS MSVA VSES GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 57 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2001 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT QD TYPE CONFIG Camaro F Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TCS Cavalier J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS Metro M Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS Malibu N DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM Lumina Ww Delco VI UART OBD II C ABS VES GM 16 Monte Carlo Impala W DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM Corvette Y Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA Active Handling 2001 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Aurora G Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA TIM Alero N DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS VES TIM Intrigue WW Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS VES GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 5
24. The ABS Brake Telltale on the Instrument Panel Cluster IPC can be commanded OFF or ON by the ABS controller The tester can display which state the telltale lamp is being commanded BRAKE TELLTALE DELCO VI ON OFF CIRCUIT OPEN The tester displays the status of the Brake Telltale lamp ON OFF or CIRCUIT OPEN If the ABS Controller detects a fault that affects base brake operation it will turn the Red Brake Tell tale along with the Amber ABS Warning Lamp BRAKES AVAILABLE DELCO MORAINE IIl ANTILOCK REAR ABS ONLY BASE BRAKES This parameter indicates what type of braking the vehicle is capable of supporting If everything is operating normally ANTI LOCK braking will be available Under certain fault conditions ABS braking will only be possible on the rear wheels and REAR ABS ONLY will be displayed Other failure modes will result in the loss of all ABS capability and the message BASE BRAKES is displayed ENABLE RELAY CMD DELCO VI ON OFF This parameter indicates whether the Enable Relay is being commanded ON or OFF FRONT WHL SPEEDS DELCO MORAINE Ill amp DELCO VI MPH or KPH 0 to 255 Front wheel speeds are displayed such that the LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED is on the left hand side and the RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED is on the right hand side The front wheel speeds are generated by the change in flux as a toothed ring passes in front of a variable reluctance sensor A sinusoidal waveform resu
25. codes 284 software version 306 Software before operating 72 to 74 solenoid control 203 solenoid test 189 260 267 solenoid tests 133 148 170 300 324 Stabilitrak 265 steering wheel position sensor SWPS 187 system ID 255 T tester induced DTCs 7 Teves Mark II 310 diagnostics 310 317 with ABS diagnostics 317 without ABS diagnostics 310 Teves Mark IV 323 Throttle position sensor learn 142 throttle position sensor learn 179 tire inflation monitor system TIM 259 tire size calibration 277 traction control 265 traction control system TCS 156 176 258 328 traction control system test TCS 273 traction off warning light 323 trigger 117 ABS stop 118 any code 118 automatic 117 manual 117 single code 118 soft fault 118 trigger condition 117 trigger point 117 trim calibration 277 trouble codes 132 147 169 199 286 288 to 289 troubleshooting 332 V variable effort steering VES 160 181 vehicle identification number 108 vehicle speed signal VSS 295 vehicle speed signal VSS monitor 296 voltage check 281 voltage load 255 voltage load test 240 voltage spikes 6 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Index 364
26. press yp while the ABS TCS TESTS menu is displayed ACTIVE KEYS Select Solenoid Test or a solenoid for testing Confirm if you wish to continue Solenoid Tests or actuate the pressure hold function Actuate the pressure release function Return to Select Solenoid menu Submode F1 Automatic Test This test is automatically performed once by EBCM during each ignition cycle when vehicle reaches approximately 4 mph The scantool performs this test automatically during ABS TCS Tests mode The auto test cycles each solenoid valve and pump motor to check component operation If a failure exists EBCM sets a trouble code and activates the ABS light This test normally takes approximately 6 seconds to perform If the test is performed in less than 1 second or if you see a TEST INHIBITED message displayed on the tester the test did not function properly You should cycle the ignition on the vehicle and disconnect and reconnect power to the tester before rerunning the test If the AUTOMATIC TEST COMPLETE message is not displayed within 30 seconds you probably have a bad connection to the DLC Check the connection cycle the ignition and cycle power to the tester before rerunning the test GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 135 Bosch 2S Micro ABS ASR System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes To select Auto Test do the following 1 Select ABS TCS TESTS by pressing 2 Select AUTO TEST
27. pump relay Antilock warning light and speed sensors on front wheels rear wheels or rear axle CAUTION Once scantool is disconnected ensure ignition is OFF at least 10 seconds i before road testing vehicle This allows the system to return to normal operation When testing is completed ignition must remain OFF for at least 10 seconds to return ABS system to normal operation MODE F0 DATA LIST Wheel speed and brake switch status parameters are monitored by the scantool The vehicle can be driven while the diagnostic data parameters are being displayed See Mode F0 Data List on page 111 for more information MODE F1 CODE HISTORY In this mode trouble code history data is displayed on the scantool History data includes how many ignition cycles since trouble code occurred brake switch status vehicle speed and ABS state when trouble code occurred Up to 3 trouble codes are included in ABS history data See Mode F2 DTC s on page 113 for more information MODE F2 TROUBLE CODES Trouble codes are stored in the EBCM and are displayed in the scantool Up to 3 trouble codes can be stored in the EBCM The EBCM also records when a trouble code was stored and ABS status when trouble code was set During trouble code display a 3 second delay occurs between each trouble code displayed and a brief description of the trouble code is displayed Trouble codes can also be cleared from the EBCM memory The EBCM also stores other inf
28. 1999 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1999 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SES TYPE CONFIG Park Avenue C Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA TIM Riviera G Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Le Sabre H Delco Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA GM 16 Century Regal W DBC7 Class 2 OBD Il C2 ABS TCS ETS TIM VES GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 49 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1999 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SE TYPE CONFIG Eldorado E Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ICCS1 ICCS2 ICCS 2 3 ABS TCS TIM MSVA DeVille Seville K Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ICCS2 ICCS 2 3 ABS TCS TIM MSVA 1999 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Camaro F Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TCS Cavalier J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS ETS EVO GM 16 Metro M Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Malibu N Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS VES TIM Lumina W Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 Monte Carlo W Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 Corvette Y Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA Active Handling GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 50 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1999 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS 19
29. 2U UART GM ABS TCS VES Eldorado E Bosch 2U UART GM ABS TCS w 4 6L RSS ELC Concours DeVille K Bosch 2U UART GM Seville ABS TCS w 4 6L RSS ELC 1994 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT BEDTEM TYPE CONFIG Caprice B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Camaro 228 F Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 3 4L GM 16 8th VIN S Cavalier J Delco VI UART GM ABS Beretta L Delco VI UART GM ABS Corsica L Delco VI UART GM ABS Lumina W Delco VI UART GM ABS Corvette Y Bosch 2U UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS SEL GM 16 1994 GEO PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Prizm S Delco VI UART GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 29 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1994 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS 1994 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SER TYPE CONFIG Cutlass Ciera A Delco VI UART GM ABS Ninety Eight Regency C Teves Mark IV UART GM Touring Sedan ABS TCS Ninety Eight Regency C Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 Touring Sedan ABS TCS w 3 8L GM 16 8th VIN S Eighty Eight H Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 3 8L GM 16 8th VIN S Achieva N Delco VI UART GM ABS VES Cutlass Supreme W Delco VI UART GM ABS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SYS TYPE CONFIG Firebird Formula F Delco VI UART GM Trans Am ABS Firebird F Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 3
30. 4L GM 16 8th VIN S Bonneville H Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Bonneville H Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 3 8L GM 16 8th VIN L 1 Sunbird J Delco VI UART GM ABS Grand Am N Delco VI UART GM ABS VES Grand Prix W Delco VI UART GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 30 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1994 SATURN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SE TYPE CONFIG All models Z Delco VI UART GM ABS TCS 1994 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS MODEL C K Truck BODY VIN STH DIGIT C K SYSTEM Kelsey Hayes 4WAL 3 Sensor VCM 4WAL OBD II C 4WAL DATA TYPE Class 2 ADAPTER CONFIG GM R Suburban C K Kelsey Hayes 4WAL 3 Sensor VCM 4WAL OBD II C 4WAL UART GM R S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes RWAL ZP RWAL VCM RWAL UART GM R S T Truck 2 or 4 door S T Kelsey Hayes 4WAL 3 Sensor VCM 4WAL OBD II C 4WAL Class 2 OBD II C2 GM 16 Blazer S T Kelsey Hayes 4WAL 3 Sensor VCM 4WAL OBD II C 4WAL Class 2 OBD II C2 GM 16 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL 3 Sensor VCM 4WAL OBD II C 4WAL UART GM R L M Van L M Kelsey Hayes 4WAL 3 Sensor VCM 4WAL OBD II C 4WAL RWAL UART GM R Tracker E J Kelsey Hayes RWAL ZP RWAL VCM RWAL UART GM R GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 31 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehic
31. 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS Sunfire J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS Grand Am N DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM Grand Prix Ww Bosch 5 3 UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 2003 SATURN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH SSES TYPE CONFIG ION A Bosch 8 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP 2003 CHEVROLET GMC OLDSMOBILE PONTIAC LIGHT TRUCKS VANS MPVs BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 5TH SCH TYPE CONFIG Aztek Rendezvous AIB Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS TPM Avalanche Escalade C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 EXT Sierra Silverado ABS TCS if equipped Suburban Tahoe Yukon RTD EVO Express Savana G Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS Astro Safari L M Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 66 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2003 CHEVROLET GMC OLDSMOBILE PONTIAC LIGHT TRUCKS VANS MPVs CONTINUED BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 5TH SES TYPE CONFIG Tracker E J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS Forward Control P Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R ABS S 10 Jimmy Sonoma S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 Blazer Bravada Envoy ABS TCS if equipped Trailblazer Montana Silhouette UNIX DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 Venture ABS TCS Hummer H2 N Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS 2003 CHEVROLET GMC MEDIUM DUTY TRUCKS
32. 6 inches off the floor with the transmission in neutral 5 Select Solenoid Test from the OBD CONTROLS menu 6 Select the desired Isolation Solenoid test Have an assistant command the Isolation valve ON with the scantool 7 Have the assistant press and hold the brake pedal 8 Attempt to move the wheel being tested by hand it should move even though the assistant is applying pressure to the brake pedal The wheels may be difficult to turn by hand but can be moved if the system is working properly Solenoid Tests Dump Valves The solenoid test for Dump valves activates the selected hydraulic wheel circuit Dump valve placing it in the pressure release position When in the pressure release position the valve allows wheel caliper pressure to be returned to the master cylinder circuit This is done under ABS operation conditions because the EBCM has determined that the wheel is moving too slowly and holding additional master cylinder pressure from it has not allowed it to rotate at an appropriate speed The scantool commands the valve to release hydraulic pressure to the affected brake caliper which should allow the technician to spin the wheel even through an assistant is applying pressure to the brake pedal Perform the test as follows 1 Ignition OFF 2 Install the scantool 3 Turn ignition to RUN 4 Raise vehicle such that wheels are about 6 inches off the floor with the transmission in neutral 5 Have an assistant press and
33. 7 Select the Hold or Release command for the wheel position under test Command the hold or release solenoid ON by using the UP arrow on the scantool 8 Attempt to move the wheel being tested by hand it should move even though the assistant 1s applying pressure to the brake pedal The front wheels may be difficult to turn by hand but can be moved if the system is working properly GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 267 Mode F4 OBD Controls 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID TEST F1 LAMP TEST F2 AUTO BLEED PUT VEHICLE Y IN PARK PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER SOLENOID TEST Ah 0 LF Inlet LF Outlet RF Inlet RF Outlet LR Inlet LR Outlet RR Inlet RR Outlet LF Inlet Sol DEENERGIZED LF Outlet Sol DEENGERGIZED OFF FIGURE 5 74 F0 Solenoid Test GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 268 Mode F4 OBD Controls 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE AUTOMATED BLEED The Auto Bleed procedure is used to provide a complete brake system bleed for the 4 channel Delco Bosch ABS system The Auto Bleed procedure cycles the system valves and runs the ABS TCS pump to purge air from all secondary circuits that are normally closed off during non ABS TCS mode operation and bleeding The Auto Bleed test should be used when it is suspected that air has been ingested into the system s secondary circuits or when the ABS actuator assembly has bee
34. A Refer to the GM Service Manual for additional information GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 166 Bosch 2U RSS ELC System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE F0 RSS CALIBRATE F1 ELC TRIM SET F2 SWPS m ROAD SENSING SUSPENSION RECALIBRATION PRESS ENTER ENTER ENSURE VEHICLE IS ON A FLAT AND LEVEL SURFACE BE SURE ENGINE IS OFF AND IGN KEY IS IN THE RUN POSITION IS VIN CORRECT 1G6ET1299SU601797 SELECT DESIRED RSS CALIBRATION F0 ETC F1 ELD VIN INFORMATION DOES NOT MATCH VEHICLE SEE SERVICE MANUAL TEST IN PROGRESS RSS CALIBRATION COMPLETE NO RSS DATA CHECK DLC MAKE SURE ING KEY IS IN RUN POSITION NO DATA RECEIVED FROM RSS MODULE FIGURE 5 27 F0 RSS Control Module Calibration 1993 94 Cadillac with RSS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 167 Bosch 2U RSS ELC System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F1 ELC TRIM SET This tester mode is available when testing most 1993 96 E and K body vehicles with Electronic Level Control ELC and Road Sensing Suspension RSS systems Select this mode to set the trim for the vehicle height at the vehicle s suspension resting position It requires removing excess weight and entering the fuel level at the time of the trim set To select ELC Trim Set do the following 1 Select ELC Trim Set by pressing a 2 Follow the
35. B on tester end connected to pin H on vehicle end Pin M on tester end connected to pin M on vehicle end Remove the cartridge and perform the tester Self test refer to the tester OPERATORS MANUAL GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 335 No Communication B If You re Having a Problem NO COMMUNICATION No communication with vehicle Check DLC or ECU not present Most Likely Cause Tester cable has come loose from DLC Other Possible Causes Ignition switch has been turned OFF e Cable is not plugged securely into tester Serial data link is shorted or open circuited ABS controller is malfunctioning Recommendations Verify that ignition is in RUN e Verify that tester is plugged securely into DLC e Check for serial data link shorted or open CHECK FOR OPEN SHORT CIRCUIT CHECK FOR OPEN SHORT CHECK CONNECTION IN VSS CIRCUIT OR 4WAL TO ALDL SHORT BLOWN FUSE ALDL WIRING OPEN RWAL 4WAL Most Likely Cause e Ignition switch is not in RUN Other Possible Causes Tester cable is not plugged securely into RWAL AWAL ADAPTER connector RWAL AWAL ADAPTER is not plugged securely into DLC RWAL AWAL Adapter power plug is not connected to power port on the back of the DLC cable e Cable is not plugged securely into tester Serial data link is shorted or open circuited GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 336 Check Class 2 Communication Hardware B
36. C Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA TIM Riviera G Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Le Sabre H Delco Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA GM 16 Skylark N Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS EVO GM 16 Century Regal W Delco VI Class 2 OBD Il C2 ABS TCS ETS TIM VES 1997 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Eldorado E Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ICCS1 ICCS2 ICCS 2 3 ABS TCS TIM MSVA DeVille Seville K Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ICCS2 ICCS 2 3 ABS TCS TIM MSVA GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 41 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1997 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT oP TYPE CONFIG Cavalier J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Metro M Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Malibu N Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS EVO Lumina W Delco VI UART OBD Il C2 ABS ETS TIM GM 16 MSVA Monte Carlo W Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS ETS TIM GM 16 MSVA Corvette Y Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA Camaro F Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 1997 GEO PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT PISTEM TYPE CONFIG Metro M Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Prizm S Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 42 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle
37. Chassis Adapter Usage GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 85 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started ADAPTE SYSTEM R TESTER CONFIG ADAPTER DESCRIPTION 16 pin DLC with GM 16 MTS 3100 GM 12 14 Pin Adapter 02001384 Figure 4 21 Non OBD II Systems 16 12 Pin Non OBD II 02001575 Non Class 2 Adapter Tech 1A GM 12 14 Pin Adapter 02001384 Figure 4 21 16 12 Pin Non OBD II 02001575 Adapter Tech 1 16 12 Pin Non OBD II 02001575 Figure 4 22 Adapter Bosch GM B MTS 3100 GM 12 14 Pin Adapter 02001384 Figure 4 23 12 12 Pin Bosch ABS 02001033 Adapter Tech 1A GM 12 14 Pin Adapter 02001384 Figure 4 24 12 12 Pin Bosch ABS 02001033 Adapter Tech 1 12 12 Pin Bosch ABS 02001033 Figure 4 25 Adapter TABLE 4 3 Chassis Adapter Usage Tech 1 RWAL 4WAL cable can be used with all other applications in place of the 02001578 Tech 1 ALDL cable b OBD II and OBD II C are early adapter cable configurations utilized by the tester to communicate with systems connected to the OBD II DLC If you have one of these configurations please reference OBD II C2 in the Adapter Config column of the vehicle coverage tables for the vehicle you are diagnosing P GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 86 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 6 GM Adapter Configuration for MTS 3100 MTS 3100 DLC Cable GM 12 14 Pin Adapter GM Chassis Appl
38. Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 106 Using the Tester Keypad and Menus 4 Getting Started USING THE TESTER KEYPAD AND MENUS The operation of the tester software is simple so once you ve read through the manual to get a general idea of how it operates you won t have to refer to it very often You simply sequence through the operation of the cartridge by pressing keys on the tester in response to messages displayed on the tester In general this sequencing is performed by pressing function keys G to select items from menus displayed on the tester Refer to the table below for a summary of the basic key functions Each section in this manual contains a table indicating which keys are active for that mode of operation GENERAL TESTER KEY FUNCTIONS Answer questions asked by the tester and scroll through data parameters Terminate operating modes and return to previous menu F Used to control data display or to turn outputs ON or OFF Oh Oo Numeric keys used for entering trouble code designations G G9 Function keys used to select from functions displayed on a menu Used at end of a numeric key sequence or to inform tester that a requested action has been completed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 107 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 4 Getting Started VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN If you are in doubt about the type of vehicle you are testing refer to the Vehic
39. Codes Display and Clearing ACTIVE KEYS G Determine what codes to clear Freeze the display of the latest trouble code Display the next trouble code Terminate trouble code display GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 201 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The ABS snapshot helps isolate problems of intermittent ABS operation Information is captured before and after a trigger condition The manual and automatic trigger can be selected You will also be allowed to review a stored snapshot from this menu Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F4 ABS TESTS SELECT MODE Y SELECT ABS TEST PUMP MOTOR TESTS F3 ABS SNAPSHOT F0 MANUAL CNTRL F0 RUN CYCLE F4 ABS TESTS F1 AUTO BLEED F1 TOTAL TIME F2 HYDRL CNTRL F2 LEAK DOWN F3 PUMP MOTOR F3 CYCLES W O F4 ABS VERSION BRAKE APPLY FIGURE 5 45 Delco Moraine ABS III Test Menu F0 MANUAL CONTROL The manual relay and solenoid control function allows you to turn the ABS solenoids and relays ON and OFF and monitor feedback from them F1 AUTO BLEED The solenoid bleed and check out test automatically sequences through solenoids actuation to allow the removal of air internal to the Powermaster III hydraulic unit F2 HYDRAULIC CONTROL The hydraulic functional check allows testing of the ABS brake hydraulic channels by allowing brake pressure HOLD and RELEASE f
40. Control P Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor EVO Class 2 OBD II C2 S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor 1999 MEDIUM DUTY TRUCKS DATA ADAPTER MODEL ERIE YSTEM 9 S SE TYPE CONFIG T55 T85 Medium Tilt C T Series Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 86 0 BBC F6 F7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor C Series Crew Cab D C Series Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R C7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor Bus Commercial T B7 Chassis Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R Chassis Cowl B7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 52 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2000 VEHICLE COVERAGE 2000 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT TYPE CONFIG Park Avenue C Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS DRP ICCS3 MSVA TIM Le Sabre H Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS DRP ICCS3 MSVA TIM Century Regal W DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TCS MSVA TIM 2000 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM S 4TH DIGIT SIS TYPE CONFIG Eldorado E Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA TIM SLS STS K Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS MSVA VSES DeVille K Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS MSVA VSES GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 53 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2000 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS
41. Coverage 1997 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SNP TYPE CONFIG Aurora G Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Eighty Eight LSS H Delco Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 Regency ABS TCS MSVA GM 16 Achieva N Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS EVO GM 16 Cutlass N Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS EVO Intrigue W Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TIM MSVA 1997 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SE TYPE CONFIG Bonneville H Delco Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA GM 16 Sunfire J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Grand Am N Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS EVO GM 16 Grand Prix W Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 Firebird F Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 1997 SATURN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SUS TEM TYPE CONFIG All models Z Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 43 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1997 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS VANS MPVS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 5TH DIGIT ES TYPE CONFIG Tracker E J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Lumina Venture U X Delco VI UART OBD II C2 Tran Sport Silhouette ABS VES GM 16 C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor EVO Class 2 OBD II C2 Van G Kelsey Hayes UAR
42. GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 260 Mode F4 OBD Controls 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 4 Raise vehicle such that wheels are about 6 inches off the floor with the transmission in neutral 5 Have an assistant press and hold the brake pedal 6 Select SOLENOID TEST from the SELECT TEST menu 7 Select the Inlet or Outlet command for the wheel position under test Command the Inlet or Outlet solenoid ON by using the UP arrow on the scantool 8 Attempt to move the wheel being tested by hand it should move even though the assistant is applying pressure to the brake pedal The front wheels may be difficult to turn by hand but can be moved if the system is working properly SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID TEST F1 LAMP TEST F2 AUTO BLEED PUT VEHICLE Y IN PARK PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER SOLENOID TEST Y F0 LF Inlet LF Outlet RF Inlet RF Outlet LR Inlet LR Outlet RR Inlet RR Outlet LF Inlet Sol DEENERGIZED LF Outlet Sol DEENGERGIZED OFF FIGURE 5 72 F0 Solenoid Test GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 261 Mode F4 OBD Controls 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F2 AUTOMATED BLEED Perform the Automated ABS Bleed procedure whenever one of the following conditions occur Manual bleeding at the wheel cylinders does not achieve the desired pedal height or feel You replace the Brake Pressure Modulator Valve BPMV Extreme loss of bra
43. GM data link based on SAE J1850 variable pulse width class B medium speed communication network interface 10 4kbps VPW 0 7vDC Supercharged Serial Data Link Sensing and Diagnostic Module part of the SIR system the SDM contains a sensing device which converts vehicle velocity changes into an electrical signal The electrical signal is processed by the SDM and compared to a value stored in memory Climate Control Head Visual Information Center Security T T Secondary Section Selective Ride Control Sensor Service Engine Soon Light Sequential Fuel Injection SHRT SHT SIR Snapshot Test SOL SPD SPS SRV SSS STR SW SWPS SYS TAC TBI TCC TCM TCP TCS TDP TEMP TEVES THK TICS TIM TP TPI TPL TPS Short Supplemental Inflatable Restraint An active restraint system used to protect the automobile s occupant from being forced into the dash and windshield upon impact in the event of an accident Tester operating mode which is used to isolate intermittent problems Solenoid Speedometer Dimming Speed Signal Service Speed Sensitive Steering Used on 1997 and 1998 E and K body Steering Switch Steering Wheel Position Sensor System Throttle Actuator Control Throttle Body Injection Torque Converter Clutch Transmission Control Module TCC PWM Solenoid Traction Control System for limiting slippage during acceleration Twilight Delay Pot Temperature Teves
44. I TESTS REPEATS ABOVE SEQUENCE FOR REMAINING BRAKE CIRCUITS Lower vehicle and disconnect brake bleed equipment Check brake eo fluid level Fill if necessary Procedure Complete Press EXIT FIGURE 5 40 Submode F1 Auto Bleed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 193 Bosch RTD Real Time Damping System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes BOSCH RTD REAL TIME DAMPING SYSTEM FUNCTION F1 RTD DIAGNOSTICS Use the Real Time Damping Diagnostics for 1996 Y body vehicles equipped with RTD This selection provides several test modes for testing and calibrating the RTD system A list of options available for RTD diagnostics follows Mode FO Data List Provides a list of parameters related to the Real Time Damping suspension system All data list functions are available in using the RTD Data List as described in Lamp Sequence Check on page 311 ModeF2 DTCs Retrieves and clears trouble codes related to the RTD system The codes are displayed as either current or history Current codes typically cause the SERVICE RIDE CONTROL lamp to be illuminated and history or intermittent codes are present with the lamp out After viewing trouble codes the tester prompts you to clear DTC s Simply press the key when this is displayed Mode F4 OBD Controls Displays a menu with more RTD diagnostic options Submode F0 Damper Test This test mode allows you to control each
45. II C2 Venture ABS TCS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 69 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2004 CHEVROLET GMC MEDIUM DUTY TRUCKS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER SERIES 5TH SEN TYPE CONFIG T B7 Chassis Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL D C Series Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL C T Series Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD Il C2 4WAL B W4 Series Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 70 4 GETTING STARTED This chapter provides information to assist you in operating your Vetronix tester and software application In addition to helping you identify vehicles covered by the software it shows you how to connect your tester to the vehicle and explains how to begin performing system diagnostic functions It is suggested that you read this manual completely before operating the tester and the system software GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 71 Setting Up the Tester 4 Getting Started SETTING UP THE TESTER MTS 3100 Before you operate the application software do the following 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Connect the tester DLC formerly called the ALDL cable to the tester and tighten the screws 3 Insert the cartridge into the slot at the top rear of the tester FIGURE 4 1 Inserting Cartridge into the MTS 3100 Application Cartridge or Mass Storage Cartridge MSC MTS 3100
46. INFORMATION Submode F0 PROM ID SYS ID The PROM ID function simply displays the 4WAL software version in the unit being tested NOTE EB Software ID selection is not available on some systems To display 4WAL Software Version do the following 1 Select the PROM ID function from the OBD CONTROLS mode menu by pressing aD 2 The tester prompts you to turn the ignition OFF then ON run position 3 The tester then displays the 4WAL unit software version 4WAL VERSION ID XXXXXXX Submode F3 ECU Info For Class 2 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL ABS systems this submode displays Software Date Level and Platform ID Submode F4 VIN For most Class 2 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL ABS systems this submode displays the Vehicle Identification Number VIN as read from the Powertrain Control Module PCM GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 306 Mode F0 Data List 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes REAL TIME DAMPENING VARIABLE EFFORT STEERING RTD EVO The Real Time Dampening suspension system provides improved ride and handling for both on and off road conditions The RTD EVO module monitors the body height compared to the wheel height vehicle speed steering wheel position and speed of turning lift dive status and the input from the tow haul switch The ECU levels the vehicle based on inputs from these sensors by either raising or lowering the pressure in the appropriate shock absorber s The SCM Suspension Control Modu
47. IS DEPLEATED REMOVE FOOT FROM BRAKE BRAKE ON OFF PRESS ENTER TO INITIALIZE THE MODULATOR FOR THE EMB TEST DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL FIRMLY BRAKE OFF DOES THE BRAKE PEDAL SINK TOWARDS FLOOR YES NO M TECH 1 guides you through the ABS EMB Tests END OF DIAGNOSIS LEFT FRONT EMB FOOT REMOVED BOTH EMBs APPEAR SLIPS FROM BRAKE TO HOLD MOTORS REPLACE MOTOR DURING TEST NO TROUBLE FOUND PACK REPEAT TEST EMB Passed Condition EMB Fault Condition Operator Error Message FIGURE 5 59 EMB Functional Tests ACTIVE KEYS Select EMB TEST Electromagnetic Brake Advance the screen after performing requested action ZA is Reply to questions about the results of actions that tester has asked you to perform EXIT Return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 233 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F4 Motor Pack Test Motor Test Once the motor pack has been separated from the ABS hydraulic modulator the Motor Pack Test functionally tests the motor pack for proper operation If the motor pack is still attached to the modulator the tester performs the gear tension relief sequence to allow you to remove it CAUTION Prior to removing the motor pack from the ABS hydraulic modulator prevailing motor torque or gear tension must be removed from the gear train to ease the motor pac
48. Mark IV ABS system contained in some GM vehicles Throttle Kicker Timing and Ignition rate Control System Tire Inflation Module Temperature Tuned Port Injection Twilight Park Lamps Throttle Position Sensor GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 360 D Glossary and Abbreviations TQUE TRM Trouble Codes TST TT or T T UART UNLCK V VAC VATS VCC VCM VES VF VFD VIM VIN VOL VS VSS WHL WOT WS or W S WSS WST ZP Torque Terminal Same as Diagnostic Codes Set by a system ECU to indicate the occurrence of abnormal conditions Test Telltales Telltale Lamp Warning indicators on the instrument panel Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter Unlock Volts Vacuum Vehicle Anti Theft System Viscous Converter Clutch Vehicle Control Module Variable Effort Steering Vacuum Fluorescent Used in many of the displays Vacuum Fluorescent Dimming Vehicle Interface Module An in line interface that expands tester functionality Vehicle Identification Number Vent Volume Vacuum Solenoid Vehicle Speed Sensor Wheel Wide Open Throttle Windshield Wheel Speed Sensor Wastegate Zero Pressure GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 361 A ABS braking 7 ABS motor 306 ABS tests 202 ABS version 218 244 ABS warning lamp 257 adapters 80 antilock brake system 331 anti lock warning light 323 ASR test 140 auto bleed 177 206 326 autobleed 3
49. Modes SUBMODE F6 MAGNA STEER TEST The Electronic Brake Traction Control Module EBTCM controls a bi directional magnetic rotary solenoid The solenoid which is located in the steering gear adjusts the amount of power steering assist to achieve a given level of driver effort to turn the vehicle The EBTCM varies the steering assist by adjusting the current flow through the solenoid The amount of steering assist adjusted for steering is dependent upon vehicle speed As the vehicle speed increases steering assist decreases driver effort increases and as speed decreases steering assist increases driver effort decreases The Electronic Brake Traction Control Module EBTCM is the same controller the ABS TCS and Magna Steer systems communicate with Magna Steer Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs can be retrieved by selecting F2 DTC Info from the SELECT MODE menu If an open or short is present CKT 345 WHT or CKT 1787 GRY the EBTCM sets DTC C1241 Magna Steer circuit malfunction The Magna Steer test controls the steering effort from Full Firm to Less Firm as the technician turns the steering wheel from left to right The test lasts for approximately 12 seconds The reading on the tester toggles between Full Firm and Less Firm every 4 seconds The software displays any DTCs found while running the Magna Steer test MAGNA STEER TEST TURN STEERING WHEEL PRESS ENTER TO START ENTER MAGNASTEER TE
50. OBD II C2 ICCS1 ICCS2 ICCS 2 3 ABS TCS TIM MSVA DeVille Seville K Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ICCS2 ICCS 2 3 ABS TCS TIM MSVA 1998 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SES TYPE CONFIG Cavalier J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Metro M Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Malibu N Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS EVO Lumina Ww Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS ETS TIM GM 16 MSVA Monte Carlo W Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS ETS TIM GM 16 MSVA Corvette Y Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA Camaro F Bosch 5 3 UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 46 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1998 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SNP TYPE CONFIG Aurora G Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Eighty Eight LSS H Delco Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 Regency ABS TCS MSVA GM 16 Achieva N Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS EVO GM 16 Cutlass N Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS EVO Intrigue W Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TIM MSVA 1998 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SE TYPE CONFIG Bonneville H Delco Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA GM 16 Sunfire J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Grand Am N Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS EVO GM 16 Grand Prix
51. RSS CALIBRATE To calibrate the RSS Control Module do the following 1 Select RSS Calibrate by pressing af 2 Key ON engine OFF 3 Follow user instructions on scantool screen 4 After calibrating RSS control module a trim height adjustment procedure and a steering sensor trim position adjustment must be performed RSS DTCs RSS DTCs can be retrieved using the on board diagnostics available on the vehicle To enter the diagnostic mode proceed as follows 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Push the OFF and red warmer buttons on the Climate Control Center CCC simultaneously and hold until the segment check appears on the instrumental panel cluster Segment Check A segment check is when all lights in the IPC are turned on The purpose of illuminating the IPC is to verify that all segments of the LED displays are working Further diagnostics should not be attempted unless all segments appear as this could lead to misdiagnosis If any portions or segments of the IPC display are inoperative diagnose and report this problem first To select the RSS System do the following Following the display flashing of any trouble codes present the first available system is displayed While selecting a system to test any of the following actions may be taken to control the display 1 Depressing the fan speed up T button on the CCC selects the displayed system for testing 2 Depressing the fan speed down
52. SELECT SYSTEM menu CAUTION When using the MTS 3100 the cigarette lighter adapter must be used to e supply a path to ground GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 162 Bosch 2U Select Ride System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT SYSTEM F0 ABS F1 SELECT RIDE SELECT MODE F0 FLASH CODES F1 CLEAR CODES WATCH SERVICE RIDE CONTROL LAMP CLEAR CODES PRESS FIGURE 5 25 F1 Select Ride ACTIVE KEYS Ga Choose Select Ride Control system Select Clear Codes Select Flash Codes mode Clear trouble codes Return to the SELECT SYSTEM menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 163 Bosch 2U Select Ride System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F1 CLEAR CODES The selection CLEAR DTCs or CLEAR CODES is displayed when testing a Y car with Selective Ride Control and when the SEL system is selected on the tester When selected the tester erases the Ride Control DTC s that are present The Selective Ride Control tests allow you to clear trouble codes associated with the ride control system The codes are flashed on the Ride Control Lamp Selective Ride Control system To select Clear Codes do the following 1 Press a from the SELECT SYSTEM menu to clear codes related to the Selective Ride Control system 2 Press to FLASH CODES on the Selective Ride Control Lamp 3 Press ai to select CLEAR CODES The test
53. SMART CLUSTER The smart cluster operates the instrument panel and allows for fail safe operation of the amber ABS warning lamp The smart cluster illuminates the amber ABS warning lamp when a lamp on message is received from the EBCM EBTCM The lamp also is illuminated if the Class 2 state of health message from the EBCM EBTCM is lost A Lamp on message can be caused by an ABS DTC a loss of EBCM EBTCM power or ground or Class 2 wiring fault that results in no communication GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 257 Low Trac Lamp 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes LOW TRAC LAMP The Low Trac Lamp is found on some vehicles with the DBC 7 ABS system The Low Trac telltale is illuminated during a traction control event The Low Trac lamp is a traction control active light TCS Traction Control System TCS works a little differently than Electronic Traction Control System ETS ETS sends a torque reduction percentage request to the PCM The TCS has a hard wire with a PWM signal that runs between the PCM and the EBTCM Based on that information the EBTCM gives the PCM a requested torque The PCM returns with the reduction in torque that it plans to deliver known as delivered torque The EBTCM has embedded diagnostics that detect whether or not the requested torque reduction is being delivered If not the EBTCM could set a DTC in the PCM or in the EBTCM The TCS talks to the PCM over a dedicated PWM line and also ove
54. Selective Ride Control tests allow you to clear trouble codes associated with the ride control system The codes are flashed on the Ride Control Lamp Selective Ride Control system To select Clear Codes do the following 1 Press a from the Select System menu to CLEAR CODES related to the Selective Ride Control system 2 Press to FLASH CODES on the Selective Ride Control Lamp 3 Press ai to select Clear Codes The tester instructs you to press the key to clear all ride control trouble codes 4 Press CAD to return to the SELECT MODE menu SELECT SYSTEM F0 ABS F1 SELECT RIDE SELECT MODE F0 FLASH CODES F1 CLEAR CODES CLEAR CODES PRESS A WATCH SERVICE RIDE CONTROL LAMP FIGURE 5 17 Clear Codes ACTIVE KEYS G Choose Select Ride Select Clear Codes Select Flash Codes mode Clear codes Return to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 146 Bosch 2U ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes BOSCH 2U ABS TCS SYSTEM The Bosch 2U Antilock Brake System ABS increases vehicle steerability directional stability and optimum deceleration in severe braking conditions on most road surfaces The ABS monitors wheel speed and controls brakeline pressure to eliminate uncontrolled skidding Bosch 2U ABS consists of Electronic Brake Control Module EBCM hydraulic modulator solenoid valves pump motor ABS valve relay
55. T B7 Chassis Bus Kelsey Hayes Hydraulic UART GM 16R Commercial 4WAL 4 SENSOR Chassis Cowl B7 2003 VEHICLE COVERAGE 2003 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Park Avenue Ultra C Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS Le Sabre H Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS Century Regal W DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM 2003 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH PADIEM TYPE CONFIG CTS D DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP DeVille K Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 Seville SLS STS ABS DRP TCS 2003 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 4TH a TYPE CONFIG Cavalier J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS Malibu N DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM Impala Monte Carlo W DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS MSVA TIM Corvette Y Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS VES GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 65 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2003 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODE 4TH S STEM TYPE CONFIG Aurora G Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS Alero N DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM 2003 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM P 4TH pie TYPE CONFIG Bonneville H Delco Bosch
56. The tester display confirms that you are in the ABS Hydraulic Control Test and instructs you to raise the wheel s to be tested GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 250 Delco ABS VI Class 2 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 8 Select the wheel to be tested 9 When a wheel has been selected the tester instructs you to place the transmission in park Then firmly depress the brake pedal Do not release the pedal until the tester instructs you to do so 10 Have an assistant attempt to rotate the wheel being tested If the wheel does not rotate the base brake apply is working properly 11 With the brake pedal still depressed press on the tester to start the test a The tester displays RELEASE on the screen and the assistant should be able to spin the wheel This verifies the ABS brake pressure release b The tester then displays HOLD on the screen and a countdown timer During this portion of the test the hydraulic circuit is being held open and the assistant should be able to spin the selected wheel This verifies that the ABS unit can HOLD the released pressure and checks for internal leaks c The tester then commands the ABS modulator to APPLY APPLY is displayed on the screen The assistant should not be able to spin the wheel selected at this point This test verifies that the ABS modulator can reapply brake pressure to the selected channel NOTE When you exit from the Hydraulic Control
57. W Bosch 5 3 UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Firebird F Bosch 5 3 UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 1998 SATURN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SUS TEM TYPE CONFIG Saturn Z Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 47 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1998 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS VANS MPVS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 5TH DIGIT ES TYPE CONFIG Tracker E J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Lumina Venture U X Delco VI UART OBD II C2 Tran Sport Silhouette ABS VES TCS GM 16 C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor EVO Van G Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor EVO Class 2 OBD II C2 Van L M Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor EVO Class 2 OBD II C2 Forward Control P Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor EVO Class 2 OBD II C2 S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 48 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1998 MEDIUM DUTY TRUCKS DATA ADAPTER MODEL ERIE YSTEM 9 S S dus TYPE CONFIG T55 T85 Medium Tilt C T Series Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 86 0 BBC F6 F7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor C Series Crew Cab D C Series Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R C7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor Bus Commercial T B7 Chassis Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R Chassis Cowl B7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor
58. WITH MOTOR PACK SEPARATED FROM MODULATOR A A IF MODULATOR GEARS ROTATE REFER TO NO GEAR MOVEMENT CONNECT MOTOR PACK WIRING TO MOTOR PACK A FIGURE 5 60 Motor Pack Test Motor Test GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 235 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F5 Gear Tension Relief Test CAUTION Prior to removing the motor pack from the ABS hydraulic modulator prevailing motor torque or gear tension must be removed from the gear train to ease the motor pack separation process and prevent personal injury and gear train damage EB This test does not apply to vehicles with Traction Control To select Gear Tension Relief Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Press G to select the GEAR TENSION RELIEF Test 3 The tester confirms that you are in the Gear Tension Relief test Consult the service manual for pre test preparations The display automatically scrolls after four seconds or after pressing the key 4 The tester asks you to press the zl isis key to start the Gear Tension Relief sequence Press zi 5 The tester informs you when the Gear Tension Relief sequence has been completed Press to scroll to the next page of instructions 6 To finish the test turn the ignition key OFF follow instructions on the next screen Press 2248 after the motor pack is separated from the hydraulic modulat
59. ZPRWAL ABS Systems ACTIVE KEYS NO Determine what DTCs to clear Display the next DTC Freeze the display of the latest DTC Terminate DTC display GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 290 ZP RWAL ABS Systems 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F3 OBD CONTROLS Submode F0 DRA Check DRA Check does not function on 6 2L diesel or 1991 trucks over 8600 NOTES GVW with power train control module PCM and 4L80E electronic transmission The DRA CHECK function is not available for 1992 to present vehicles The Digital Ratio Adapter DRA Check allows you to compare the ECM the RWAL ECU the speedometer and a calculated speed to help you determine if a faulty speed signal is causing a malfunction The calculated speed is accomplished by first measuring the circumference of the vehicle tire and obtaining the axle ratio With the tire size and the axle ratio entered in the appropriate screens the tester performs the calculation The ECM RWAL and CALCULATED speeds are displayed while driving at a constant 50 mph calculated speed To check DRA do the following Select the OBD CONTROLS mode by pressing during the Select Mode phase of operation Select the DRA CHECK by pressing N F0 2 5 L VIN 5 F1 ALL OTHERS LA Select the engine type by pressing the appropriate function key The tester directs you to measure the tire circumference ZS Mark the
60. agence nde oes Sad Ead LAR Cd KASS d deas 57 2002 Vehicle genee 5 555 056 245 Ue AE QUOC DER EE AE AGAR RA RR RR KA EE 61 AUNT PENCE WORE si aug AAW REDRESS the 06 edd tque qu MR bcd did 65 2004 Vehicle COVER 464s 8h 4 2546 ard aRAXATERTARTCUL EC E ERENT RO A APER A d EX dodi 67 QUE C tk otros rr AAA eee ee ee ee ee 71 SETTING UP THE TESTER deet edie idee wea eed 72 WEISS yarian a a i a 72 DENIA Heh Wiha ta Rad Radda tach Mian EE God ted E ER Eege 73 E WEE 74 POWERING UP THE TESTER 2e erm emere eee ee Rem 75 SELECTING THE APPLICATION iussis kb t eed beoe eee 75 PERFORM VEHICLE AND OR SYSTEM SELECTION ssssssss 7T Selecting me Model ION hls cick anne dam EE Eq RP QR A RERO d arg d RE MERE 77 selecting the Vehicle Using the VIN EE 640 ous du aa ARRAS dus ttr kk UKER 78 ADAPTER AND ADAPTER CABLE CONFIGURATIONS 80 NEE ENEE dene e dn ed tre e Ae eed re bb pad d Edad uis 81 GM Hlebtibnie Conto Uni ECUS isilostats DAL 3 ASA EE 82 II Dae Link CORRECT DEL Liloascasuuesaesuhsematea na Sac awa bor pedes 83 Selecting ihe Correct denge cooaetascepesrpb rbessed diocesis dice dudo dd dk bd dod 83 EEN 85 USING THE TESTER KEYPAD AND MENUS s sees eens 107 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VIN 2 eee eee 108 5 SELECTING AND OPERATING TEST MODES 109 TEST MODES SUMMARY eeneg e Eee and ace tee dan dta 109 SELECTING THE TEST MODES ccce sendet core eR Rp tnt btt Aren 110 Common T
61. and press the wrong key when answering YES NO questions press the key to return to the Select ABS Tests menu and perform the test again from the start Incorrect responses to the YES NO questions causes invalid test results If conflicting data is received by the tester due to incorrect responses the tester directs you to repeat the test END OF DIAGNOSIS MODULATOR TEST PASSED FOR ALL LEFT FRONT RESULTS PRESS ENTER FOR RESULTS COMPONENTS INCONCLUSIVE REPEAT TEST End of test display All systems passed Conflicting data display LEFT FRONT MOTOR EMB STUCK RIGHT FRONT SOLENOID DOES REMOVE MOTOR MOTOR WIRES NOT OPEN PACK SEE REVERSED REPAIR REPLACE SOLENOID SERVICE MANUAL AS NECESSARY Examples of component failure displays To select Modulator Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Press GP to select the MODULATOR TEST 3 The tester display confirms that you are in the Automated ABS Modulator Mechanical Diagnosis test The display automatically scrolls after four seconds or after pressing the key 4 If the parking brake is on the tester tells you to release it If the parking brake is released within 10 seconds the tester automatically continues to the SELECT CHANNEL menu If the parking brake is not released within 10 seconds or if the red telltale light remains on even when the parking brake is released the tester instructs you to release the parking
62. be delivered to the hydraulic wheel circuit This is done under actual operating conditions because the EBTCM has determined that the wheel is moving too slowly so it holds additional master cylinder pressure from it in an attempt to allow it to rotate at an appropriate speed The scantool commands the valve to close which should allow the technician to spin the wheel even though an assistant is applying pressure to the brake pedal Solenoid Test Pressure Release The Solenoid Pressure Release Mode activates the selected hydraulic wheel circuit valves placing them in the pressure reduce position When in the pressure reduce position the valve allows wheel caliper pressure to be returned to the master cylinder circuit This is done under actual operating conditions because the EBTCM has determined that the wheel is moving too slowly and holding additional master cylinder pressure from it has not allowed it to rotate at an appropriate speed The scantool commands the valves to these positions which should allow the technician to spin the wheel even through an assistant is applying pressure to the brake pedal To select Solenoid Test do the following 1 Ignition OFF position 2 Install scantool 3 Turn ignition to the RUN position 4 Raise vehicle such that wheels are about 6 inches off the floor with the transmission in neutral 5 Have an assistant press and hold the brake pedal 6 Select SOLENOID TEST from the SELECT TEST menu
63. by one technician trying to turn the drive wheels while another technician uses the key on the tester to turn the pilot valve on and then presses the brake pedal 5 Press 3A to return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 154 Bosch 2U ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS F5 TP SENSR LRN SELECT TEST F3 PILOT VALVE F4 ASRITCS TEST PILOT VALVE TEST DRIVE WHEELS MUST BE OFF GROUND PILOT VALVE TEST PILOT VALVE S ON FOR 25 SEC A START 25 Second Timeout PILOT VALVE TEST COMPLETE FIGURE 5 21 F3 Pilot Valve Test ACTIVE KEYS Select Left PILOT VALVE Test from the Pilot Valve Test menu E K V Car Ga Select Right PILOT VALVE Test from the Pilot Valve Test menu E K V Car F3 Select the PILOT VALVE Test from the Select Test menu D Y Car Control the pilot valve on Return to SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 155 Bosch 2U ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F4 TCS Test This test applies to 1993 V Cars 1993 94 D E and K Cars and 1994 95 Y Cars CAUTION To perform the following test both vehicle drive wheels must be securely raised or unintended vehicle movement could occur Before testing please ensure that the vehicle is properly supported with its drive wheels off the ground In the T
64. by pressing a 3 If vehicle speed is detected the tester screen informs you that the test cannot be run while vehicle is moving If a current trouble code is set the tester informs you that the test cannot be run On vehicles with ASR if low voltage on the valve relay is detected you are instructed to cycle the ignition and see the service manual 4 Press Gi Msi to begin the Automatic Tests 5 The tester initializes the test then automatically cycles each solenoid and pump motor 6 The tester informs you when the test is completed and displays trouble codes that were stored during the test 7 Press GAB to return to the SELECT ABS TEST menu SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS F5 TPS LEARN SELECT ABS TEST F0 SOLENOID TST F1 AUTO TEST F2 LAMP TEST AUTOMATICALLY CYCLES EACH SOL AND PUMP MOTOR ENTER TO START AUTOMATIC TEST RUNNING Approx 7 Seconds ENTER AUTOMATIC TEST AUTOMATIC TEST COMPLETE CODES STORED 35 61 INITIALIZING TST Less than 1 Second EXIT FIGURE 5 11 Automatic Test ACTIVE KEYS Select Automatic Tests from ABS TCS TESTS menu ENTER Start the Bosch Automatic solenoid and pump motor tests EXIT Return to SELECT ABS TEST selection menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 136 Bosch 2S Micro ABS ASR System 5 Selecting and Operating Te
65. completed and displays trouble codes that were stored during the test 7 Press AB to return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 151 Bosch 2U ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS F5 TP SENSR LRN SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID TST F1 AUTO TEST F2 LAMP TEST AUTOMATICALLY CYCLES EACH SOL AND PUMP MOTOR ENTER TO START AUTOMATIC TEST RUNNING Approx 7 Seconds ENTER AUTOMATIC TEST AUTOMATIC TEST COMPLETE CODES STORED 35 61 INITIALIZING TST Less than 1 Second EXIT FIGURE 5 19 Automatic Test ACTIVE KEYS Ga Select Auto Tests from OBD CONTROLS menu ENTER Start the Automatic Test EXIT Return to SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 152 Bosch 2U ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F2 Lamp Test This test is only available for all 1994 95 Y Cars and 1993 94 D E K and V Cars The Lamp Test mode allows you to control certain lamps ON and OFF with the tester in order to determine the operational status of the lamp s circuit switch and bulb To select Lamp Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS from the Select Mode menu by pressing 2 Select LAMP TEST by pressing 3 For 1994 95 Y Cars only the red brake light can be tested 4 Press to return to t
66. dE NEIE EES pee dete t bees 131 Important Notice for Bosch Systems an ck anwar EE ba bac barman anton RU RA 131 BOSCH2S MICRO ABS ASR SYSTEM 131 Mode FO DATA EN AC EE bd ard db b RO REANO Ae HORA 132 Mode Pedo m 10 A rcr 132 Mode F2 Toue CORES EE 132 Mode FS ABS eege uides de das dr dodi dca bu doi Ah dh Va CARE da NN 132 Mode fk EE TCS aaxd Sd Up EH e aed oc X EREIN ERG LOE OR KORE IUE NER AD 133 Mou E audupesqebgask da d ii Wes ade aeh oat dou eRe Tad Gee cede 142 BOSCH 25 MICRO SELECT RIDE SYSTEM EE RR ANN e 144 Mode TE TORR OS te et ERR RE Pre Reeder ch 144 MIR VT LEN LUNES as arisen ide wlan Se MOMS Pad sa hd ads ba ba AO ia wa 146 BOSCH2U ABS TCS SYSTEM sssssssesss eee 147 Mode FOr INNEREN Ada Eo ER Ede Rod deet md iR dd yao SE 147 Mode Fi Code SQ nasse EE Rd PRU EAR EPERERA TETANEN OA 147 Mode F DOUE DEEP uadeguxs don den d qii eui rendido napade i dud bd Vk ends 147 Mode F3 ABS Snapshot EE EEN 148 Modo ru OLD EE 148 BOSCH 21 VES SYSTEM uote bebe CR et dee Eos t etes 158 Moda JOE DV CE di pil get eg Ae Ae RE EE ERE REESE ban de 158 Mode FA ORD LOIS ousesenoctese d eere ve ved Oe deeded dese eee eTAA qs 160 BOSCH2U SELECT RIDE SYSTEM sssee He 162 MUR D Pe seh icy keh od dE ane aded Eco dba EE 162 Moda T T CIE AR bb hs Badomelceqieeded obici sepe edet diode Baden eae dd 164 BOSCH ZU RSS ELCO SYSTEM EELER e e e kae em spas 165 Mode fO RSS CRUEDRME dersi SA UG RA dob HUCEUUR
67. include the following pump motor Pressure Modulator Valve PMV assembly fluid reservoir with integral filter wheel speeds sensors 4 fluid level sensor Electronic Brake Control Module EBCM or Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module EBTCM brake booster master cylinder assembly and BRAKE and ANTILOCK warning lights When performing serial data tests on the Teves Mark IV ABS the NOTE operation of the system is altered significantly from its normal mode This o is applicable to all operating modes including Data List and Snapshot In this altered mode all ABS braking is inhibited leaving the vehicle limited to conventional braking In addition the Teves ABS controller does not set trouble codes during diagnostic mode of operation even if the trouble code conditions are present ANTILOCK WARNING LIGHT ANTILOCK and TRACTION OFF if equipped warning lights illuminate when vehicle is first started and when a malfunction in ABS or TCS is detected If either light remains on longer than approximately 5 seconds after vehicle is started or if they illuminate while driving ABS is disabled but normal braking continues If the brake warning light comes on check parking brake and brake fluid level Brake failure is indicated NOTE Intermittent history codes do not illuminate the amber ANTILOCK EB warning light MODE F0 DATA LIST Diagnostic data parameters are monitored by the scantool T
68. injure someone The PILOT VALVE TEST should be performed in order to prevent any damage to the master cylinder As soon as the pump motor is activated and fluid pressure is applied to the rear wheel circuits during ASR operation the pilot solenoid valve located in the hydraulic modulator assembly moves into position and blocks pressure to the master cylinder High pressure fluid at this time could damage the master cylinder In order to test the pilot solenoid valve first raise the vehicle on a frame contact hoist so that the wheels that are to be tested are off the ground Then turn the ignition ON and select PILOT VALVE TEST from the ABS TCS TESTS menu Have an assistant ready to command the PILOT VALVE TEST to ON Try to spin the rear wheel that is being tested If the system is working properly the wheel should move freely This test allows you to check the Pilot Valve s by controlling the valve s on for 25 seconds while manually trying to turn the vehicle s drive wheels To select Pilot Valve do the following 1 Select ABS TCS TESTS by pressing 2 Select PILOT VALVE by pressing Gp 3 Make sure the vehicle drive wheels have been securely raised The test is performed by one technician trying to turn the drive wheels while another technician uses the key on the tester to turn the pilot valve on and then presses the brake pedal 4 Press CAD to return to the SELECT ABS TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004
69. instructions provided on the screen of the tester NOTE This procedure requires the function to be performed with the key ON and A the engine OFF SELECT TEST F0 RSS CALIBRATE F1 ELC TRIM SET ELECTRONIC LEVEL CONTROL TRIM SET ENSURE VEHICLE IS ON A FLAT AND LEVEL SURFACE BE SURE ENGINE IS OFF AND IGN KEY IS IN THE RUN POSITION FIGURE 5 28 F1 ELC Trim Set 1993 94 Cadillac with RSS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 168 Bosch 5 0 ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes BOSCH 5 0 ABS TCS SYSTEM The Bosch 5 0 Antilock Brake System Traction Control system ABS TCS increases vehicle steerability directional stability and optimum deceleration in severe braking conditions The ABS monitors wheel speed and controls brakeline pressure to eliminate uncontrolled skidding The Bosch 5 0 system also monitors rear wheel speed and compares it to front wheel speed If excessive front wheel speed is detected at either front wheel the TCS is activated TCS uses front brake intervention and cylinder cut out to provide improved traction and vehicle stability Models with 4 9L are equipped with ABS with timed cylinder cut out TCS ABS consists of Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module EBTCM Brake Pressure Modulator BPM valve solenoid valves pump motor ABS valve relay pump relay and speed sensors on front and rear wheels brake booster master cylinder assembly BRAKE a
70. is necessary replace complete assembly GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 297 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes KELSEY HAYES RWAL VOLTAGE CHECK There are several styles of 4WAL systems Depending on the model year selected the displayed menu items may read 4WAL 3 Sensor 4WAL 4 Sensor VCM 4WAL and VCM 4WAL OBD II The tester also performs a voltage check when 4WAL is selected from the 1990 95 system select menu 1996 to present automatically select 4WAL The 4WAL system voltage normally switches from 0 to 5 volts If the system voltage is normal the select mode menu is automatically displayed If the voltage is not within the normal range one of the following messages is displayed These conditions must be corrected before the tester continues CHECK CONNECTION SYSTEM NOT 4WAL TO ALDL TRANSMITTING SHORT ALDL WIRING CHECK GROUND AND OPEN IGN FEED ECU 0 VOLTS 1 5VOLTS MODE F0 DATA LIST Diagnostic data parameters are monitored by the scantool The vehicle can be driven while these diagnostic data parameters are being displayed Intermittent analog signals can be monitored to determine if the signal varies Input output parameter status is also displayed Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F2 DTC S The EBCM generates DTCs when it detects a failure in the EBCM system input or output circuits Each code refers to a trouble tree in the service m
71. list parameters are displayed by the tester in the DATA LIST mode FO and saved by the tester during the SNAPSHOT mode F3 In addition the DLC data list contains the DTCs information which is displayed during mode F2 The data which is read by the tester is determined by the component being tested As a result the data available for display is different for each system GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 331 B IF YOU RE HAVING A PROBLEM This section is intended to help you get back on track if the tester appears to be operating abnormally Examples of most of the displays which you might see under abnormal conditions are shown In addition the most likely cause for the condition is given as well as other possible causes and recommendations on how to isolate or eliminate the problem BLANK SCREEN Most Likely Cause No power is applied to the tester Other Possible Causes Tester power supply is malfunctioning Recommendations Plug the tester into another vehicle to verify proper operation e Check for the 12 volt power at the cigarette lighter Check for proper polarity of 12 volt power center conductor should be positive Check fuse in tester DC power cable cigarette lighter plug GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 332 Displays Solid Bars B If You re Having a Problem DISPLAYS SOLID BARS Most Likely Cause e Cartridge was inserted while power was applied to tester Other Possibl
72. low tire pressure in the applicable speed range SR4 SPEED RANGE 4 LOW TIRE UNITS RANGE KPH 120 to 140 STATES YES NO The scantool indicates the tire pressure monitor system detects a low tire pressure in the applicable range If the parameter states NO the system has not detected a low tire pressure in the applicable speed range TCC BRK APPLIED STATES This parameter indicates whether or not the TCC Brake is applied TCC BLS FAULT YES NO The TCC BLS FAULT parameter indicates if a fault has been detected TCS ACTIVE YES NO This parameter indicates whether or not the TCS is active GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 347 Teves ABS C Data List Parameters TCS DISABLED STATES This parameter indicates whether or not the TCS has been disabled TCS FAILED YES NO This parameter indicates whether or not the TCS has failed TCS PWM FAILED YES NO This parameter indicates whether or not the TCS PWM has failed THROTTLE ANGLE UNITS RANGE Certain ECMs compute Throttle angle as a function of TPS Voltage 0 indicates a completely closed throttle while 100 is wide open VALVE RELAY VOLTS 0 to 21 7 The output status of the valve relay is displayed in volts TEVES ABS BRAKE SWITCH ON OFF The brake switch is an input to the Antilock brake controller that identifies the state of the brake switch which must be ON for the ABS to operate FRONT WHL SPEEDS UNITS RANGE Front
73. memory Simply removing EBCM memory power does not clear diagnostic trouble codes To clear Trouble Codes do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch OFF 2 Remove the fuse that powers the memory e Cand K series HD remove the STOP HAZARD fuse 1993 S and T series pickup equipped with the 4 3L and manual transmission from the ECM B or VCM B fuse CAUTION Failure to turn the ignition key OFF before removing the fuse can e permanently damage the EBCM 3 Turn ignition key ON 4 Follow the clear code instructions from the F2 DTC selection on the scantool NOTE EH The brake lamp should turn OFF 5 Turn ignition key OFF 6 Replace the fuse that powers the memory CAUTION E Turn the ignition key OFF before replacing the Stop hazard fuse to prevent e damage to the EBFCM GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 289 ZP RWAL ABS Systems 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 7 Test drive the vehicle to make sure the malfunction has been repaired and no codes reset CODE 2 DETECTED FUSE MUST BE REMOVED TO CLEAR CODES PRESS 4 Approximately 5 seconds OPEN WINDING ISOLN VLV SOLNOD OR POSSIBLE ECU MALFUNCTION CLEARING CODES UNABLE TO CLEAR CODES 5 seconds CHECK VALVE CONNECTIONS amp RESISTANCE 4 OHMS CODES CLEARED Return to _ Menu 5 seconds CLEAR CODES FIGURE 5 86
74. needed to display all of the information about the last failure These pages automatically sequence at 5 second intervals or press to manually sequence through them 2 Press Gap to return to the TEST SELECT menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 197 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes FIRST FAILURE CODE 25 WAS SET 1 OF LAST 12 DRIVE CYCLES SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F1 DTC HISTORY F2 TROUBLE CODE 5 Seconds or SECOND FAILURE CODE 14 WAS SET 11 OF LAST 11 DRIVE CYCLES 5 Seconds or LAST FAILURE CODE 14 WAS SET AT OMPH THE BRAKE WAS OFF 5 Seconds or BRAKE PRESSURE WAS LOW BRAKE SWITCH NOT SEEN THIS IGN CYCLE 5 Seconds or ABS NOT ACTIVE THERE HAVE BEEN 0 DRIVE CYCLES SINCE A FAILURE 5 Seconds or FIGURE 5 42 Delco Moraine ABS III Code History ACTIVE KEYS Freeze the display screen Unfreeze the display and manually scrolls to the next display Toggle between MPH and KPH display EXIT Return to test selection menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 198 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F2 TROUBLE CODES Trouble codes are set by the IPC or ABS when an abnormal condition is detected They are the keys to diagnosing many of the problems that can occur in the vehicle Therefore you should always check if any trouble codes are
75. on board diagnostics available on the vehicle To select RSS DTCs do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position 2 Push the OFF and red warmer buttons on the Climate Control Center CCC simultaneously and hold until the segment check appears on the instrumental panel cluster Segment Check A segment check is when all lights in the IPC are turned on The purpose of illuminating the IPC is to verify that all segments of the LED displays are working Further diagnostics should not be attempted unless all segments appear as this could lead to misdiagnosis If any portions or segments of the IPC display are inoperative diagnose and report this problem first GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 165 Bosch 2U RSS ELC System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Selecting the RSS System Following the display flashing of any trouble codes present the first available system 1s displayed While selecting a system to test take any of the following actions to control the display Depressing the fan speed up 1 button on the CCC selects the displayed system for testing Depressing the fan speed down L button on the CCC displays the next available system selection This allows the display to be stepped through all system choices Depressing the OFF button on the CCC stops the test type selection process and return the display to the next available vehicle system selection NOTE
76. prompted by scantool Press When the left rear bleed is complete press amp B Repeat Step 6 and this step for right rear caliper 8 Move to right front caliper loosen bleeder screw press Gili Have an assistant continuously pump brake pedal making long steady strokes Press amp B Press and hold the brake pedal for 10 seconds when prompted scantool displays a timer Release the brake when prompted Wait 10 seconds 9 Repeat the previous step 3 times Tighten bleeder screw when prompted Press When the right front bleed is complete press amp BJ Repeat Step 8 and this step for left front caliper Scantool now performs several tests to verify system operation 10 If scantool displays BLEED PROCEDURE COMPLETE press and go to the next step If faults are detected remove pressure bleeding equipment and go to Step 3 11 To relieve bleed pressure press amp B Remove pressure bleeding equipment Ensure brake pedal is high and firm If brake pedal is not high and firm re inspect brake system for leaks or damage If brake system is okay and pedal travel is still excessive repeat auto bleed procedure GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 177 Bosch 5 0 ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes If ABS DTC S are present auto bleed cannot be performed SELECT TEST F3 TCS TEST F4 AUTO BLEED DTC S PRESENT FUNCTION CANNOT BE INITIATED BACK TO SELECT MODE MENU BLEED
77. reaching the wheel and prevents the locking up of the wheel when the brake pedal is pressed The pressure release function releases pressure from a wheel which is being held by the brake allowing the wheel to be turned Once a solenoid has been commanded ON the tester automatically turns it OFF after 20 seconds to avoid damage to the solenoid If the same solenoid is commanded ON again in less than 30 seconds an INHIBITED message is displayed until 30 seconds has elapsed from the time the solenoid was last turned OFF To select the Solenoid Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing a 2 Select SOLENOID TEST by pressing a 3 The tester display confirms that you are ready to perform the manual control of ABS solenoids 4 After 4 seconds or an keypress the tester displays the keys used to manually control the solenoids 5 Press to display a menu of functions that can be controlled Press the key to the left of the solenoid you wish to test 6 The tester displays the solenoid selected the commanded state of the solenoid and the wheel speeds Use to turn the solenoid ON or to turn the solenoid OFF The tester automatically turns the solenoid OFF after 20 seconds and inhibits it from being turned on again for 30 seconds 7 Press CAR to return to the menu to select a different solenoid to control or press 2248 twice to return to the OBD CONTROLS menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 324 Teves M
78. relays wheel speed sensors brake booster master cylinder assembly and BRAKE and ABS warning lights CAUTION Once scantool is disconnected ensure ignition is off at least 10 seconds F before road testing vehicle This allows the system to return to normal operation When testing is completed ignition must remain OFF for at least 10 seconds to return ABS system to normal operation MODE F0 DATA LIST Diagnostic data parameters are monitored by the scantool The vehicle can be driven while these diagnostic data parameters are being displayed Intermittent analog signals can be monitored to determine if the signal varies Input output parameter status is also displayed Please refer to the applicable section in Common Test Modes MODE F2 DTCS Diagnostic Trouble Codes are stored in the ECU memory and can be displayed by the scantool The ABS ECU EBCM also records ABS status when the DTC was stored In addition to the DTC number a brief description of the DTC can be displayed DTCs can also be cleared from the ECU memory Please refer to the applicable section in Common Test Modes MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The ABS snapshot helps isolate problems of intermittent ABS operation Information is captured before and after a trigger condition is met A manual or a DTC trigger can be selected You will also be allowed to review a stored snapshot from this menu Please refer to the applicable section in Common Test Modes MODE F4 OBD CONT
79. release The tester then displays HOLD on the screen and a countdown timer During this portion of the test the brake pressure previously released 1s being held and your assistant should be able to spin the selected wheel This verifies that the ABS unit can HOLD the released pressure and checks for internal leaks The tester then commands the ABS modulator to APPLY APPLY is displayed on the screen Your assistant should not be able to spin the wheel selected at this point This test verifies that the ABS modulator can reapply brake pressure to the selected channel Refer to the vehicle s Service Manual for component servicing if a problem is found during this test No At the conclusion of the test the tester instructs you to take your foot off the brake pedal When the pedal is released the tester returns to the beginning of the Hydraulic test Run the test on another wheel or press 34g to return to the SELECT TEST menu NOTE When you exit from the Hydraulic Control test the tester rehomes the motors and displays a message informing you that the motors have been rehomed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 230 Delco ABS VI UART Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F0 MANUAL CNTRL F1 MODULATOR F2 HYDRL CNTRL ABS HYDRAULIC FUNCTIONAL TEST ALL WHEELS MUST BE OFF GROUND 4 LEFT FRONT CHANNEL WILL BE TESTED FIRST If no faults detected D
80. speed the ABS controller believes the vehicle was going at the time the fault occurred An unreasonable number here may lead you to suspect wheel speed sensor problems The state of the brake switch at the time of the fault ON or OFF This tells you if there was any brake application when the fault occurred Only the state of the brake switch is known the brake pedal may have simply been depressed or shorted without any vehicle deceleration Thecondition of the brake switch circuit If the brake switch circuit was OPEN the state of the brake switch may not be accurate and should be discarded An OPEN does not allow the ABS to operate The status of the system brake pressure If system pressure was LOW a leak or a pump problem may exist that adversely affects the braking performance of the system Whether or not the brake had been depressed this ignition cycle If the brake switch circuit was OPEN no brake input is seen Also many drivers do not depress the brake when starting the car but do prior to putting the car in gear If no brake input was seen prior to the fault and the brake switch circuit is OK this information tells you the fault was probably detected shortly after the ignition switch was turned on Whether or not an ABS stop was in progress when the fault occurred This may point to a fault caused by additional stresses or vibration the vehicle encountered when in an ABS stop Drive Cycles A drive cycle occurs when
81. test the tester rehomes the motors and displays a message informing you that the motors have been rehomed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 251 Delco ABS VI Class 2 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes RAISE WHEEL S TO BE TESTED PRESS ENTER F0 LEFT FRONT F1 RIGHT FRONT F2 REAR AXLE TRANSMISSION IN PARK NEUTRAL FIRMLY DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL TRANSMISSION IN PARK NEUTRAL FIRMLY DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL TRANSMISSION IN PARK NEUTRAL FIRMLY DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT REAR AXLE RELEASE RELEASE RELEASE LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT REAR AXLE HOLD HOLD HOLD LEFT FRONT APPLY RIGHT FRONT APPLY REAR AXLE APPLY NO DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE S SET TEST COMPLETE PRESS EXIT FIGURE 5 69 Hydraulic Control ACTIVE KEYS Select HYDRAULIC CONTROL test Select channel to test Scroll up through the menu ENTER Continue test EXIT Return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 252 Delco ABS VI Class 2 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F2 Motor Test The ABS Motor Test available on 97 99 Saturns allows the user to command the antilock brake modulator pistons to their Pistons up home or Pistons down release positions The ABS modulator pistons are normally at their Pistons up home position when the a
82. that you wish to run the TP Sensor Learn procedure TP SENSOR LEARN IN LA PROGRESS is displayed while the TP Sensor Learn function is being performed If the tester successfully resets the EBTCM TP SENSOR LEARN COMPLETE is displayed for 4 seconds then the Select Mode menu is displayed If the tester does not accept the TP Sensor Learn command or if a trouble code is stored you are instructed to turn the ignition off then turn it back on After the ignition is cycled the tester attempts to run the TP Sensor Learn test again If the process is successful the tester informs you that TP Sensor Learn is complete If the TP Sensor Learn function is still unsuccessful the tester informs you either that the TP Sensor Learn test failed and that you should refer to Section SEI of the Service manual or you are informed that trouble codes are present and to press to view the codes Resolve the cause of the trouble codes then run TP Sensor Learn again 4 Press SMIB to return to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 179 Bosch 5 0 ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TEST F5 TP SENSR LRN TP SENSR LEARN TO START TP SENSR LEARN IN PROGRESS If TP Sensor Learn is unsuccessful TURN IGNITION OFF THEN ON TP SENSR LEARN 4 Seconds COMPLETE Trouble Codes Present No Trouble Cod
83. the RUN position a Observe the ANTILOCK Lamp Ifthe lamp lights for 4 seconds and then turns OFF and remains off no trouble codes are stored Ifthe lamp lights for 4 seconds and then starts flashing one or more trouble codes are stored 6 Read the Trouble Codes a Ifthe lamp flashes count the number of flashes and wait for a 3 second pause This is the first digit of the code Then count the flashes after the 3 second pause This is the second digit Count only the number of times the lamp turns on and off for the second digit After the second digit the lamp stays lit continuously Do not count this as a code digit The lamp flashes up to seven codes currently present or stored in memory e After the ANTILOCK lamp stops flashing the codes and lights continuously press Q 9 to exit from DISPLAY ABS CODES Without turning the ignition off press to re enter and read any other codes GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 317 Teves Mark Il ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes EXAMPLE ABS CODE 34 PRESENT CODES ACTIVATED BEFORE KEY ON ON ANTILOCK LAMP STATUS OFF MB e Bn e sae FIRST DIGIT 3 SEC SECOND DIGIT CONTINUOUS OF CODE 3 PAUSE CODE 4 LAMP KEY ON END OF CODE 7 Enter the Trouble Codes Into Scanner Enter any codes flashed by the ANTILOCK lamp into the scanner The ANTILOCK lamp flashes continuously until 48 is pressed on the tester
84. the brake switch circuit While in the Brake Switch Test mode if the vehicle has 4WD the tester also checks the front axle and transfer case switched circuits To test the Brake Switch do the following 1 Select the OBD CONTROLS mode by pressing GJ during the Select Mode phase of operation 2 Select Brake Switch Test by pressing aj 3 Complete the Brake Switch Test by following the directions on each screen ACTIVE KEYS Select 2 Wheel Drive Ga Select 4 Wheel Drive Cause the next screen of instruction to be displayed Return to Select OBD Controls mode GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 292 VCM RWAL 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes VCM RWAL The VCM RWAL system only applies to 1993 model year vehicles MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS Submode F0 Brake Lamp Test Submode F1 Brake Relay Test These tests allow you to check the VCM RWAL ABS Brake Telltale Lamp and Brake Enable Relay by commanding them on and off while monitoring the feedback state reported by the VCM RWAL ECU The states are commanded on by pressing the key and off by pressing the key If the lamp and relay are operating properly the commanded state and the feedback state are the same To check Brake Lamp Relay do the following 1 From the SELECT OBD CONTROLS menu select the Brake Lamp Test by pressing af or the BRAKE RELAY Test by pressing a 2 You are prompted to press to command the lamp or relay on or pr
85. the chassis system under test Examples include Wheel Speed sensor data Vehicle Speed and Brake Switch status Displays Diagnostic Trouble Codes recorded by the ECU The ability to Clear DTC information is also found in this mode F3 Snapshot Gives you the ability to capture Data List information for later analysis Trigger point and trigger type are selectable by the user F4 OBD Controls F4 Misc Tests Provides the ability for bi directional control of a component or device ON and OFF reset memory values or write to vehicle memory Examples include Solenoid Tests Auto Bleed Tire Size Re calibration Motor Test Lamp Test ASR Test and Pilot Valve Test F8 Information F3 ECU Info F4 Vehicle Info Displays helpful information about the vehicle or systems under test This can consist of Calibration ID Module ID and VIN Vehicle Identification Number GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 109 Selecting the Test Modes 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECTING THE TEST MODES After selecting the model year and body type the tester either displays a SELECT SYSTEM screen for more specific vehicle information input or displays a SELECT MODE screen for access to the ABS and Chassis functions available to the vehicle selected Each ABS system requires specific input and the tester provides display screens for inputting the information needed for that vehicle application Since a
86. the ignition is turned ON and the vehicle is driven faster than 10 MPH However if a current code is set a drive cycle occurs counter increment for that code even if 10 MPH is not reached prior to turning off the ignition Drive cycles since the last failure occurred If zero drive cycles have occurred the customer drove in with the fault detected ABS Warning Light probably flashing or on continuously If five drive cycles have occurred no fault was present when the vehicle arrived for service If no fault has occurred for 40 drive cycles and only occurred once based on the intermittent information the fault may have occurred under unusual circumstances and a true fault may not exist NOTE If no ABS faults have occurred for 50 drive cycles the ABS controller J clears itself of all fault information To select DTC History do the following 1 Select DTC HISTORY by pressing Gp The tester displays the first failure which occurred as well as how many times it has occurred over how many drive cycles After 5 seconds or an press the same information for the second or next failure is displayed This is repeated to display information from the first five failures If fewer failures have occurred only information from failures that have occurred is displayed After the first five or fewer trouble codes have been viewed the tester displays additional information from the most recent failure Three pages are
87. the light is FLASHING a fault has been detected by the Antilock brake controller This fault does not affect the operation of ABS at the current time but must be repaired to avoid additional damage to the Antilock Brake System If the light is ON a fault has been detected by the Antilock brake controller that affects ABS operation ABS will be completely disabled and all four wheels will operate with conventional base brakes all wheels may lock BRAKE PRESSURE DELCO MORAINE III LOW lt 1800 PSI OK gt 1800 PSI CIRCUIT OPEN Brake pressure is an input to the Antilock brake controller that identifies the Powermaster III accumulator pressure LOW pressure may not provide enough power assist to lock the brakes and may be an indication something is wrong with the brake system OK pressure indicates sufficient brake pressure is available for base and Antilock braking If the brake pressure circuit is OPEN the brake pressure state is invalid and can not be used BRAKE SWITCH DELCO MORAINE Ill amp DELCO VI ON OFF CIRCUIT OPEN The brake switch is an input to the Antilock brake controller that identifies the state of the brake switch which must be ON for the ABS to operate If the brake switch circuit is OPEN the brake switch state is invalid and cannot be used GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 340 Delco Moraine III amp Delco VI ABS C Data List Parameters BRAKE T TALE CMD DELCO VI ON OFF
88. the vehicle speed in miles per hour and in kilometers per hour 3 Press CB to return to the SELECT OBD CONTROLS menu or press 4l twice to return to the SELECT MODE menu RWAL SELECT F0 VCM RWAL F1 ZP RWAL F2 ALL OTHERS SELECT MODE Ay F0 DATA LIST F1 FUNCTION TEST F2 TROUBLE CODE F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS SELECT MISC TEST F0 BRK LAMP TEST F1 BRK RELY TEST F2 VSS TEST VSS MONITOR MPH xxx KPH xxx FIGURE 5 88 F2 VSS Test VSS MONITOR ACTIVE KEYS Select VSS Test from the SELECT OBD CONTROLS menu Gi EXIT Return to the SELECT OBD CONTROLS menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 295 RWAL and ZP RWAL 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes RWAL AND ZP RWAL MODE F4 VSS MONITOR The purpose of the VSS Monitor Mode is to monitor the Vehicle Speed Signal VSS as it is detected by the RWAL ECU This test is not available for 4WAL ZP RWAL or VCM RWAL Systems To monitor VSS do the following 1 Select the VSS MONITOR mode from the Select Mode menu by pressing a 2 The tester shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour and in kilometers per hour 3 Press 3A to return to the SELECT MODE menu SELECT MODE F0 DATA LIST F1 FUNCTION TEST F2 TROUBLE CODE SELECT MODE F4 MISC TESTS F5 VSS MONITOR VSS MONITOR MPH KPH 0 0 FIGURE 5 89 VSS Monitor EXIT Return to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 296
89. the wheels while braking driving through pot holes or performing ABS stops causes a trigger that is NOT identifying a system problem e Very short pump run intervals that should also cause a code A062 Delco Moraine ABS III GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 117 Mode F3 Snapshot 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes e Very short loss of brake switch intervals that may not set a code but causes a momentary loss of ABS Delco Moraine ABS III Delco ABS VI and Bosch A very short loss of brake switch circuit input that may not set a code but causes a momentary loss of ABS Delco Moraine ABS III and Delco ABS VI Detection of low pressure Delco Moraine ABS IIT Low brake fluid Bosch Ifthe red brake telltale turns on Delco ABS VI Lateral accelerometer fault Bosch Ifthe battery voltage falls below 11 0 volts or goes above 16 volts Delco ABS VI and Bosch Sudden change in engine RPM Bosch Engine torque out of range Bosch Loss of Data Valve solenoid relay off or 2 volts Bosch The intent of the ABS automatic trigger feature 1s to identify short duration intermittent problems For this reason the data is taken at a high rate of speed approximately every 1 20th of a second ANY CODE Any trouble code detected causes the trigger SINGLE CODE You can select a specific trouble code that must be detected before the trigger is set Step 3 in the operating procedure tells
90. to cycle If the system has a trouble code set the tester displays CODES ARE SET REPAIR AND CLEAR CODES BEFORE TESTING Repair the fault and clear the code before continuing Select the TROUBLE CODE mode to clear the code The function test should also be run under the following conditions After Bleeding the brake system use the scantool to run the Functional Test four times while applying the brake pedal firmly fany component is replaced which may have caused air to enter the BPMV use the scantool to run the Functional Test four times while applying the brake pedal firmly NOTE If either of the above conditions has occurred always re bleed all four EH wheels to remove the remaining air from the brake system To run the Function Test do the following 1 Select the FUNCTION TEST mode from the SELECT MODE menu by pressing ai 2 Complete the FUNCTION TEST by following the direction of each screen NOTE The brake must continuously be applied to conduct the 4WAL function EB test If the system does not cycle check the brake lamp switch circuit GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 301 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT SYSTEM F0 DATA LIST F1 FUNCTION TEST F2 TROUBLE CODE ADVANCE Y HOLD FUNCTION TEST CK FLUID LEVEL CK SET PRK BRAKE PRESS ENTER APPLY AND HOLD BRAKE TO ACTUATE TEST TEST IS BEING CONDUC
91. to the right of the model year represent the 10th VIN digit year identifier for easier model year identification SELECT Vehicle 10th VIN Digit Model Year identifier When the correct model year appears on the screen press the NUAR key to advance the software to the next vehicle selection screen Quick keys are also available for entering the model year From the SELECT MODEL YEAR screen select the last two digits of the model year from the key pad to advance to the next vehicle selection screen For example pressing and selects 1992 Pressing SI returns the software back to the SELECT MODEL YEAR screen GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 77 Perform Vehicle and or System Selection 4 Getting Started SELECTING THE VEHICLE USING THE VIN The Vehicle Selection process is done by pressing the numeric keys indicating the last two digits of the model year After the model year has been selected you will be asked to select a vehicle type If FO PASSENGER CAR was selected you will be asked to select the 4th digit of the VIN code vehicle body type If Fl LIGHT TRUCK was selected you will be asked to select the 5th digit of the VIN See examples in Figure 4 4 and Figure 4 6 F0 Passenger Car After selecting the passenger Car you will be asked to select the 4th digit of the VIN code the vehicle s body type The tester will display all body VIN codes available for the year selected Press or Qe to scrol
92. to verify proper electrical operation of the solenoid identified The feedback state represents the voltage the controller sees at the solenoid when the enable relays are on If the solenoid is commanded on by the ABS controller the feedback state should be LOW ground If the solenoid is commanded off the feedback state should be HIGH battery voltage The feedback states are used to identify and isolate faults in the solenoid circuits The feedback state may not always coincide exactly with the solenoid state due to delays within the ABS LF MOTOR COMMAND RF MOTOR COMMAND REAR MOTOR COMMAND DELCO VI AMPS FWD 0 to 20 AMPS REV 0 to 20 This parameter indicates the status of the left front right front and rear motors The tester will display Forward if the motor is being commanded forward or Reverse if the motor is being commanded to operate in reverse GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 342 Delco Moraine III amp Delco VI ABS C Data List Parameters LF MOTOR FEEDBACK RF MOTOR FEEDBACK REAR MOTOR FEEDBACK DELCO VI UNITS RANGE AMPS 0 to 20 This is the actual motor current measured by the ECU through each motor When the motor is not moving feedback current is the same as the command current If the motor is moving the feedback current will be less than the command current LF RELEASE SOL RF RELEASE SOL REAR RELEASE SOL DELCO MORAINE Ill ON OFF The release solenoid is used with
93. which is a measurement of oversteer or understeer If the yaw rate error becomes too large the EBCM attempts to correct the vehicle s yaw motion by applying differential braking to the left or right front wheel GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 4 2 OPERATING PRECAUTIONS INTRODUCTION This chapter explains precautions that are very important when using Vetronix testers and application software with a vehicle Failure to observe these precautions could affect the operation of the tester the accuracy of data and tests and at times your safety Read all of this chapter before you operate the tester and application software cartridges Safeguards have been built into the tester to protect you the vehicle and the tester from any hazards Misuse or improper securing of the vehicle could lead to unsafe conditions PRECAUTIONS FOR ALL APPLICATIONS PROTECT AGAINST REVERSE POLARITY If power is applied to the tester and the Tech 1A or Tech 1 display remains CAUTION blank or the green LED on the MTS 3100 does not illuminate when turned 2 off reverse polarity in the cigarette lighter may be present Damage to the tester could occur DO NOT connect the ALDL DLC cable to the vehicle Verify that the center contact of the vehicle s cigarette lighter has 12 volts and that the outer contact is grounded GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 5 Precautions for All Applications 2 Operating Precautions PROTECT AGAI
94. 03 automated bleed 262 269 automated test 271 automatic test 135 151 173 B bars on screen 333 blank screen 332 bleed prep 248 Bosch 2U ABS 147 Bosch 5 0 169 Bosch ABS 131 brake lamp 293 brake relay 293 brake switch 292 C cartridge missing 333 chassis systems 2 check class 2 communication 337 check connection 336 INDEX cigarette lighter polarity 5 clear codes 146 164 clearing codes 114 200 clearing trouble codes 286 288 to 289 code history 132 147 169 common test modes 111 condition latched code 284 cycles without brake apply 216 D damper test 194 data capture 118 data list 111 132 147 169 194 data list parameters Bosch ABS 344 Delco Moraine III 340 Delco VIABS 340 Kelsey Hayes RWAL 4WAL ABS 349 Teves ABS 348 VES 351 data pairs 112 DBC 7 system 257 self test 258 Delco ABS VI 219 Delco Moraine ABS III 196 Delco Bosch 5 0 265 diagnostic trouble codes 113 discrete parameters 113 display error 334 display locked 338 drive cycle 197 220 DTC history 196 220 277 303 DTCs 113 194 dump valves 300 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Index 362 duty cycle test 158 181 E EBCM 147 EBTCM 169 electromagnetic brake EMB 232 electronic brake and traction control module EBTCM 169 electronic brake control module EBCM 147 244 323 electronic level control ELC 168 185 electronic traction control system ETS 258 ETS warning lamp 258 F fault isolation 199 flash codes 14
95. 1 Select the ABS TESTS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Press GP to select AUTO BLEED A message confirming that you have selected the SOLENOID BLEED AND CHECKOUT TEST is displayed for 4 seconds A message instructing you to DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL HALFWAY THEN PRESS YES TO START CYCLING is displayed until is pressed Press to start the test LA The tester automatically turns various solenoids ON and OFF for specific periods of time An asterisk in the lower right corner of the display flashes on when a solenoid is being commanded on The solenoid bleed and checkout test takes approximately 70 seconds to complete After the entire sequence is complete the END OF TEST message is displayed on the tester If you remove your foot from the brake pedal the test is terminated AR Press 341 at the completion of the test or at any time during the test to terminate the test and return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 206 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 4 Seconds or SOLENOID BLEED AND CHECKOUT TEST DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL HALFWAY THEN PRESS YES TO START CYCLING IF BRAKE PEDAL NOT DEPRESSED BRAKE MUST BE DEPRESSED TO START CYCLING PEDAL DEPRESSED FLASHES DURING TEST SOL BLEED TEST IN PROGRESS APPROX IF BRAKE RELEASED 70 Seconds SOL BLEED END OF TEST S
96. 12 EGR SYSTEM OR EGR CKT FAILURE DTC SUMMARY XX XX XX XX XX ED FIGURE 5 95 Review DTCs GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 321 Teves Mark Il ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F4 CLEAR DTCS VEHICLE REQUIRES GM 12 14 PIN ADAPTER P N 02001384 THE TEVES Il ABS SYSTEM WILL NOT ALLOW CODES TO BE CLEARED UNTIL A CONNECT ADAPTER TO DIAG CONNECT UNDER DASH PRESS ENTER ENTER ALL ABS REPAIRS HAVE BEEN COMPLETED v SELECT MODE CODES ARE F0 HOW TO READ CLEARED BY F1 FLASH CODES DRIVING ABOVE 18 F2 DTC LIST AY REPEAT THE FLASH CODE SEQUENCE TO VERIFY ALL SELECT MODE F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC AY PROBLEMS HAVE BEEN CORRECTED F0 FROM ABS F1 FROM TESTER DTC DATA HAS BEEN CLEARED FROM TESTER EXIT EXIT FIGURE 5 96 F4 Clear DTCs GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 322 Teves Mark IV ABS TCS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes TEVES MARK IV ABS TCS The Teves Mark IV wheel Antilock Brake System ABS and Traction Control System TCS are designed to prevent wheel lock up during heavy braking and accelerated slip traction at speeds less than 25 MPH The ABS allows driver to maintain steering control while stopping vehicle in shortest distance possible while the TCS prevents wheels from spinning excessively during acceleration Major components
97. 14 15 Pin DLC Cable RWAL AWAL ALDL Cable A Cy Application Cartridge or MSC Tech 1 4442Pin 7 VIM Adapter 16 24 Pin VIM Adapter Cable GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 100 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 20 GM 16 Adapter Configuration for MTS 3100 MTS 3100 DLC Cable DC Power Cable GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 101 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 21 GM 16 Adapter Configuration for Tech 1A Tech 1A DLC Cable Application Cartridge GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 102 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 22 GM 16 Adapter Configuration for Tech 1 RWAL AWAL ALDL Cable 16 12 Pin Non OBD II Adapter GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 103 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 23 GM B Adapter Configuration for MTS 3100 MTS 3100 ME AS232 DATA LINK Z4 DLC Cable GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 104 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 24 GM B Adapter Configuration for Tech 1A Tech 1A DC Power Cable GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 105 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 25 GM B Adapter Configuration for Tech 1 GM
98. 2 264 264 264 265 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 TOC iv ABS uriini at i ee O ENEE ee ef E a d dbs EE E ge 265 JhgQUen CONF 68 48 4484 68458 ES ALAIN ERE NAAVERARTART CM ERE ER CHO HR Edd 265 Stabilitrak Operation GCOS and ICCI 4 ons ce caca anu tar C RR CAR ones we odia 265 MODE FO DATA LIST zoteseeenctm sonet Reb ee Pre htt met Rente 266 MODE FA DIEGO e eren even cde d e er e E d dne E IR 266 MODE PSP SNAPSHOT esisiini erreti inna A RAE E ae aa Ena a aiaei E 266 MODE FL OBD CONTROLS Ae EEN rura e E EE EUER Eu 267 Submode FO Solenoid TOS EEN EA issi e dA PEA CESSES ENE A E ER REN 267 oubmode Amomated Bleed acannon cua ea da apr ale wales deo EE CAR RR ENSKRA 269 Aubmode F2 Automated EE 271 AUDIOS E D TORIS Ae sends asain died d diie dede b dra de rdi deat dei qd aci n 273 aubmode Lump Test 2545548 IAEA Reder EHTECATEQE 274 oubmde FO Marma Meer EE 275 GM Medium Duty 4WAL AR 276 KELSEY HAYES 4WAL 4 SENSOR HYDRAULIC ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM _ 000 000 0 cece eee 276 Ser IBN deht ee das need ege ee de eech Dti did 276 Mode Pa ORD CONS Ee dod edv hon dee does dedo cot RM d aU Re 276 KELSEY HAYES 4WAL 4 SENSOR ELECTRIC HYDRAULIC PARKING BRAKE sssssssssssssss 278 Mode F9 Information A E BEE ERE ERE ttnt ORAL ROGET ERTL LEEDO OERE IAS OS 278 Kelsey Hayes ABS Systems ENEE AE ra NNN EE ENEE NEE 279 KELSEY HAYES RWAL ALL VERSIONS ussssseeeeeeeess eere 279 Kelsev Hayes Vo
99. 25 seconds then automatically turned off The tester displays TEST COMPLETE at the end of the test See the Service Manual for further information 5 Press 3A to return to the OBD CONTROLS menu SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSH F4 OBD CONTROLS F5 TP SENSR LRN If D E K Y Car at PN SELECT TEST F3 TCS TEST F4 AUTO BLEED i M c DRIVE WHEELS MUST BE OFF GROUND 4 i TEST RUNS PUMP AND TCS VALVE S FOR 25 SECONDS START 25 Second E M d TEST COMPLETE e EXIT FIGURE 5 32 TCS Test Example ACTIVE KEYS GJ Select TCS TEST from the OBD CONTROLS menu Begin the TCS TEST EXIT Return to OBD CONTROLS menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 176 Bosch 5 0 ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F4 Auto Bleed The Automated Bleed function or AUTO BLEED is used to provide a complete brake system bleed on Bosch ABS systems The tester sends commands to the EBTCM to cycle the system valves and run the ABS pump to purge air from secondary hydraulic circuits This function should be used when it is suspected that air has been introduced into the system s secondary circuits or when the Brake Pressure Modulator Valve BPMV has been replaced with a new unit NOTE Refer to the appropriate service manual and follow instructions when EH performing the AUTO BLEED function To perform the Auto Bleed Te
100. 3 TCS TEST The Traction Control System TCS test runs the pump motor to apply fluid pressure to the front wheel circuits This test is only active if vehicle is equipped with TCS To select TCS Test do the following 1 Ignition OFF 2 Install the scantool 3 Turn ignition ON 4 Raise front wheels of vehicle so that wheels are about 6 inches off the floor with the transmission in neutral 5 Press G to select TCS TEST from the F4 OBD CONTROLS menu 6 Command the TCS Test ON with the scantool The pump motor turns ON for approximately 25 seconds 7 Attempt to move each front wheel by hand they should not move due to the pump motor running and applying pressure to the front wheels SELECT DATA LIST F3 TCS TEST TURN IGNITION TO THE RUN POSITION THIS TEST RUNS THE PUMP MOTOR amp APPLIES PRESSURE TO THE AUTOMATED TEST CYCLES EACH SOL amp PUMP MOTOR ENTER TO START ENTER DTC S STORED XX ENTER TO CONT FRONT WHEEL CIRCUIT IF THE SYSTEM IS WORKING PROPERLY m TEST IN PROCESS 00 25 SECONDS PRESS EXIT TO TERMINATE TEST THE FRONT WHEELS SHOULD BE LOCKED DURING THE TEST TEST COMPLETE PRESS EXIT TO RETURN TO MENU AV RAISE FRONT WHEELS OFF GROUND AY FIGURE 5 77 TCS Test GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 273 Mode F4 OBD Controls 5 Selecting and Operating Test Mo
101. 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS ETS Cavalier J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS Malibu N DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM Impala W DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM Monte Carlo W DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 61 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2002 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEE 4TH SESTEM TYPE CONFIG Corvette Y Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA Active Handling 2002 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Aurora G Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA TIM Alero N DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM Intrigue W Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS VES 2002 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH a TYPE CONFIG Firebird F Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS ETS Formula F Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TCS Bonneville H Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS DRP ICCS3 MSVA TIM Sunfire J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS Grand Am N DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM Grand Prix W Bosch 5 3 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 2002 SATURN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH SEDEM TYPE CONFIG S Series Z DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS
102. 384 Figure 4 6 with a 12 pin DLC Tech 1A GM 12 14 Pin Adapter 02001384 Figure 4 7 Tech 1 Tech 1 GM RWAL RWAL 02001578 Figure 4 8 ALDL Cable RWAL 4WAL ABS GM R MTS 3100 GM 12 14 Pin Adapter 02001384 Figure 4 9 Systems RWAL 4WAL Adapter 02001579 12 pin DLC Tech 1A GM 12 14 Pin Adapter 02001384 Figure 4 10 RWAL AWAL Adapter 02001579 Tech 1 RWAL 4WAL ALDL Cable 02001578 Figure 4 11 RWAL AWAL Adapter 02001579 RWAL AWAL GM 16R MTS 3100 GM 12 14 Pin Adapter 02001384 Figure 4 12 ABS Systems with RWAL AWAL Adapter 02001579 16 pin DLC and 16 12 Pin Non OBD II 02001575 Non OBD II Adapter Non Class 2 Tech IA GM 12 14 Pin Adapter 02001384 Figure 4 13 RWAL AWAL Adapter 02001579 16 12 Pin Non OBD II 02001575 Adapter Tech 1 GM 12 14 Pin Adapter 02001384 Figure 4 14 RWAL AWAL Adapter 02001579 16 12 Pin Non OBD II 02001575 Adapter All 1994 and newer OBD II C2 MTS 3100 Controller Area Network F 00K Figure 4 15 with 16 pin DLC VIM 108 115 OBD II 16 24 Pin DLC Adapter 02001744 Cable ABS Systems with OBDII C MTS 3100 Controller Area Network 02003211 Figure 4 16 16 pin DLC VIM 02001744 16 24 Pin DLC Adapter Cable OBD II Tech 1A OBD II Interface Cartridge 02002178 Figure 4 17 16 14 Pin OBD II Type 3 02001744 Adapter Cable OBD II VIM 02001808 Figure 4 18 16 14 Pin VIM Adapter 02001744 Cable Tech 1 OBD II VIM 02001808 Figure 4 19 Tech 1 16 24 Pin VIM 02001744 Adapter Cable 02001198 Tech 1 14 12 Pin VIM DLC Adapter TABLE 4 3
103. 4 162 function test 276 282 301 G gear tension 255 H hard current codes 284 hydraulic control 208 230 250 ignition latched code 284 indicator lamp sequence 312 information test mode 128 install Bosch adapter 335 install cartridge 6 isolation valves 300 K Kelsey Hayes systems 279 keyboard locked 338 keypad 107 L lamp test 137 175 242 274 leak down check 214 low trac lamp 258 Magna Steer 275 Magna Steer Variable Assist MSVA 260 manual control 224 manual relay 203 mass storage cartridge 75 modulator 227 motor rehome 255 motor rehome test 246 motor test 253 N no communication 336 no data received 334 O OBD II hardware interface 82 open short circuit 336 P parking brake 6 278 pilot valve test 138 154 Powermaster III 196 precautions 5 pressure hold 189 260 267 pressure modulator valve PMV 323 pressure release 190 260 267 printing 119 problems 332 pump motor 210 pump run total time 212 Q quick keys 77 R real time damping RTD 194 relay test 238 255 remove cartridge 6 reverse polarity 5 road sensing suspension RSS 165 183 RSS DTCs 165 RWAL connectors 279 S segment check 165 183 select mode 110 select system 110 selective ride control 144 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Index 363 smart cluster 257 W snapshot 6 117 132 148 170 snapshot mode warning lamps 219 multiple data lists 121 set up phase 122 soft history
104. 4 LR F5 RR LF SOLENOID TEST PRESSURE HOLD PRESS RELEASE LF SOLENOID TEST PRESSURE HOLD PRESS RELEASE SOLENOIDS OFF LF SOLENOID TEST PRESSURE HOLD PRESS RELEASE EL FUNCTION ON EXIT FIGURE 5 10 Manual Solenoid Test GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 134 Bosch 2S Micro ABS ASR System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 3 If no vehicle speed is detected the screen advises you to follow the Service Manual steps to diagnose Press to continue with the solenoid tests 4 The following Select Solenoid test menu is displayed Press the key to the left of the function you wish to test SELECT SOLENOID FO LF EI RF SELECT SOLENOID FO LEFT FRONT F1 RIGHT FRONT FA LR F5 RR F2 REAR AXLE Example of 3 Sensor Example of 4 Sensor Bosch System Bosch System 5 Press to actuate the pressure hold function for the selected solenoid or for the pressure release function The solenoids automatically turn off after six seconds Depending on the status of the solenoids HOLD FUNCTION ON REL FUNCTION ON or SOLENOIDS OFF is displayed on the bottom line of the tester screen 6 To select a different solenoid to test use the Qp key to return to the Select Solenoid menu or just press the key for the next wheel that you wish to test 7 To return to the ABS TCS TESTS menu press 24 while the Select Solenoid menu is displayed 8 To return to the test mode menu
105. 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F9 ABS VERSION DELCO CHASSIS DIV ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM VI 4 Seconds or keypress DCD ABS VI 1991 N CAR VERSION 1 0 Example for 1991 N Car 4 Seconds or keypress PROM ID DATE CODE 5200 SEQUENCE CALIB ID 4 Seconds or keypress FIGURE 5 65 ABS Version ACTIVE KEYS GJ Select ABS VERSION from SELECT TEST menu Manually scroll the display screen Freeze the display screen Return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 245 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F5 MOTOR REHOME This test is only available for F S U W and Z vehicles equipped with Delco ABS VI systems without Traction Control This feature allows you to command the ABS motors to drive the pistons to the home position at the top of each bore for the purpose of bleeding the secondary ABS circuits Systems with the function BLEED PREP do not offer the Motor Rehome function To select Motor Rehome Test do the following 1 Select MOTOR REHOME by pressing Gp from the SELECT MODE menu The tester does not perform a motor rehome if the vehicle is moving if certain codes are set or if the brakes are applied The tester informs you that the motors are being rehomed 2 MOTOR REHOME COMPLETE is displayed when the motors are rehomed then the tester returns to
106. 7 system utilizes eight solenoids to control brake pressure to the wheels The entire brake pressure modulator valve assembly BPMV motor and electronic brake control unit or electronic brake and traction control unit EBCM EBTCM are mounted together as a single assembly ABS WARNING LAMP The amber warning lamp is located in the instrument panel This warning lamp may be illuminated by the ABS only The lamp and lamp circuit are tested when switching the ignition from OFF to RUN which performs the bulb check The EBCM EBTCM warning lamp in the I P cluster is activated by a Class 2 signal from the EBCM EBTCM When the EBCM EBTCM decides that the ABS should be inhibited a turn on warning lamp Class 2 message is sent by the EBCM EBTCM The I P cluster picks up the message and supplied a ground to the lamp driver to activate the ABS lamp The lamp remains off as long as the system operates normally The lamp is illuminated by the EBCM EBTCM of a current ABS DTC is stored or if EBCM EBTCM loses power or ground When poor power or ground connection is located and repaired ABS coded and several Class 2 communication codes can be cleared and system can be re tested The EBCM constantly monitors the ABS TCS TIM MSVA systems and sets Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs if any system is operating outside of preset operating limits The DBC 7 system is designed so that ABS failures do not cause the standard red brake warning lamp to illuminate
107. 8 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2001 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS 2001 SATURN PASSENGER CARS Saturn BODY VIN 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM DBC7 ABS ETS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT QD TYPE CONFIG Firebird Formula F Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TCS Bonneville H Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS DRP ICCS3 MSVA TIM Sunfire J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS Grand Am N Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS VES TIM Grand Prix W Bosch 5 3 UART GM 16R ABS TCS Class 2 ADAPTER CONFIG OBD II C2 2001 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS VANS MPVS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL SYSTEM 5TH DIGIT TYPE CONFIG Pontiac Aztec A B Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 Old Body Style 4WAL 3 Sensor C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 New Body Style 4WAL 3 Sensor RTD EVO Tracker E J DBC 7 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 59 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2001 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS VANS MPVS CONTINUED BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 5TH DIGIT SES TYPE CONFIG Van 4X2 G Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor Van 4X2 4X4 M L Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD Il C2 4WAL 3 Sensor S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor Chevrolet Venture U X DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS Oldsmobile Silh
108. 8 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1991 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT ES TYPE CONFIG 6000 STE A Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS 6000 STE AWD A Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Bonneville H Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS Grand Am N Delco VI UART GM ABS Grand Prix Ww Delco Moraine IlI UART GM ABS 1991 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM S 5TH DIGIT SC TYPE CONFIG C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL Suburban C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM R 4 door 4WAL 3 Sensor Blazer S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL Van G Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL L M Van L M Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL L M Van L M Kelsey Hayes UART GM R 4WAL 3 Sensor Tracker E J Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL Blazer V Kelsey Hayes Flash Codes Jumper Pins RWAL A H GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 19 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1992 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1992 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SNP TYPE CONFIG Roadmaster B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS VES Wagon B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Electra C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS Reatta E Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Riviera E Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Le Sabre H Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS Skylark N Delco VI UART GM AB
109. 8 Clear the Trouble Codes The Teves Mark II ABS module does not allow codes to be cleared until repairs have been made Therefore do not try to clear codes until repairs are finished Disconnecting the battery or the ABS module connector does not clear Teves Mark II ABS diagnostic codes After repairs have been completed clear codes by driving the car above 18 MPH Then repeat the code reading sequence to be sure that all problems are corrected GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 318 Teves Mark Il ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F0 HOW TO READ VEHICLE REQUIRES GM 12 14 PIN ADAPTER P N 02001384 y CONNECT ADAPTER A TO DIAG CONNECT UNDER DASH PRESS ENTER ENTER SELECT MODE F0 HOW TO READ F1 FLASH CODES F2 DTC LIST IF THE ABS LAMP TURNS ON FOR 4 SECONDS amp THEN TURNS OFF AND Y REMAINS OFF NO CODES ARE STORED DO NOT COUNT THIS AS AY A CODE DIGIT IF THE ABS LIGHT REMAINS ON FOR 4 SEC AY AND STARTS FLASHING 1 OR MORE CODES MAY BE PRESENT AY A SERIES OF FLASHES FROM THE ABS LAMP REPRESENTS THE Y 1ST DTC DIGIT AFTER A 2 5 SEC PAUSE THERE IS A SERIESOF AY FLASHES WHICH REPRESENT THE 2ND DTC DIGIT FOLLOWED BY A Y CONTINUOUS LAMP EACH DTC DIGIT IS FLASHED ONCE BEFORE MOVING Y ONTO THE NEXT AFTER ALL DTC s HAVE BEEN FLASHED THE AY SEQUENCE WILL REPEAT THE
110. 99 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SNP TYPE CONFIG Aurora G Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Eighty Eight LSS H Delco Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA GM 16 Alero N Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS VES TIM Cutlass N Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS EVO Intrigue W Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TIM MSVA 1999 SATURN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SER TYPE CONFIG Firebird Formula F Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TCS Bonneville H Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA Sunfire J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Grand Am N Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS VES TIM Grand Prix W Bosch 5 3 UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT PIDIEM TYPE CONFIG Saturn Z Delco VI Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 51 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1999 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS VANS MPVS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM o STH DIGIT SE TYPE CONFIG Tracker E J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS Lumina Venture U X Delco VI UART OBD II C2 Tran Sport Silhouette ABS VES GM 16 C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor EVO Van G Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor EVO Class 2 OBD II C2 Van L M Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor Forward
111. ABS hydraulic modulator assembly is mounted on the master cylinder vacuum booster assembly The modulator contains 3 electric motors which control pistons for braking pressure regulation Major components of the Delco ABS VI system include hydraulic modulator 4 wheel speed sensors ABS enable relay 2 or 3 dash mounted warning lights and Electric Brake Control Module EBCM Each motor drive gear operates a threaded shaft assembly attached to a pressure modulating piston The motor drives a piston up and down to increase and decrease brake line pressure respectively When the EBCM senses wheel lock up from wheel speed sensors a solenoid located in the hydraulic modulator closes the hydraulic path from the master cylinder The electric motor for that brake circuit then cycles the piston up and down to modulate braking force preventing wheel lock up WARNING LAMPS Amber ANTILOCK or ABS INOP Warning Light With ignition ON a flashing amber ANTILOCK or ABS INOP warning light indicates problem exists in ABS system but system is still operational If the amber ANTILOCK or ABS INOP warning light remains on steadily problem has affected ABS operation and antilock function is disabled Amber LOW TRAC Warning Light With ignition ON Amber LOW TRAC warning light comes on during braking when ABS is functioning warning driver of slippery road conditions LOW TRAC warning light stays on approximately 4 seconds after ABS stops warning Red BRAKE
112. AL UART GM R S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes 4WAL 3 Sensor or 4 Sensor UART GM R Blazer S T Kelsey Hayes 4WAL 3 Sensor or 4 Sensor UART GM R Kelsey Hayes RWAL 3 Sensor or 4 Sensor UART GM R L M Van L M Kelsey Hayes RWAL 4WAL 3 Sensor or 4 Sensor UART GM R Tracker E J Kelsey Hayes RWAL ZP RWAL VCM RWAL UART GM R GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 27 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1993 GM ALL PURPOSE PASSENGER VEHICLES BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL STH DIGIT ARN TYPE CONFIG Lumina AVP U Delco VI UART GM Tran Sport Silhouette ABS VES 1994 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1994 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SES TYPE CONFIG Century A Delco VI UART GM ABS Roadmaster B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS VES Wagon B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Electra Park Avenue C Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 3 8L GM 16 8th VIN L 1 Le Sabre H Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 3 8L GM 16 8th VIN L 1 Skylark N Delco VI UART GM ABS Regal W Delco VI UART GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 28 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1994 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Fleetwood D Bosch
113. ARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT oP TYPE CONFIG Firebird Formula F Delco VI UART OBD II C2 Trans Am ABS GM 16 Firebird F Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 3 4L GM 16 8th VIN S Firebird F Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 5 7L amp GM 16 8th VIN P Bonneville H Teves Mark IV UART OBDII ABS TCS w 3 8L amp OBD II C 8th VIN L 1 GM 16 or GM Sunfire J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Sunfire J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 2 3L amp GM 16 8th VIN D Sunfire J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 2 2L amp GM 16 8th VIN 4 Grand Am N Delco VI UART GM ABS VES Grand Prix W Delco VI UART GM ABS 1995 SATURN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SYSIEM TYPE CONFIG All models Z Delco VI UART GM ABS TCS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 35 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1995 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER 5TH DIGIT eee TYPE CONFIG MODEL C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM R 4WAL 3 Sensor 4WAL PCM Suburban C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM R 4WAL 3 Sensor 4WAL PCM S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL ZP RWAL VCM RWAL S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM R 2 or 4 door 4WAL 3 Sensor PCM 4WAL S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor GM 16 VCM OBD II C Blazer S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM R 4WAL 3 Sensor 4WAL PCM Van G Kelse
114. Antilock braking on dry pavement the tires may make intermittent chirping noises as they approach slipping These noises and pedal pulsation s should be considered normal during Antilock operation Vehicles equipped with ABS may be stopped by applying normal force to the brake pedal Brake pedal operation during normal braking should be no different than previous systems Maintaining a constant force on the pedal provides the shortest stopping distance while maintaining vehicle stability TRACTION CONTROL Traction control does not have any effect on the operation of the vehicle until the control module detects one or both of the front wheels rotating faster than the rear wheels At this time the Electronic Brake and Traction Control Module EBTCM requests the Powertrain Control Module PCM to reduce the amount of torque applied to the drive wheels The PCM does this by retarding timing and selectively turning off fuel injectors up to a maximum of 5 The EBTCM applies the front brake thus reducing torque to the front wheels Once the front wheels begin to rotate at the same speed as the rear wheels the system returns full control to the driver During Traction Control mode if the brake is applied to only one front wheel most of the torque from the engine is directed to the other front wheel which improves the traction of the vehicle The braking is accomplished by closing the TCS Master Cylinder Isolation Valves this 1solates the master cylin
115. BASE BRAKE SYSTEM FOLLOW SERVICE MANUAL INSTRUCTIONS t AUTOMATED BLEED IGNITION SHOULD BE ON ENTER TO START ENTER TEST IN PROGRESS 8 10 SECONDS CONNECT REQUIRED BRAKE BLEEDING EQUIPMENT APPLY BLEED PRESSURE The next 3 screens are repeated for each secondary circuit RR LF RF LR SECONDARY CKT BLEED OPEN LR BLEED SCREW gt ENTER TO START SM ENTER TEST IN PROGRESS 1 5 2 Minutes CLOSE LEFT REAR BLEED SCREW AUTOMATED BLEED PROCEDURE COMPLETE RELEASE PRESSURE FROM BLEED EQUIPMENT DISCONNECT BLEED EQUIPMENT PRESS EXIT Back to Selection Menu FIGURE 5 33 F4 Auto Bleed Select AUTO BLEED ACTIVE KEYS ENTER Initiate the bleed procedure Increment procedure steps EXIT Return to OBD CONTROLS menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 178 Bosch 5 0 ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F5 TP SENSOR LEARN MODE F5 TP SENSOR LEARN is for 1996 Y Car and 1995 1996 D Cars If a new Throttle Position TP Sensor or throttle body is installed the EBTCM must learn the TP sensor idle position voltage with the new component s installed This is necessary to ensure effective engine torque reduction during TCS activation To select Throttle Position Sensor Learn do the following 1 Select F5 TP SENSOR LRN from the Select Mode menu 2 Press P to acknowledge
116. BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT BESTES TYPE CONFIG Corvette Y Bosch 2S Micro UART GM B ABS SEL 1990 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT DIEM TYPE CONFIG 98 Regency C Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Eighty Eight C Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Toronado E Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Cutlass Supreme Ww Delco Moraine Ill UART GM ABS 1990 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SE TYPE CONFIG 6000 STE A Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS 6000 STE AWD A Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Bonneville H Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Bonneville SSE H Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Grand Prix W Delco Moraine III UART GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 15 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1990 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 5TH DIGIT PER TYPE CONFIG C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL Suburban C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL Blazer S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL Van G Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL L M Van L M Kelsey Hayes UART GM R 4WAL 3 Sensor L M Van L M Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 16 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1991 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1991 BUICK PASSENGER CARS
117. BRAKE indicator The EHPB Electronic Hydraulic Parking Brake functions are also disabled Some errors also cause the PBCM to store system pressure and or voltages along with the trouble code to aid in diagnostics Before beginning testing of the Parking Brake system several checks should be made to eliminate the common problems Make sure the batteries are fully charged If the vehicle is equipped with a diesel engine Disconnect the intake air heater The intake air heater may cause low voltage reading if it is left MODE F8 INFORMATION Submode F0 PROM ID The PROM ID refers to the 4WAL Version ID Number Example GMC1147P GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 278 Kelsey Hayes RWAL All Versions 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes KELSEY HAYES ABS SYSTEMS KELSEY HAYES RWAL ALL VERSIONS All 1992 94 C and K 3500 Heavy Duty HD vehicles are equipped with a Zero pressure Rear Wheel Antilock ZP RWAL system All other vehicles are equipped with Rear Wheel Antilock RWAL systems Both systems operate the same however parts are not interchangeable Rear Wheel lock up is prevented by regulating fluid pressure to rear wheel cylinders Pressure regulating is adjusted by a control valve located under the master cylinder Control valve is regulated by an RWAL Electronic Control Unit ECU also known as an Electric Brake Control Module EBCM located next to master cylinder On 1993 S and T Series pickup truck
118. BS ASR System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F4 ABS TCS TESTS In this mode the ABS test mode performs function tests on ABS system used to verify proper system operation Testing and observing test results can further identify error conditions When in this mode the following tests can be performed FO Solenoid Test Fl Auto Test F2 Lamp Test e F3 Pilot Valve Test F4 ASR Test The submodes listed above are described in the following submode sections Submode FO Solenoid Test Solenoid Valve Pressure Reduction This test activates selected wheel circuit values in the modulator valve by placing the valve in pressure reduce position Valve action can be verified by checking appropriate wheel for braking action The scantool indicates whether valve operated correctly To perform pressure reduce test raise and support vehicle Depress brake pedal Use the scantool to command the PRESSURE REDUCE mode Try to spin the wheel being tested Wheel should spin if solenoid valve reduces pressure Solenoid Valve Pressure Hold This test activates selected wheel circuit valves in the modulator valve by placing valve in pressure hold position Valve action can be verified by checking appropriate wheel for braking action The scantool indicates whether valve operated correctly To perform pressure hold test raise and support vehicle Spin wheel freely Use the scantool to command the PRESSURE HOLD mode Have assistant ap
119. CO OR SCRI REO GG OH RO OK NUCRA 165 MONTI EPC I URS auxedwrssceessqESehedtensexsatpdd qb ed qd pedes addu 168 BOSCH SS ABSITCOSSYSIEM uu DERRCME a a CERE E un 169 EE EEE 2211902 9394 bpicht bebe dde id P A RAE eRe ede esp 169 Model d Gode FICE uucssdaqeesede eu et ved sum sau dad OE ARCA ta caa dad dad we 169 Mode T2 Doune CONS LolnpbbesesebedReR4dd e RebRbRPHMeEReb b PA bep Rp E REM 169 Moge Ta ARS HEU QursetaesdreschdreSus neSisscbies bod G0 A REND RUNS 170 Mode F4 Misc Tests 1995 96 B E K Body lssseeeee esee 170 Mode F4 OBD Controls 1995 96 D Body 1996 Y Body oo ccc ccc eee ee 170 Mode FSO TP Sensor Leara ka kaa de RI dH PEOHMIHE IPRERP obe bd dde ds 179 BOSCH 5 0 VES SYSTEM NEE EELER e y eene he een 181 Mode FO Duty Cycle Test 1o ieu eb 204 40nd bte EA CRGO RO CER EROR UR AIR ACA 181 BOSCH 5 0 RSS ELC SWPS SYSTEM ssssssssss e 183 Mode FO RSS COIS ac cc ccadbee des nipr dra vesdedde beh tds E NOR dC RU 183 SE THOR BRL ed EE eene e YO 3p dede PPM debeo iiibes 185 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 TOC iii Mode F2 SWPS Adjustment o on BOSCH 8 0 ABS SYSTEM Mode FO Data List Are ee cke ee dr aed EE EEN eer deer de Zeien SRGUSHOF nn AE Beete de Mode FA OBD Controls EE 056 tk ABS A BOSCH RTD REAL TIME DAMPING SYSTEM Function F1 RTD Diagnostics Function F2 RID Calibrate gaacsaveavcasa ess Delco ABS Systems 000005 DELCO MORA
120. CTIVE KEYS Ga Select DTC HISTORY from the SELECT MODE menu Toggle between MPH and KPH display Manually scroll the display Stop the display from sequencing Return to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 222 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F2 DTCS Trouble codes are stored in the ECU memory and can be displayed in the scantool The ABS ECU also records when the DTC was stored and the ABS status In addition to the DTC number a brief description of the DTC can be displayed DTCs can also be cleared from the ECU memory Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS SELECT ABS TEST F0 MANUAL CNTRL F1 MODULATOR F2 HYDRL CNTRL F3 EMB TEST F4 MOTOR TEST F5 GEAR TEN REL F6 RELAY TEST F7 VOLTAGE LOAD F8 LAMP TEST F9 ABS VERSION FIGURE 5 55 Delco ABS Test Menu F0 MANUAL CONTROL This test allows you to manually control ABS actuators including the Enable Relay EMBs Solenoids and Motors F1 MODULATOR In this test you are guided through the automated mechanical diagnosis of the modulator by prompts on the tester screen F2 HYDRAULIC CONTROL The hydraulic functional check allows testing of the ABS brake hydraulic channels by automatically sequencing through RELEASE HOLD and APPLY functions on the channel you select F3 EMB TEST The Electromagnetic Brake test applies motor
121. Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 94 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 14 GM 16R Adapter Configuration for Tech 1 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 95 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 15 OBD II C2 Adapter Configuration for MTS 3100 Application Cartridge MTS 3100 OBD II Compliant DLC Cable Controller Area Network VIM P N F 00K 108 115 16 24 Pin DLC Adapter Cable P N 02001744 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 96 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 16 OBD II C Adapter Configuration for MTS 3100 Application Cartridge MTS 3100 OBD II Compliant DLC Cable Controller Area Network VIM P N 02003211 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 97 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 17 OBD II Adapter Configuration for Tech 1A DLC Cable Application Cartridge 16 14 Pin Type 3 Adapter Cable GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 98 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 18 OBD II Adapter Configuration for Tech 1A DLC Cable Tech 1A Application Cartridge OBD II Vehicle Interface Module VIM GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 99 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 19 OBD II Adapter Configuration for Tech 1
122. Codes When a hard code is set ABS is disabled Diagnostic trouble code DTC is stored in memory RBWL remains lit until vehicle is serviced Rear brake warning light RBWL Soft History Codes There are two types of soft codes ignition latched and condition latched When and ignition latched code is set ABS is disabled DTC is stored in memory Rear brake warning light RBWL remains ON for current ignition period At successive ignition periods ABS is enabled and RBWL remains OFF unless fault persists When a condition latched code is set e ABS is disabled e DTC is stored in memory Rear brake warning light RBWL remains ON as long as fault persists NOTE Once a code is stored in memory it remains in memory until cleared by the scantool GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 284 Kelsey Hayes RWAL All Versions 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes CODE TYPE DESCRIPTION 1 11 12 None 2 IS Open isolation valve solenoid circuit or malfunctioning EBCM VCM 3 IS Open dump valve solenoid circuit or malfunctioning EBCM VCM 4 IS Grounded valve reset switch circuit 5 H Excessive actuations of dump valve during antilock braking 6 IS Erratic speed signal 7 IS Shorted isolation valve circuit or faulty EBCM VCM 8 IS Shorted dump valve circuit or faulty EBCM VCM 9 IS Open or grounded circuit to vehicle speed sensor 10 CS Brake
123. DY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL SYSTEM 5TH DIGIT TYPE CONFIG Tracker E J DBC 7 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS Chevrolet Venture U X DBC 7 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS Oldsmobile Silhouette X DBC 7 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS Pontiac Montana U X DBC 7 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 Old Body Style 4WAL 3 Sensor GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 55 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2000 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS VANS MPVS CONTINUED 4WAL 3 Sensor BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM S 5TH DIGIT PX TYPE CONFIG C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 New Body Style 4WAL 3 Sensor RTD EVO Van 4X2 G Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor Van 4X2 4X4 L M Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 2000 MEDIUM DUTY TRUCKS DATA ADAPTER MODEL ERIE YSTEM S S S SS TYPE CONFIG T55 T85 Medium Tilt C T Series Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 86 0 BBC F6 F7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor C Series Crew Cab D C Series Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R C7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor Bus Commercial T B7 Chassis Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R Chassis Cowl B7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 56 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2001 VEHICLE COVERAGE 2001 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT
124. E COMPLETE ke MOTOR FIGURE 5 67 Preparing ABS TCS for Bleeding Then after an initial system bleed the second step of the BLEED PREP cycles the traction control modulator four times to remove any trapped air bubbles in it GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 248 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes TURN IGNITION ON TCS MODULATOR INITIALIZATION COMPLETE PRESS ENTER TO INITIALIZE THE TCS MODULATOR FOR BLEEDING REFER BACK TO SERVICE MANUAL TO CONT BLEED PROCEDURE INITIALIZING TCS MODULATOR FIGURE 5 68 Initializing TCS Modulator The service manual and scantool procedures must be followed as the traction control modulator does not have bleeder screws as found on the ABS modulator When done bleeding check the fluid level in the reservoir and fill it if necessary ACTIVE KEYS ENTER Start a procedure as prompted Step through procedures EXIT Exit to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 249 Delco ABS VI Class 2 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes DELCO ABS VI CLASS 2 MODE F0 DATA LIST Diagnostic data parameters are monitored by the scantool The vehicle can be driven while these diagnostic data parameters are being displayed Intermittent analog signals can be monitored to determine if the signal varies Input output parameter status is also displayed Please refer to the applicable section i
125. E SURE ENGINE IS OFF AND IGN KEY IS IN THE RUN POSITION READ VEHICLE ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC DATA FOR FUEL LEVEL ID40 FIGURE 5 37 F1 Trim Height Adjustment 1995 96 Cadillac with RSS ROUND UP FUEL LEVEL DATA TO THE NEAREST GALLON ENTER FUEL LEVEL IN GALLONS GALLONS 0 PRESS ENTER ENTER REMOVE EXCESS WEIGHT FROM VEHICLE SEE SERVICE MANUAL ENTER BE SURE IGN KEY IS ON AND ENGINE IS OFF PRESS ENTER TO START ENTER TEST IN PROCESS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 186 Bosch 5 0 RSS ELC SWPS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F2 SWPS ADJUSTMENT This tester mode is available when testing most 1995 96 E and K car body vehicles with Electronic Level Control and RSS systems Select this mode to set the steering wheel position sensor for electronic chassis control systems such as RSS and ELC To select SWPS do the following 1 Press from the RSS SELECT TEST screen to select SWPS Follow the instructions provided on the screen of the tester 2 Check for RSS steering sensor DTC S080 using the CCC IPC DTC may vary depending on vehicle If present repair before performing steering sensor trim position adjustment 3 Center steering wheel and verify that the front wheels are straight 4 Connect scantool to DLC 5 Key ON engine OFF 6 Check RSS Data parameter SD15 using the CCC IPC SD15 must be between 2 0 and 3 0 volts If o
126. E TIRE SIZE IN THIS VERSION Unable to read SELECT NEW TIRE Ad F3 8 00R 19 5 F4 8 00 19 5 F5 8 75R 16 5 TIRE CALIBRATION XXXXIXXRXX SELECT NEW TIRE Ay F6 9 00 22 5 F7 LTP195 75R14 P205 75R15 PRESS EXIT TO CONTINUE SELECT NEW TIRE Ay MORE SELECT NEW TIRE v F1 P245 75R16 F2 LT245 75R16 P245 75R19 5 TURN IGNITION OFF THEN ON SELECT NEW TIRE Ay F4 P225 70HR15 F5 7 50 16LT LT265 75R16 APPLY amp HOLD BRAKE TO CALIBRATE EHCU returns you to the first Select New Tire menu SELECT NEW TIRE Ad F7 P275 60R15 F8 P235 70R15 F9 MORE CALIBRATING EHCU Function Test runs SELECT NEW TIRE Y F0 31X10 5 R15 F1 7 50R 16 7 50 16 TURN IGNITION OFF THEN ON UNABLE TO CALIBRATION CALIBRATE COMPLETE FIGURE 5 92 F3 Tire Size Cal GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 305 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F6 ABS Motor The ABS Motor verifies the ABS pump motor operates properly If a malfunction is detected the EBCM sets DTC s and the ABS indicator lamp turns on To perform the ABS Motor TEst do the following 1 Turn the ignition OFF 2 Install the scantool 3 Turn the ignition to RUN 4 Select ABS Motor from the OBD CONTROLS menu 5 Use the tester Up and Down arrow keys to turn ABS Motor ON and OFF MODE F8
127. EPRESS BRAKE PEDAL FIRMLY AND KEEP DEPRESSED BRAKE XXX DOES LEFT FRONT WHEEL TURN YES NO B or GD DOES LEFT FRONT WHEEL NOW TURN FREELY YES NO B o G9 Test is repeated for Right Front e then Rear Axle END OF DIAGNOSIS PRESS ENTER FOR RESULTS ENTER If fault s detected HYDRAULIC TEST PASSED FOR ALL COMPONENTS KEEPING PEDAL DEPRESSED WAIT 10 SECONDS Xx DOES LEFT FRONT WHEEL TURN FREELY YES NO LYES Ka NO REMOVE FOOT FROM BRAKE BRAKE XXX LEFT FRONT NO APPLY PRESS Possible fail messages 1 NO APPLY PRESS 2 NO RELEASE 3 NO HOLD FIGURE 5 58 Hydraulic Control ACTIVE KEYS Select HYDRAULIC CONTROL test Confirm that all wheels are off the ground YES F Ga Respond to tester questions EXIT Return to SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 231 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F3 EMB Functional Tests NOTE A This test does not apply to vehicles with Traction Control This test applies motor current to act against the EMBs on select GM vehicles If an EMB is not able to properly hold the motor the brake pedal moves To select EMB Functional Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Press a to select the EMB FUNCTIONAL Test 3 The t
128. F0 ABS DATALIST F1 CODE HISTORY F2 TROUBLE CODE GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 79 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 5 Truck RWAL and 4WAL Selection SELECT 0G OQ OO OO OO OO OO OO OO MODEL YEAR 2004 4 ENTER VEHICLE TYPE F0 PASSENGER CAR F1 U VAN APU F2 LIGHT TRUCK VEHICLE TYPE F0 PASSENGER CAR F2 LIGHT TRUCK VEHICLE TYPE F0 PASSENGER CAR F1 LIGHT TRUCK 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 SELECT 5TH DIGIT OF VIN CODE BODY TYPE CGKLMSTUX SELECT SYSTEM F0 RWAL F1 4WAL 4WAL SELECT F0 4WAL 3 SENSOR G G3 F1 VCM 4WAL G9 G9 INSTALL GM 16 12 F2 VCM 4WAL OBD2 90 92 93 PIN DLC ADAPTER P N 3000053 91 ENTER RWAL SELECT RWAL SELECT F0 ALL OTHERS F0 VCM RWAL F1 GMT 455 F1 ZP RWAL RWAL SELECT F2 ALL OTHERS F0 ZP RWAL F1 ALL OTHERS VOLTAGE CHECK COMMUNICATION CHECK SELECT MODE MENU ADAPTER AND ADAPTER CABLE CONFIGURATIONS This section describes the adapters and other hardware needed for use with the various vehicles covered in the GM Chassis Application Software The proper Data Link Connector DLC adapter cable and for Class 2 Network Communications additional hardware are needed to connect to the vehicles listed in the Vehicle GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 80 Adapter and Adapter Cabl
129. F1 MODULATOR F2 HYDRL CNTRL AUTOMATED ABS MODULATOR MECHANICAL DIAGNOSIS DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL FIRMLY BRAKE OFF 4 Seconds or keypress BE SURE ENGINE IS OFF AND IGN DOES THE BRAKE PEDAL SINK TOWARDS FLOOR KEY IS IN THE RUN POSITION YES NO If parking brake and or e red telltale are on RELEASE i Tester guides you PARA through the ABS Modulator Test If more than 10 seconds RELEASE PARKING END OF DIAGNOSIS BRAKE OR CORRECT CAUSE OR RED PRESS ENTER BRAKE TELLTALE FOR RESULTS When problem is fixed v PUMP BRAKES UNTIL VACUUM RESERVE IS DEPLETED THE LEFT FRONT CHANNEL WILL BE DIAGNOSED FIRST FIGURE 5 57 Modulator ACTIVE KEYS Select MODULATOR TEST Advance the screen after performing requested action ZA is Reply to questions about the results of actions that tester has asked you to perform ENTER View the results of the Modulator test EXIT Return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 229 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F2 Hydraulic Control Test CAUTION To perform the following test both vehicle drive wheels must be securely e raised or unintended vehicle movement occurs that could injure someone NOTE EH This test does not apply to vehicles with Traction Control This test allows you to manually p
130. GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 62 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2002 BUICK CHEVROLET GMC OLDSMOBILE PONTIAC LIGHT TRUCKS VANS MPVs BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL SYSTEM 5TH TYPE CONFIG Buick Rendezvous A B Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS Pontiac Aztek A B Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor RTD EVO Tracker E J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS Van 4x2 G Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor Van 4x2 4x4 M L Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor Chevrolet Avalanche C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor RTD EVO Chevrolet Silverado C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor RTD EVO Chevrolet Suburban C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor RTD EVO Chevrolet Tahoe C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor RTD EVO GMC Sierra C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor RTD EVO GMC Yukon C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor RTD EVO Chevrolet Express G Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor GMC Savana G Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor Chevrolet Astro M L Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 63 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2002 BUICK CHEVROLET GMC OLDSMOBILE
131. General Motors Chassis Application 1986 2004 7 Vetronix Bosch Group Vetronix Corporation Copyright 2007 Manual P N 08002835 Rev B Tech AAT and Mastertech are registered trademarks of Vetronix Corporation Printed in USA 05 07 Tech 19 This entire document and all information contained herein are proprietary confidential and exclusive trade secret property of Vetronix Corporation and shall not be reproduced duplicated or copied in whole or in part or made available to any person firm or corporation without the prior written permission of Vetronix Corporation SOME THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW WARNING Exhaust Gas AN When performing any checks with the engine running in an enclosed space such as a garage be sure there is proper ventilation Never inhale exhaust gases they contain carbon monoxide a colorless odorless extremely dangerous gas which can cause unconsciousness or death WARNING Avoiding Injury N Always set the parking brake securely and block the drive wheels before performing any checks or repairs on the vehicle Important Please Read The Tech 1 Tech 1A and MTS 3100 are designed for use by trained service personnel only They have been developed for the sole purpose of diagnosing and repairing automotive electronic systems With the help of the tester the information presented in this manual and the appropriate automotive service manual qualified personnel s
132. HEEL SPEED JITTER TEST 3 Seconds TROUBLE CODES CLEAR CODES HISTORY DATA WILL BE LOST CLEAR CODES YES NO CURRENT MALFUNCTION S EXIST UNABLE TO CLEAR DTC S DTC S CLEARED FIGURE 5 3 Example of Mode F2 Trouble Code DTC s Display and Clearing ACTIVE KEYS o Determine whether codes should be cleared or not Freeze the display of the latest trouble code Display the next trouble code Terminate trouble code display GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 116 Mode F3 Snapshot 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The purpose of the snapshot test mode is to help you isolate an intermittent or transient problem by storing data parameters before and or after the problem occurs The snapshot data can then be analyzed to determine the cause of the customer complaint When the tester 1s operating in snapshot mode it is constantly storing information about data parameters and trouble codes A time and position index for the stored information is also saved When the memory is full the oldest earliest data collected 1s erased to make room for new information NOTE Snapshot functions mentioned in this section may not be available for all A ABS vehicle applications A trigger tells the tester when to stop collecting data You can specify a trigger condition so the tester collects data that is most useful in diagnosing the current problem Yo
133. I UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 5 7L GM 16 8th VIN P Cavalier J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Cavalier J Delco VI UART GM ABS TCS w 3 2L 8th VIN D Cavalier J Delco VI UART GM ABS TCS w 2 2L 8th VIN 4 Beretta L Delco VI UART GM ABS Corsica L Delco VI UART GM ABS Lumina W Delco VI UART GM ABS VES GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 33 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1995 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SEPTEM TYPE CONFIG Monte Carlo W Delco VI UART GM ABS VES Corvette Y Bosch 2U UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS SEL GM 16 1995 GEO PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT PXDTEM TYPE CONFIG Metro M Delco VI UART GM ABS Prizm S Delco VI UART GM ABS 1995 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM T 4TH DIGIT SES TYPE CONFIG Cutlass Ciera A Delco VI UART GM ABS Ninety Eight Regency C Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 3 8L amp GM 16 8th VIN S Aurora G Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 ABS TCS w 4 0L amp 8th VIN C Eighty Eight H Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 3 8L amp GM 16 8th VIN L 1 Achieva N Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 Cutlass Supreme Ww Delco VI UART GM ABS Page 34 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1995 PONTIAC PASSENGER C
134. INE ABS II Mode FO Data Zeta EN E eb Mode FE DTC FASO coc AN ca RENE d siheri Mode F2 Trouble Codes cee Mode Fal SAREE roret ena uus ex dor edi acd Mode F4 ABS Tesis EN esee be A DELCO ABS VI UARTY usse DONDE LAMPS A Ae MA tpi ERA Mode FO Det lit ENEE ses census concise Mode Pl DIC HEP AE au pma e aidagugauaddsxdodi deed dd Mode P4 OBD Controls NN EE suo ease Mode F5 Motor Rehom oues seo ees euo NIR NC Mode FO Bleed Prep ENEE EE s AEN AER DELCO ABS VI CLASS2 Mode FO Data Lt dli lisa ea EA A Mode qub DIG Loses Ge de Gett Mode Fa SUGpShOe e AN AE SES e A Mode F4 OBD Controls oo ccc cnn ABS WARNING LAMP SMART CLUSTER sende LOW TRAC LAMP ounces TES EL EIS WARNING LAMP uie Rees SELF TESI eege Ee reien geg TIRE INFLATION MONITOR TIM SYSTEM MAGNETIC SPEED VARIABLE ASSIST MSVA MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS Aubmode FO E eusuk wate mare ball d ded db ab Mad xd desir di dob d S ER we oubinode F2 dutomdled Bleed qui aus eg qe dd d o PARRA REA RO EOD UHR CR HR sSubmode Fa automated JONM oues EN dE EA e di E cae ace nue ween be uh Ro A o Submode F4 Relay Test EE aut uh UR EE RAO ERG RR GU ENEE RA MODE F8 INFORMATION Delco Bosch Su osos RC RS 187 189 189 189 189 189 194 194 195 196 196 196 196 199 257 257 258 258 258 258 259 260 260 260 26
135. IPTION NO NO OBD II Class 2 OBD II C MTS 3100 Controller Area Network VIM 02003211 4 16 ABS Systems 16 24 Pin DLC Adapter Cable 02001744 16 pin DLC OBD II Tech IA OBD TI Interface Cartridge 02002178 4 17 16 14 Pin OBD II Type 3 02001744 Adapter Cable OBD II VIM 02001808 4 18 16 14 Pin VIM Adapter Cable 02001744 Tech 1 OBD II VIM 02001808 4 19 Tech 1 16 24 Pin VIM Adapter 02001744 Cable 02001198 Tech 1 14 12 Pin VIM DLC Adapter 16 pin DLC with GM 16 MTS 3100 GM 12 14 Pin Adapter 02001384 4 21 Non OBD II Systems 16 12 Pin Non OBD II Adapter 02001575 Non Class 2 Tech IA GM 12 14 Pin Adapter 02001384 4 21 16 12 Pin Non OBD II Adapter 02001575 Tech 1 16 12 Pin Non OBD II Adapter 02001575 4 22 For an illustration of the adapters and how to connect them to the tester refer to the FIG NO listing in the last column of the Chassis Adapter Usage Table GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 84 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started CHASSIS ADAPTER USAGE TABLE Use Table 4 3 in conjunction with the Vehicle Application Charts listed in the beginning of this chapter The illustrations referenced under FIG NO can be found after Table 4 3 SYSTEM ADAPTE R CONFIG TESTER ADAPTER DESCRIPTION Delco ABS Systems GM MTS 3100 GM 12 14 Pin Adapter 02001
136. K WHEELS THEN PRESS ENTER ENTER PLEASE WAIT THIS PROCEDURE WILL TAKE 60 SECONDS PLEASE WAIT PUMP RUNNING PLEASE WAIT ENERGIZING VALVES PLEASE WAIT DE ENERGIZING VALVES PROCESS COMPLETE BLEED BRAKE SYS NORMALLY THEN PRESS EXIT FIGURE 5 98 Teves ABS Auto Bleed Test ACTIVE KEYS Ga Select AUTO BLEED Test ENTER Continue with the AUTO BLEED Test EXIT Return to the OBD CONTROLS menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 327 Teves Mark IV ABS TCS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F2 TCS System Test The TCS SYS TEST performs a system self test and status of the TCS system and related ABS components NOTE Refer to the appropriate service manual and follow instructions when EH performing the TCS System Test To select the TCS System Test do the following The TCS system test function does not allow you to complete the self test NOTE if any of the following is true Any ABS DTCs present Brake pedal is depressed Engine is not running 1 From the OBD CONTROLS menu select TCS SYS TEST by pressing The TCS self test is initiated if the engine is running there are no DTCs and the brake pedal is not depressed If the TCS system passes the self test the tester displays TCS PASSED SYSTEM TEST If it fails it displays TCS FAILED CHECK THE EBTCM FOR DTCs
137. M Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 170 Bosch 5 0 ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes disconnect and reconnect power to the tester If the SOLENOIDS OFF message is not displayed within 30 seconds you probably have a bad connection to the DLC Check the connection cycle the ignition and cycle power to the tester before rerunning the test To select Solenoid Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing al 2 Select SOLENOID TEST by pressing a 3 If vehicle speed is detected the tester screen informs you that the test cannot be run while vehicle is moving 4 If no vehicle speed is detected the screen advises you to follow the Service Manual steps to diagnose Press to continue with the solenoid tests 5 The following SELECT SOLENOID menu is displayed Press the key to the left of the function you wish to test SELECT SOLENOID F0 LEFT FRONT SELECT SOLENOID F0 LF F1 RF F1 RIGHT FRONT FA LR F5 RR F2 REAR AXLE Example of 3 Sensor Example of 4 Sensor Bosch System Bosch System 6 Press to actuate the pressure hold function for the selected solenoid or for the pressure release function The solenoids automatically turn off after six seconds Depending on the status of the solenoids HOLD FUNCTION ON REL FUNCTION ON or SOLENOIDS OFF is displayed on the bottom line of the tester screen 7 To select a different solenoid to test use the qyp key to retur
138. Mode menu by pressing 2 Select LAMP TEST by pressing 3 For 1996 Y Cars only the red brake light can be tested 4 Press to return to the SELECT TEST menu SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TEST F5 TP SENSR LRN SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID TST F1 AUTO TEST F2 LAMP TEST LAMP TEST RED BRAKE LIGHT A ON y OFF FIGURE 5 31 Lamp Test Example ACTIVE KEYS G Select Lamp Test from the OBD CONTROLS menu Control the selected lamp ON or OFF EXIT Return to SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 175 Bosch 5 0 ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F3 TCS Test This test applies to 1995 96 D E and K Cars and to 1996 Y Cars In the TCS Test both the Pilot Valve s and Pump Motor can be turned on while a technician manually tries to turn the drive wheels CAUTION To perform the following test both vehicle drive wheels must be securely raised or unintended vehicle movement occurs that could injure someone To select TCS Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS from the Select Mode menu by pressing 2 Select TCS TEST by pressing A 3 The tester display informs you that the Pilot Valve test should be run before performing the TCS test If necessary run the Pilot Valve test 4 Make sure the drive wheels have been securely raised then press to begin the TCS TEST The pump motor and pilot valve s are run for
139. NST VOLTAGE SPIKES CAUTION Due to the possibility of voltage spikes that could damage the vehicle or tester do not connect or disconnect the tester while the ignition key is ON or while the engine is running INSTALL REMOVE CARTRIDGES WITH TESTER OFF Do not install or remove application or auxiliary cartridges while power is applied to the tester To change or add a cartridge do the following 1 Turn the ignition OFF CAUTION 2 Disconnect the tester power source either the cigarette lighter power plug or the ALDL DLC Cable from the vehicle 3 For the MTS 3100 press 3 GD to turn the tester OFF 4 Change or install the cartridge s 5 Reconnect the tester power source either the cigarette lighter power plug or the ALDL DLC Cable 6 Turn the ignition ON APPLY PARKING BRAKE OBD CONTROLS MODE OPERATION WARNING Use care when performing these tests If used incorrectly these test can N result in personal injury or damage to the ECM TCM PCM VCM ATC or AFECU or vehicle ALWAYS PUT THE PARKING BRAKE ON AND BLOCK THE WHEELS WHEN USING THIS TEST MODE PROTECT SNAPSHOT DATA Snapshot data 1s retained in tester memory for up to 24 hours even if the CAUTION tester is disconnected from the vehicle If you remove or change master cartridges or power up the tester without a master cartridge or with a different master cartridge you will lose the snapshot data
140. Neutral Switch Position Potentiometer Variable resistor Delco Moraine ABS III component Integral booster modulator which provides both normal braking and anti lock braking Pressure Park Gear Transmission shifter Park Reverse Neutral Drive and Low Programmable Read Only Memory Power Steering Prestroke Pounds per Square Inch Fuel Evaporator Purge Pulse Width Modulation Power Platform Zone Module Quad Driver Module Rear Axle Remote Accessory Control Radio Dimming Retained Accessory Power Right Block Learn Receive Receiver Recirculate Reference Relay Release when used with solenoid Request Resolution Right Front GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 359 D Glossary and Abbreviations RFA R INT RLY R O2 RR RS232 or RS 232 RS232 IF Cartridge RSS RST RTD RWAL SAE SAE J1850 VPW S C SDL SDM Secondary Display SEC SECT SEL SENS SES SFI Remote Function Actuator Right Fuel Integrator Relay Right Oxygen Sensor Right Rear A serial data transmission standard between computers and accompanying systems which uses one signal line for data An auxiliary cartridge that works in conjunction with a vehicle cartridge The cartridge gives RS232 capability to the Tech 1 so it can communicate with computers and printers Road Sensing Suspension Reset Real Time Dampening Rear Wheel Anti lock Brake System Society of Automotive Engineers
141. Normal BRAKE lamp NO ANTILOCK lamp or ABS CODES 9 Normal ANTILOCK lamp BRAKE lamp ON NO ANTILOCK lamp or ABS CODES TABLE 5 5 Lamp Sequence Symptoms GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 316 Teves Mark Il ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes TEVES MARK II ABS USING SCANTOOL The second Teves Mark II ABS system started production in 1988 and included ABS code diagnostics by flashing ABS codes through the Antilock lamp located in the instrument cluster The second Teves Mark II ABS system included the following models e 1988 1990 Pontiac E K Body 1989 1990 C H body Overview of Diagnostics 1 Make preliminary checks If a cause for an abnormal condition is found make the repairs at this point 2 Perform Functional Check 3 Based on the results of the lamp sequence or functional checks check the appropriate component s and make repairs Functional Check To perform the Functional Check for vehicles with ABS diagnostics do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the Run position a Allow the accumulator to charge 30 second maximum b Observe the BRAKE and ANTILOCK lamps Both should turn OFF within 30 seconds 2 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 3 Connect scantool to the ALDL connector located in the dash and select the proper year and VIN digit 4 Select the Flash Codes selection from the tester main menu 5 Turn the ignition to
142. OL BLEED TEST FOOT REMOVED FROM BRAKE PEDAL TEST ENDED RETURN TO ABS TEST SELECTION FIGURE 5 47 ABS Solenoid Bleed and Checkout Test ACTIVE KEYS YES Acknowledgment of brake pedal being depressed half way EXIT Terminate test and return to Select ABS test menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 207 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F2 Hydraulic Control This feature allows you to control the ABS solenoids for the purpose of hydraulic trouble shooting Hydraulic functions are checked by commanding the solenoid or solenoid pair associated with a particular hydraulic channel ON This allows you to confirm mechanical functioning of the solenoids leaking of the solenoids and the overall ability of the Powermaster III to perform the antilock function by turning the wheels by hand with the vehicle on a hoist To select Hydraulic Control do the following 1 Select the ABS TESTS by pressing af from the Select Mode menu 2 Press G to select HYDRL CNTRL the ABS HYDRAULIC FUNCTIONAL CHECK test and a test description is displayed 3 A FOLLOW SERVICE MANUAL prompt is displayed Press to continue the test 4 A menu of the functions listed below is displayed Press the number to the left of the function you wish to check NOTE When performing a HOLD on the front channels a RELEASE is first commanded for 2 seconds HOLD RELEASE S
143. OLD BRAKE PEDAL FIGURE 5 75 Automated Bleed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 270 Mode F4 OBD Controls 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F2 AUTOMATED TEST The Automated Test cycles each valve solenoid and the pump motor as well as the necessary relays to check component operation This test is identical to the ABS initialization sequence test If a malfunction 1s detected the EBTCM sets DTCs which are displayed at the end of the test The test should be performed as follows To perform the Automated Test do the following 1 Turn the ignition OFF 2 Connect the tester to the vehicle DLC 3 Turn the ignition ON 4 Press G to select AUTOMATED TEST 5 Press OZ to begin the test GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 271 Mode F4 OBD Controls 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes THE AUTOMATED TEST CYCLES EACH SOLENOID AND PUMP MOTOR TURN IGNITION TO THE RUN POSITION MAKE SURE VEHICLE IS IN PARK PRESS ENTER TO START TEST AUTO TEST RUNNING AUTOMATED TEST COMPLETE DTC S STORED XX XX NO DTC S SET TEST PASSED FIGURE 5 76 Automated Test ACTIVE KEYS G Select AUTOMATED TEST from the Miscellaneous Test Menu ENTER Begin Automated Test EXIT Return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 272 Mode F4 OBD Controls 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F
144. OLENOID SOLENOID FUNCTION F0 LEFT FRONT HOLD ON OFF AFTER 2 SEC F1 RIGHT FRONT HOLD ON OFF AFTER 2 SEC F2 REAR AXLE HOLD ON OFF F4 LEFT FRONT RELEASE ON ON F5 RIGHT FRONT RELEASE ON ON F6 REAR AXLE RELEASE ON ON 5 Use the and keys to control the solenoids in the same manner as the MANUAL RELAY AND SOLENOID CONTROL test NOTE The solenoids are automatically turned off if left on for more than 60 seconds and must cool before being turned on again An INHIBITED message is displayed if additional cooling time is required 6 Press CX to return to the SELECT FUNCTION Step 4 Press 4I again to return to the ABS TEST selection menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 208 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT ABS TEST F0 MANUAL CNTRL F1 AUTO BLEED F2 HYDRL CNTRL ABS HYDRAULIC FUNCTIONAL TEST 4 Seconds or IMPORTANT FOLLOW SERVICE MANUAL STEPS TO DIAGNOSE press 4 SELECT FUNCTION F4 LF RELEASE F5 RF RELEASE F6 REAR RELEASE SELECT FUNCTION F0 LF HOLD F1 RF HOLD F2 REAR HOLD 3 Seconds LEFT FRONT HOLD ON Y OFF HOLD CMD OFF RELEASE CMD OFF L FRONT RELEASE ON y OFF HOLD CMD OFF RELEASE CMD OFF RIGHT FRONT HOLD OFF FIGURE 5 48 Hydraulic Function Check GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 209 De
145. OLENOIDS OFF message is not displayed within 30 seconds you probably have a bad connection to the DLC Check the connection cycle the ignition and cycle power to the tester before rerunning the test GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 148 Bosch 2U ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes To select Solenoid Tests do the following 1 Select ABS TESTS by pressing aD 2 Select Solenoid Test by pressing a 3 If vehicle speed is detected the tester screen informs you that the test cannot be run while vehicle is moving 4 If no vehicle speed is detected the screen advises you to follow the Service Manual steps to diagnose Press to continue with the solenoid tests 5 The following Select Solenoid menu is displayed Press the key to the left of the function you wish to test SELECT SOLENOID F0 LF F1 RF SELECT SOLENOID F0 LEFT FRONT F1 RIGHT FRONT FA LR F5 RR F2 REAR AXLE Example of 3 Sensor Example of 4 Sensor Bosch System Bosch System 6 Press to actuate the pressure hold function for the selected solenoid or for the pressure release function The solenoids automatically turn off after six seconds Depending on the status of the solenoids HOLD FUNCTION ON REL FUNCTION ON or SOLENOIDS OFF is displayed on the bottom line of the tester screen 7 To select a different solenoid to test use the G qyp key to return to the Select Solenoid menu or just press the ke
146. OLS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Press G to select the LAMP Test 3 The tester display confirms that you are in the ABS LAMP Test The display automatically scrolls after four seconds or when you press the key 4 A Select Lamp menu is displayed Press the key Ga GD G that corresponds to the Lamp you want to test The example is for the Red Brake Lamp Use the and keys to turn the Lamp ON and OFF or flash The commanded state of the Lamp is displayed on line 3 and depending on the Lamp the feedback state may be displayed on line 4 5 Press CX to return to the SELECT LAMP menu or press SMIB twice to return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 242 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F6 RELAY TEST F7 VOLTAGE LOAD F8 LAMP TEST MANUAL CONTROL OF ABS LAMPS 4 Seconds or keypress SELECT LAMP F0 ABS INOP LP F1 RED BRAKE LP F2 LOW TRAC LP RED BRAKE LIGHT A ON v OFF COMMAND OFF FEEDBACK OFF RED BRAKE LIGHT A ON Y OFF COMMAND ON FEEDBACK ON FIGURE 5 64 Example of 1993 F Body ACTIVE KEYS Select the Lamp you want to test from the SELECT LAMP menu Turn the selected Lamp ON Turn the selected Lamp OFF Return to the SELECT LAMP menu Press twice to return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 243 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operatin
147. P RWAL The purpose of the FUNCTION TEST is to cycle the RWAL system The tester guides you step by step through the FUNCTION TEST process The tester simulates an acceleration and deceleration signal which causes the RWAL ECU to cycle the REAR WHEEL ANTILOCK system RWAL If the system stores a trouble code during the test the tester displays the code on completion of the test If a trouble code is set before you begin the test the tester displays the code and you are not permitted to continue until the code is cleared Run the function test under the following conditions After Bleeding the brake system use the scantool to run the Function Test four times while applying the brake pedal firmly fany component is replaced which may have caused air to enter the BPMV use the scantool to run the Function Test four times while applying the brake pedal firmly NOTE If either of the above conditions has occurred always re bleed all four wheels to remove the remaining air from the brake system To select Function Test do the following 1 Press GP to select the FUNCTION TEST mode from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Complete the FUNCTION TEST by following the directions on each screen The brake must be continuously applied to conduct the 4WAL function test If the system does not cycle check the brake lamp switch circuit GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 282 Kelsey Hayes RWAL All Versions 5 Selecting and Operating Te
148. P SENSR LRN TP SENSR LEARN TO START TP SENSR LEARN IN PROGRESS If TP Sensor Learn is unsuccessful TURN IGNITION OFF THEN ON TP SENSR LEARN 4 Seconds COMPLETE Trouble Codes Present No Trouble Codes TP SENSR LEARN TROUBLE CODES PRESENT PRESS F2 TO VIEW CODES IN PROGRESS TP SENSR LEARN FAILED SEE SERVICE MANUAL SECTION 5E1 TP SENSR LEARN 4 Seconds COMPLETE FIGURE 5 15 Throttle Position Sensor Learn ACTIVE KEYS G Select TP Sensor Lrn from the Select Mode menu G Display trouble codes Acknowledge that you wish to perform the TP Sensor Learn function Return to the Select Mode menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 143 Bosch 2S Micro Select Ride System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes BOSCH 2S MICRO SELECT RIDE SYSTEM MODE F0 FLASH CODES The selection FLASH DTCs or FLASH CODES is displayed when testing a Y car with Selective Ride Control and when the Select Ride system is selected on the tester When selected the tester causes the Ride Control Lamp to flash any trouble codes that are present Refer to the F1 function for clearing trouble codes Selective Ride Control tests SEL are available for 1989 93 Y Body vehicles The Selective Ride Control tests allow you to view trouble codes associated with the ride control system The codes are flashed on the Ride Control Lamp Selective Ride C
149. PE CONFIG Firebird Formula F Delco VI UART OBD II C2 Trans Am ABS TCS GM 16 Bonneville H Delco Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA GM 16 Sunfire J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Grand Am N Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 Grand Prix Ww Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 1996 SATURN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT PEDIEM TYPE CONFIG All models Z Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 39 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1996 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 5TH DIGIT RES TYPE CONFIG C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor Suburban C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 2 or 4 door 4WAL 3 Sensor S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 4WAL 3 Sensor GM 16 Blazer S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor Van G Kelsey Hayes UART GM16 R 4WAL 3 Sensor L M Van L M Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor Tracker E J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Lumina Venture U X Delco VI UART OBD II C2 Tran Sport Silhouette ABS VES GM 16 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 40 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1997 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1997 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SEPTEM TYPE CONFIG Park Avenue
150. PHASE Replay previously captured data Select the manual trigger mode Select the automatic trigger mode Select the trigger on any code mode Select the trigger on specified code Select Soft fault option AWAL UART systems only Select ABS Stop option AWAL UART systems only Select Trigger Point Select specific trouble code ENTER Enter selected trouble code a eee Fe eee ee EXIT Terminate SNAPSHOT mode return to Select Mode menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 120 Mode F3 Snapshot 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MULTIPLE DATA LISTS Some vehicles provide multiple data lists available in the snapshot function Figure 5 4 provides an example of setting up a snapshot when multiple data lists are available 1997 CHEVROLET CAMARO F EXAMPLE SELECT MODE DATA LIST DTC HISTORY DTC S SNAPSHOT MISC TESTS BLEED PREP SELECT SNAPSHOT F0 ABS F1 TCS SNAPSHOT OPTIONS F0 REPLAY DATA F1 MANUAL TRIG F2 AUTO TRIG FIGURE 5 4 ABS and TCS Data Lists are available for Snapshot Select a Data List to perform a Manual Trigger Snapshot 1997 BUICK REGAL W EXAMPLE SELECT MODE F0 Datalist F2 DTC Info F3 Snapshot SNAPSHOT OPTIONS F1 Any DTC F2 Manual Trig F3 Replay Data PRESS ENTER EXIT OR F9 TO TRIGGER 3 Seconds SELECT DATALIST F0 Module Info F2 ABS Data F2 TCS Data Whe
151. Page 138 Bosch 2S Micro ABS ASR System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 ABS TCS TESTS F5 TP SENSR LRN SELECT ABS TEST F3 PILOT VALVE F4 ASR TCS TEST PILOT VALVE TEST DRIVE WHEELS MUST BE OFF GROUND A PILOT VALVE TEST PILOT VALVE S ON FOR 25 SEC A START 25 Second Timeout PILOT VALVE TEST COMPLETE FIGURE 5 13 Pilot Valve Test ACTIVE KEYS G3 Select the Pilot Valve Test from the ABS TCS Tests Select Mode menu Y Car Control the pilot valve on EXIT Return to SELECT ABS TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 139 Bosch 2S Micro ABS ASR System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F4 ASR Test This test applies to 1992 93 Y Car CAUTION To perform the following test both vehicle drive wheels must be securely raised or there unintended vehicle movement occurs that could injure someone To ensure that ASR test results are accurate the PILOT VALVE TEST must be run first Once this is accomplished the ASR TEST can be utilized to run the ABS pump motor which applies fluid pressure to the rear wheel circuits After the vehicle has been raised on its frame both the Pilot Valve s and Pump Motor can be turned on while a technician manually tries to turn the drive wheels To select ASR Test do the following 1 Select ABS TCS TESTS from the Select Mode menu by pressing aL 2 Select ASR TEST by pres
152. Pump Control Front Wheel Drive Fixed Spark Gauges Dimming Generator 1 Terminal General FET Driver Governor Light Microcomputer type used in High Speed ECMs Ground potential low side of battery Governor Ground Grams per Second Gross Vehicle Weight Ratio Head Lamps Relay High Fan HI LO Beams Horn Relay Heat Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning module Hydraulic Idle Air Control Integrated Chassis Controller used on Cadillac E K bodies Identification Interface Ignition Idle Load Compensator Increase or Increment Incandescent Indicator GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 357 D Glossary and Abbreviations INFL INGST INIT INJ Intermittent Testing INT Io IPC IRC ISC ITV KAM Key Tag KPa LB6 L BLM LD2 LED LEV LF LFN L INT LMP L O2 LOC LR LST LT or LITE LTPWS LV8 Inflatable Ingestion Initialization Injector Testing which is performed to isolate problems that come and go Interior Intake Integrator Input Output Instrument Panel Cluster Integrated Radio Chassis Idle Speed Control Intake Tuning Valve Keep Alive Memory Keychain sized auditory signal generator to open doors and trunk on C Body cars with Level II RAC Kilopascals a unit of pressure Kilometers per Hour Engine designation for the 2 8L PFI engine used in GM10 vehicles Left Block Learn Engine designation for the 2 3L PFI engine used in GM10 vehicl
153. R CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH des TYPE CONFIG Bonneville H Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS Sunfire J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS Grand Am N DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS MSVA TIM Grand Prix W Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS TPM VES VSES GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 68 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2004 SATURN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH SARTEN TYPE CONFIG ION A Bosch 8 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP 2004 HUMMER LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER SET 5TH SERIEM TYPE CONFIG H2 N Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 2004 CHEVROLET GMC OLDSMOBILE PONTIAC LIGHT TRUCKS VANS MPVs BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL SYSTEM 5TH TYPE CONFIG Aztec Rendezvous A B Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS Sierra Silverado C K Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 Suburban Tahoe ABS TCS Escalade SRX E DBC7 2 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS DRP TCS VSES BAS Express Savana G H Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD Il C2 ABS TCS Tracker J DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS Astro Safari L M Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS Blazer Bravada S 10 S T Kelsey Hayes Class 2 OBD II C2 Envoy Trailblazer ABS TCS Sonoma Jimmy Rainer Canyon Colorado S T ADVICS Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS Montana Silhouette UNIX DBC7 Class 2 OBD
154. R JULIAN MAKE DATE SYSTEM ID XX XX XX DRP EQUIPPED XX RAM PART NUMBER BUILD SEG NUMBER XX XX CAIB PART NUM XX END MODEL PART NUM XX VES EQUIPPED XX TIM CONTROLLER XX TCS CONTROLLER XX ETS CONTROLLER XX FIGURE 5 9 Information Test Mode ACTIVE KEYS Select Information mode Ga Select Module Information G Scroll through Data List Return to Main menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 128 ADVICS ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ADVICS ABS SYSTEM ADVICS ABS TCS SYSTEM The ADVICS system consists of two components the EBCM electronic brake control module and the BPMV brake pressure modulator valve The system provides Antilock Braking Dynamic Rear Brake Proportioning and Traction Control optional The EBCM controls the system functions and detects faults The EBCM contains six solenoids that are commanded ON and OFF to operate the appropriate valves in the brake pressure modulator valve BPMV The BPMV uses a three circuit configuration to control hydraulic pressure to each front wheel independently and to the rear wheels as a pair The system can decrease hold or increase hydraulic pressure to each wheel however it cannot increase hydraulic pressure above the amount which is transmitted by the master cylinder during braking MODE F0 DATA LIST Diagnostic data parameters are monitored by the scantool The vehicle can be
155. RIC VALUE XXXXXXXXIXIX The ECU ID provides information regarding the version of the Electronic Control Unit ECU used in the Bosch ABS This information might be used to determine if the correct version of ECU is installed in the vehicle It might also be referenced in service bulletins ENGINE SPEED RPM 0 to 9999 Engine speed is an ECM internal parameter It is computed by timing pulses coming from either the distributor a cam sensor or the Ignition Module ENGINE TORQUE 96 Delivered 0 to 100 This parameter indicates engine torque delivered to drive wheels FRONT WHL SPEEDS UNITS RANGE Front wheel speeds are displayed such that the LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED is on the left hand side and the RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED is on the right hand side The front wheel speeds are generated by the change in flux as a toothed ring passes in front of a variable reluctance sensor A sinusoidal waveform results at a frequency proportional to speed LF VALVE SOLENOID RF VALVE SOLENOID LR VALVE SOLENOID RR VALVE SOLENOID APPLY HOLD VENTING RELEASE The parameter indicates the state of the valve solenoid LATERAL ACCELERATION VOLTS 0 3 to 5 1 gs 1 28 to 1 27 The sensor output for centrifugal force measured as the vehicle turns is indicated in g s and volts LOW BRAKE FLUID YES NO The tester displays YES if the brake fluid level is low or NO if the fluid level is OK PUMP MONITOR ON OFF This para
156. ROLS Submode FO Solenoid Test Solenoid Test Pressure Hold The Solenoid Pressure Hold Mode activates the selected wheel circuit inlet valve placing it in the pressure hold position When in the pressure hold position the valve does not allow master cylinder pressure to be delivered to the hydraulic wheel circuit This is done under actual operating conditions because the EBTCM has determined that the wheel is moving too slowly so it holds additional master cylinder pressure from it in an attempt to allow it to rotate at an appropriate speed The scantool commands the valve to close which GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 189 Bosch 8 0 ABS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes should allow the technician to spin the wheel even though an assistant 1s applying pressure to the brake pedal Solenoid Test Pressure Release The Solenoid Pressure Release Mode activates the selected hydraulic wheel circuit valves placing them in the pressure reduce position When in the pressure reduce position the valve allows wheel caliper pressure to be returned to the master cylinder circuit This is done under actual operating conditions because the EBTCM has determined that the wheel is moving too slowly and holding additional master cylinder pressure from it has not allowed it to rotate at an appropriate speed The scantool commands the valves to these positions which should allow the technician to spin the wheel even through an a
157. S GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 25 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1993 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT ER TYPE CONFIG Custom Cruiser Wagon B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Ninety Eight Regency C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS TCS Touring Sedan C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS TCS Toronado E Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Eighty Eight H Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS TCS Achieva N Delco VI UART GM ABS VES Cutlass Supreme W Delco VI UART GM ABS 1993 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT DEP TYPE CONFIG Firebird F Delco VI UART GM ABS Bonneville H Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS TCS Sunbird J Delco VI UART GM ABS Grand Am N Delco VI UART GM ABS VES Grand Prix W Delco VI UART GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 26 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1993 SATURN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SE TYPE CONFIG All models Z Delco VI UART GM ABS TCS 1993 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS MODEL C K Truck C K Truck BODY VIN 5TH DIGIT C K C K SYSTEM Kelsey Hayes RWAL ZP RWAL VCM RWAL Kelsey Hayes 4WAL 3 Sensor or 4 Sensor DATA TYPE UART UART ADAPTER CONFIG GM R GM R Suburban C K Kelsey Hayes 4WAL UART GM R S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes RWAL ZP RWAL VCM RW
158. S FOR 25 SECONDS FOR 25 SECONDS A START A START e 25 Second 25 Second Time Out Time Out TCS TEST ASR TEST COMPLETE COMPLETE EXIT EXIT FIGURE 5 22 TCS Test ACTIVE KEYS Select TCS Test from the SELECT TEST menu Begin the TCS Test EXIT Return to SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 157 Bosch 2U VES System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes BOSCH 2U VES SYSTEM Variable Effort Steering VES is available on selected 1992 93 D and N Body vehicles and 1992 94 Buick B Body vehicles The Variable Effort VE steering controller outputs a signal which controls the amount of power steering assist relative to the vehicle s speed At low speeds the power steering assist is increased to improve maneuverability At higher speeds the amount of assist is decreased to improve road feel To do this the Variable Effort VE steering controller drives a solenoid with a variable duty cycle signal With the tester you can display the duty cycle of this signal A low duty cycle corresponds to a high degree of power assist while a high duty cycle means a low amount of assist For 1993 D Cars you can control the duty cycle while monitoring the feedback current MODE F0 DUTY CYCLE To select Duty Cycle Test do the following 1 Press a from the SELECT SYSTEM menu to test VE steering system 2 Press Qai to select the DUTY CYCLE TEST from the Select Mode menu 3 For 1993 D cars p
159. S Regal W Delco VI UART GM ABS 1992 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODE 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG DeVille C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS TCS Fleetwood C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS TCS Brougham D Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS VES Eldorado E Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Seville K Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 20 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1992 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MOPED 4TH DIGIT EM TYPE CONFIG Caprice B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Cavalier J Delco VI UART GM ABS Beretta L Delco VI UART GM ABS Corsica L Delco VI UART GM ABS Lumina W Delco VI UART GM ABS Corvette Y Bosch 2S Micro UART GM ABS ASR SEL 1992 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Custom Cruiser Wagon B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS 98 Regency C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS TCS Touring Sedan C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS TCS Toronado E Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Eighty Eight H Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS TCS Achieva N Delco VI UART GM ABS VES Cutlass Supreme Ww Delco VI UART GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 21 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1992 SATURN PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT eres TYPE CONFIG All models Z Delco VI UART GM ABS VES 1992 PONTIAC PAS
160. S TEST SELECTION ELAPSED TIME BRAKE PEDAL WAS WITH NO PUMP RELEASED BEFORE RUN DETECTED THE PUMP RAN PUMP DOES NOT RUN WITHIN 60 Seconds PM III DID NOT BLEED DOWN FAR ENOUGH TO CAUSE PUMP TO RUN TEST IS INVALID 6 Seconds IF BRAKE WAS FIRMLY DEPRESSED NO TROUBLE FOUND FIGURE 5 51 Bleed Down Check with Brake Pedal Depressed EXIT Terminate test and return to PUMP MOTOR TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 215 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F3 Cycles without Brake Apply MONITOR THE NUMBER OF PUMP RUNS WITH NO BRAKE APPLY This test monitors the Powermaster III and identify any pump runs that occur without the brake being applied Because of the no leak down design of the Powermaster III loss of accumulator pressure sufficient to cause the pump motor to run can only be caused by 1 Depleting the pressure by applying the brakes or 2 Internal or external Powermaster III leakage This test identifies the number of pump motor runs during the running timer If the pump motor runs even once within 20 minutes the cause of the pump run should be determined Consult the service manual NOTE A If the brake pedal is applied during this test the test ends To select Cycles without Brake Applied Test do the following 1 Select the ABS TESTS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Select the PUMP MOTOR test by pressing
161. S III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS IN THE DISPLAY PHASE Select left front hold solenoid Ga Select right front hold solenoid G Select rear hold solenoid G3 Select ABS Warning Light G Select left front release solenoid G Select right front release solenoid G9 Select rear release solenoid Continue to Manual Relay and Solenoid tests Used to turn solenoid ON Used to turn solenoid OFF Used to turn relays ON and OFF Return to ABS TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 205 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F1 Auto Bleed This feature is designed to remove air from internal Powermaster III brake fluid chambers after Powermaster III service This test automatically cycles the solenoids in such a manner that air is removed from the Powermaster III During this time pedal feel can be used to diagnose solenoid problems pump output problems and pedal feel complaints The final phase of this test releases brake pressure from each hydraulic channel one at a time allowing you to identify pedal travel problems solenoid leakage or internal Powermaster III problems NOTE Performing the Autobleed procedure bleeds only the solenoids contained in the Powermaster III Unit not the base brake system or brake lines Refer to GM Service Manual for additional information To select Auto Bleed do the following
162. SENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SXSTEM TYPE CONFIG Bonneville H Teves UART GM B ABS Sunbird J Delco VI UART GM ABS Tempest L Delco VI UART GM ABS Grand Am N Delco VI UART GM ABS VES Grand Prix W Delco VI UART GM ABS 1992 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER VODEN 5TH DIGIT SE TYPE CONFIG C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM R 4WAL Suburban C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM R 4WAL S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 22 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1992 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS CONTINUED S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM R 2 or 4 door 4WAL Blazer S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM R 4WAL Van G Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL L M Van L M Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL L M Van L M Kelsey Hayes UART GM R 4WAL Tracker E J Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL 1992 GM ALL PURPOSE PASSENGER VEHICLES BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER 5TH DIGIT SYSTEM CONFIG Lumina Venture U Delco VI UART GM Tran Sport Silhouette ABS VES 1993 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1993 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SE TYPE CONFIG Roadmaster B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS VES Wagon B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Electra C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS Reatta E Bosch 2U UART GM ABS TCS w 4 3L GM Chassis Applica
163. ST START ENGINE FULL FIRM MSVA CONTROL MAGNA STEER TEST STEERING EFFORT COMMANDS WILL BE CONTROLLED A 3 SECONDS LESS FIRM MSVA CONTROL STEERING EFFORT SHOULD BE LESS FIRM THEN CHANGE TO MOREFIRM 4 3 SECONDS STEERING EFFORT SHOULD RETURN TO NORMAL AFTER APPROX 6 SEC A TEST COMPLETE FIGURE 5 79 F6 Magna Steer Test GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 275 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL 4 Sensor Hydraulic Antilock Brake System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes GM MEDIUM DUTY 4WAL ABS KELSEY HAYES 4WAL 4 SENSOR HYDRAULIC ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM SELF TESTS The ABS performs the following two system self tests The first self test is performed when the ignition is turned to RUN Both the ABS indicator lamp and the BRAKE warning lamp turn on for three seconds then they turn off This test confirms correct operation for the EBCM and the lamps If one of the lamps remain on either the ABS or the base brake system requires service The second self test is performed when the vehicle reaches a speed of greater than 3 mph At this time the internal EBCM relay six solenoid coils and BPMV pump motor are cycled and checked for short opens The BPMV pump makes a slight sound when this function occurs MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS Submode FO Function Test The Function Test cycles each valve solenoid and the pump motor as well as the necessary rel
164. ST LF APPLY LF RELEASE LF SOLENOID LF EMB RF APPLY RF RELEASE RF SOLENOID RF EMB REAR APPLY REAR RELEASE LF MOTOR APPLY COMMAND 10 AMPS FEEDBACK 10 AMPS ENAB RELAY ON ENTER LF MOTOR APPLY COMMAND 10 AMPS FEEDBACK 0AMPS ENAB RELAY OFF NO DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS CNTRLR Note LF EMB and RF EMB functions are only available for J L N vehicles Enable Relay is ON Enable Relay is turned OFF FIGURE 5 56 Manual Control GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 226 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F1 Modulator Test NOTE The Modulator Test is not used on 1994 1995 vehicles This test does not apply to vehicles with Traction Control The Modulator test is an automated diagnostic test of the mechanical components of the brake modulator system on select GM vehicles The tester guides you through the steps by displaying prompts for action on the tester display screen You perform the requested action e g pressing or releasing the brake pedal then inform the tester of the results by pressing the Qo or key The tester displays an or YES NO on the bottom line as an indication of the type response needed At the end of the test steps the tester displays the results of the tests If a component fails the test rerun the test to verify the failure before replacing the component If you make a mistake
165. T GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor EVO Class 2 OBD II C2 Van L M Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor EVO Class 2 OBD II C2 Forward Control P Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 4WAL 3 Sensor GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 44 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1997 MEDIUM DUTY TRUCKS DATA ADAPTER MODEL ERIE YSTEM 9 S S dus TYPE CONFIG T55 T85 Medium Tilt C T Series Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 86 0 BBC F6 F7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor C Series Crew Cab D C Series Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R C7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor Bus Commercial T B7 Chassis Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R Chassis Cowl B7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor 1998 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1998 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SES TYPE CONFIG Park Avenue C Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA TIM Riviera G Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Le Sabre H Delco Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA GM 16 Skylark N Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS EVO GM 16 Century Regal W Delco VI Class 2 OBD Il C2 ABS TCS ETS TIM VES GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 45 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1998 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SD TYPE CONFIG Eldorado E Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2
166. TA LIST Diagnostic data parameters are monitored by the scantool The vehicle can be driven while these diagnostic data parameters are being displayed Intermittent analog signals can be monitored to determine if the signal varies Input output parameter status is also displayed Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F2 DTCS Trouble codes are stored in the ECU memory and can be displayed in the scantool The ABS ECU also records when the DTC was stored and the ABS status In addition to the DTC number a brief description of the DTC can be displayed DTCs can also be cleared from the ECU memory Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The ABS snapshot helps isolate problems of intermittent ABS operation Information is captured before and after a trigger condition The manual and automatic trigger can be selected You will also be allowed to review a stored snapshot from this menu Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 266 Mode F4 OBD Controls 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS SUBMODE F0 SOLENOID TEST Solenoid Test Pressure Hold The Solenoid Pressure Hold Mode activates the selected wheel circuit inlet valve placing it in the pressure hold position When in the pressure hold position the valve does not allow master cylinder pressure to
167. TED NO CODES TEST COMPLETE CODE XX DESCRIPTION FIGURE 5 91 Example of 4WAL Submode F1 Function Test ACTIVE KEYS ENTER Cause the next screen of instruction to be displayed EXIT Return to SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 302 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F2 DTC History The DTC HISTORY function identifies which codes are stored within each History Block The information is available in two ways Stored Codes lists the Block and all the codes stored in that block by number only Enhanced Codes provides the code number and a text description of the codes stored in the block To display DTC History do the following 1 Select DTC HISTORY from the OBD CONTROLS mode menu by pressing 2 Select the DTC HISTORY display option Gy STORED CODES Gp for ENHANCED 3 The tester prompts you to turn the ignition OFF then ON The tester then displays the Block and the code information Submode F2 Auto Bleed The Auto Bleed procedure should be performed after replacement of ABS Actuator or if air is trapped in unit Bleeding should not be necessary if the fluid is not contaminated or no air is in the BPMV EHCU There are internal bleed valves on each side of the BPMV EHCU that open internal channels Open the internal bleed valves 1 4 to 1 2 turn before bleeding Should the actuator need bleeding it must be bled after the master cylinder an
168. THEN TURN KEY ON KEY TURNED ON K ON TO OK PRESS xx SECONDS PRESSURE OK K ON TO OK PRESS 12 SECONDS OK PRESS TO OFF xx SECONDS PUMP STOPS TIME FROM IGNITION ON TO BRAKE WARNING LIGHT OUT K ON TO OK PRESS OK PRESS TO OFF TIME FROM WARNING LIGHT OUT TO PUMP OFF RETURN TO ABS TEST SELECTION FIGURE 5 50 Monitor Total Pump Run Time Test EXIT Terminate test and return to the PUMP MOTOR TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 213 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F2 Leak Down Check POWERMASTER III BLEED DOWN CHECK WITH BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED DELCO MORAINE ABS III This test monitors the Powermaster III while the brakes are applied brake pedal depressed When a pump run is detected the running timer stops The time required to initiate this pump run can be directly related to accumulator precharge and internal leakage A pump run within 30 seconds results in a message indicating that further testing is required with a pressure gauge A pump run that occurs after 30 seconds but before 60 seconds results in a displayed time that can be correlated to a leak down acceptability chart found in the service manual If the pump does not run within 60 seconds the test ends with no leakage identified NOTE EB If the brake pedal is released during the test the test ends To select Leak Down Test do the follow
169. The Solenoid Test for Inlet Values activates the selected wheel circuit inlet valve placing it in the pressure hold position When in the pressure hold position the valve does not allow master cylinder pressure to be delivered to the hydraulic wheel circuit This is done under actual operating conditions because the EBTCM has determined that the wheel is moving too slowly so it holds additional master cylinder pressure from it in an attempt to allow it to rotate at an appropriate speed The scantool commands the valve to close which should allow the technician to spin the wheel even though an assistant is applying pressure to the brake pedal Solenoid Test Outlet The Solenoid Test for Outlet Values activates the selected hydraulic wheel circuit valves placing them in the pressure release position When in the pressure release position the valve allows wheel caliper pressure to be returned to the master cylinder circuit This is done under actual operating conditions because the EBTCM has determined that the wheel is moving too slowly and holding additional master cylinder pressure from it has not allowed it to rotate at an appropriate speed The scantool commands the valves to these positions which should allow the technician to spin the wheel even through an assistant is applying pressure to the brake pedal To select Solenoid Test do the following 1 Ignition OFF Position 2 Install scantool 3 Turn ignition to the RUN Position
170. USA GM ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS ECUs GM ECUS use two types of serial communication e UART Universal Asynchronous Receive and Transmit e Class 2 UART communication is used for all serial communication prior to OBD II requirement for all automotive manufacturers to reduce emissions The UART is a 5 volt line that toggles the voltage to ground at a fixed bit pulse width during communications UART transmits data at the rate of 8 2 kilobits per second 8192 bps Some control modules on current production GM vehicles for Chassis and Body systems still communicate using the UART protocol CLASS 2 was introduced to meet the demanding requirements of OBD II Selected 1995 and all 1996 to present GM vehicles The Class 2 data line transfers information by toggling the line from zero volts to 7 volts Class 2 transmits data at the rate of 10 4 kilobits per second 10 4 Kbps Class 2 is used for serial communications on all OBD II certified Powertrain and Transmission control modules from 1995 to present GM vehicles Class 2 communications is available on some GM Chassis and Body control modules and is increasing as new models are introduced The communication or data type is listed in the Vehicle Coverage tables in this manual As a result of this performance improvement to operate with General Motor s new and old data link s Vetronix diagnostic test tools are required to contain new hardware Refer to Table 4 1 for Vetronix t
171. UTOMATED BLEED from the OBD CONTROLS menu RELEASE BRAKE TEST IN PROGRESS CLOSE RIGHT FRONT BLEED SCREW PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER 1 OPEN RF BLEED SCR 2 CLOSE RF BLEED SCR PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE RIGHT FRONT CIRCUIT COMPLETE PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE v TEST REPEATS ABOVE SEQUENCE FOR LEFT FRONT CIRCUIT AUTOBLEED PROCEDURE COMPLETE PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE RELEASE THE PRESSURE FROM THE EQUIPMENT DISCONNECT BLEED EQUIPMENT PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE Scroll up through menu Scroll down through menu Continue test 2008 z m E EXIT Return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 263 Mode F8 Information 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SUBMODE F3 AUTOMATED TEST The Automated Test cycles each valve solenoid and pump motor in order to check component operation If a malfunction is detected the EBCM sets a DTC s which will be displayed upon completion of the test SUBMODE F4 RELAY TEST The ABS Relay Test allows monitoring of the voltage available to the EBCM while turning the Electronic Brake Relay ON and OFF When the relay is turned ON the voltage should be equal to the battery voltage When the relay is OFF the voltage should drop below 5 volts NOTE Relay voltage does not drop to zero when the contacts are open due to capacitors in the EBCM If the voltage dr
172. VEHICLE ABS CAN STORE UP TO 7 CODES IN MEMORY Y PRESS EXIT TO CONTINUE A EXIT FIGURE 5 93 How To Read GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 319 Teves Mark Il ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F1 FLASH CODES VEHICLE REQUIRES GM 12 14 PIN ADAPTER P N 02001384 y CONNECT ADAPTER TO DIAG CONNECT UNDER DASH PRESS ENTER ENTER SELECT MODE Y F0 HOW TO READ F1 FLASH CODES F2 DTC LIST TURN IGNITION OFF THEN PRESS ENTER ENTER ABS WARNING LAMP WILL FLASH DTC s PRESS ENTER TO BEGIN ENTER TURN IGNITION ON THEN PRESS ENTER ENTER ENTER DTC NUMBER ENTER Y ENTER DTC 24 RIGHT FROM WHEEL SPEED SENSOR ENTER ENTER ADDITIONAL TROUBLE CODES YES NO YES ADVANCE CODE HOLD CODE EXIT QUIT ENTER SUMMARY FIGURE 5 94 Flash Codes GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 320 Teves Mark Il ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F3 REVIEW DTCS VEHICLE REQUIRES GM 12 14 PIN ADAPTER P N 02001384 v CONNECT ADAPTER TO DIAG CONNECT UNDER DASH PRESS ENTER ENTER SELECT MODE VY F0 HOW TO READ F1 FLASH CODES F2 DTC LIST SELECT MODE F3 REVIEW DTC F4 CLEAR DTC ADVANCE CODE HOLD CODE EXIT QUIT ENTER SUMMARY ENTER DTC
173. Warning Light With ignition ON a red BRAKE warning light indicates following possible problems fluid level in master cylinder reservoir is low parking brake switch is closed or bulb test circuit of ignition switch is closed Red BRAKE warning light also comes on if problems exists in base brake system Intermittent Service Indicator Lamps Intermittent SERVICE ABS or SERVICE TCS indicator lamp operation may indicate low system voltage These lamps remain lit and ABS TCS is disabled as long as system voltage is low MODE F0 DATA LIST Diagnostic data parameters are monitored by the scantool The vehicle can be driven while these diagnostic data parameters are being displayed Intermittent analog signals can be monitored to determine if the signal varies Input output parameter status is also displayed Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 219 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F1 DTC HISTORY DTC history identifies the following information for Delco ABS VI UART systems First Five or Fewer Failures The first five faults are displayed in the order in which they occurred This information can be used to identify situations where an initial fault that was detected no longer remains but the fault conditions explain the occurrence of a later fault The first page of information displays how often each
174. akes approximately 60 seconds to perform If the PROCESS COMPLETE message is not displayed within 2 minutes you probably have a bad connection to the DLC Check the connection cycle the ignition and cycle power to the tester before rerunning the test To select Auto Bleed do the following Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing G9 Select the AUTO BLEED test by pressing a The tester display confirms that you are ready to perform the AUTO BLEED test After 4 seconds the display instructs you to bleed the brake system normally then press Gili to continue the AUTO BLEED test S oN AR A caution message to set the brakes and block the wheels is displayed Set the brake and block the wheels then press Gis The tester informs you that the procedure takes 60 seconds then begins the test when you press PLEASE WAIT is displayed while the tester performs the Pump Running Energizing Valves and De energizing Valves tests Nn 6 At the end of the tests the tester informs you that the process is complete and that you should bleed the brake system normally then press 2419 7 Press QA to return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 326 Teves Mark IV ABS TCS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID TST F1 AUTO BLEED SOLENOID BLEED AND CHECKOUT TEST 4 Seconds BLEED BRAKE SYS NORMALLY THEN PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER SET BRAKES BLOC
175. ameters and trouble codes while displaying the Data List parameters Trouble codes for some systems are also stored and can be displayed in the Data Display phase 6 The data 1s organized as a number of data samples The value or state of each parameter as well as all trouble codes are saved for each sample The data display indicates the waiting for trigger condition with a flashing W in the lower right hand corner of the display While waiting for the selected trigger the G9 Gp or GS keys can always be used to force a trigger The number of samples saved by the tester is a function of the system being tested Normally the trigger point occurs in the center of the data and half of the samples are before the trigger and half are after If you selected a different trigger point during set up using the a function the trigger point sample 0 is near the beginning or end of the samples 7 Once the trigger occurs the tester continues to save data samples until its memory is full The data display indicates that the trigger has occurred by replacing the flashing W with a fixed T As soon as the memory is full the data capture terminates automatically After the data capture terminates the tester briefly displays the cause of the trigger This display can also be seen by pressing G in the Data Display Phase Step 12 RWAL 4WAL systems do not display the cause of trigger 8 Pressing 241 after the trigger has occurred terminate
176. an Electronic Control Unit ECU hydraulic control unit 2 accumulators pump motor and a relay The hydraulic unit consists of an isolation solenoid valve Pulse Width Modulated PWM valve a High Pressure Accumulator HPA Low Pressure Accumulator LPA and a reset switch on each channel If overhaul or repair to any component on the BPMV is necessary replace complete assembly On 1995 C and K series the EHCU consists of the BPMV Electronic Brake Control Module EBCM and combination valve The BPMV consists of internal control cartridges electric motor and pumps Components of the EHCU are individually replaceable 1994 95 S AND T SERIES PICK UP AND SONOMA 1995 BLAZER AND JIMMY The Kelsey Hayes 4 wheel Antilock 4WAL brake system is used to prevent wheel lock up during heavy braking This allows driver to maintain steering control while stopping vehicle in shortest distance possible The system consists of Brake Pressure modulator valve BPMV Vehicle Speed Sensor VSS Vehicle Control Module VCM Wheel Speed Sensors WSS warning lights electrical wiring and hydraulic lines The BPMV consists of a hydraulic control unit 2 accumulators pump motor and a relay The hydraulic control unit consists of an isolation solenoid valve Pulse Width Modulated PWM valve a High Pressure Accumulator HPA Low Pressure Accumulator LPA and a reset switch on each channel If overhaul or repair to any components on the BPMV
177. and test modes within a vehicle multiplexed network Closed Loop Carburetor Control Closed Loop Fuel Column Closed Command Central Multi port Fuel Injection Camshaft Position Control Controller Contacts Catalytic Converter A test where the tester controls some the vehicle s functions Coolant Central Port Injection Cathode Ray Tube Controller Cathode Ray Tube Monitor Central Sequential Fuel Injection Courtesy Relay Control Courtesy Current Constant Variable Road Sensing System Used on 1997 and 1998 E and K body Cycle Delayed Accessory Bus Relay GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 355 D Glossary and Abbreviations Data Line Data List Data Signal Data Parameter DC DCD DCD ABS IH DCD ABS VI DEC DERM DET DETECTN DF DFI DFOG DFRST or DF Diagnostic Codes DIC DIL DIR Discrete Data Parameter Refers to circuit 800 the on board computer communications network Tester operating mode where DLC diagnostic information is displayed A signal sent to or from a computer on a common wire with many other messages A parameter which represents a quantity and is displayed as a value with appropriate units volts C etc Duty Cycle Delco Chassis Division Delco Chassis Division s ABS III system Delco Chassis Division s ABS VI system Decrease or decrement Diagnostic Energy Reserve Module SIR System control module Suppl
178. and the vehicle identification screens test menus and data screens are as described in this manual When this application is used with the MTS 3100 in conjunction with a program card vehicle identification screens test menus diagnostic trouble codes and diagnostic data parameters can be viewed in full screen Enhanced Mode displays Refer to the Enhanced Mode operating instructions in the program card operator s manual for further detail A Note about Tech 1 and Tech 1A Testers The Tech 1 was originally introduced as an OEM scan tool in 1984 The Tech 1 Series A Tech 1A was released in 1989 and is an updated version of the Tech 1 After 19 years of successful distribution Vetronix decided to retire the Tech 1 and Tech 1 A in 2003 This further established the MTS 3100 s foothold in the automotive service industry Please note that while every attempt has been made to ensure the cartridge based software applications work on the Tech 1 and Tech 1A testers Vetronix strongly recommends that Tech 1 and Tech 1A owners update to the MTS 3100 tester Tech 1 and Tech 1A owners now qualify for special discounts on any MTS 3100 tester purchase Please contact our customer support department for program details 800 321 4889 Ext 4 Important Please Read When you are using this manual to diagnose a vehicle take the time to determine the type of tester that you are working with and be sure you are using the correct cables and adapters Doing so m
179. anual Codes indicate a problem with a circuit not just a component and the type of failure Do not replace components based only on DTCs without following the appropriate trouble tree found in the vehicle repair manual The EBCM sets and stores a DTC if it detects a malfunction in the 4WAL brake system Selecting the DTC test checks the EBCM for a stored code If a code is present it is displayed on the scantool DTCs cannot be cleared until the fault is repaired and the ignition NOTES cycled e A DTC that is set in a current ignition cycle does not clear during that same ignition cycle The ignition switch must be cycled to the OFF position for 10 seconds and back ON to clear a DTC in a current ignition cycle To clear DTCs do the following 1 Turn the ignition OFF 2 Connect scantool to DLC Connector 3 Select DTCs from the SELECT MODE menu by pressing 4 Repair Trouble Codes in the order they appear Use the scantool to retrieve DTCs by selecting DTCs from the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 298 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes WAITING FOR DATA Approximately 2 seconds DTC S ABS CODE A007 REAR RELAY CNT CS OPEN FUSE OPEN 3 Seconds or DTC S ABS CODE A048 RF WHEEL SPEED 3 seconds or DTC S CLEAR ABS CODES DTC S CODES CLEARED EXIT FIGURE 5 90 F2 DTCs VSS MONITOR ACTIVE KEYS
180. ark IV ABS TCS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID TST F1 AUTO BLEED MANUAL CONTROL OF ABS SOLENOIDS TURN SOL ON TURN SOL OFF YES TO CONTINUE 4 Seconds or Pkeypress LF HOLD RF HOLD LR HOLD RR HOLD LF RELEASE RF RELEASE LR RELEASE RR RELEASE LF HOLD LF HOLD CMD STATE OFF INHIBITED FRONT WHL SPEEDS FRONT WHL SPEEDS 0 MPH 0 MPH 0 MPH 0 MPH If the solenoid is commanded ON again in less than 30 Seconds LF HOLD CMD STATE ON FRONT WHL SPEEDS 0 MPH 0 MPH FIGURE 5 97 F0 Solenoid Tests ACTIVE KEYS Select SOLENOID TEST Continue with the Solenoid Test Select the solenoid you wish to test Control solenoid ON Control solenoid OFF Return to OBD CONTROLS menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 325 Teves Mark IV ABS TCS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F1 Auto Bleed The Auto Bleed test for the Teves Mark IV System runs through three procedures First the ABS pump motor is energized for a specified amount of time Second the ABS solenoid is energized and third the ABS solenoid is de energized These procedures force any air out of the ABS actuator and into the brake lines When the Auto Bleed Test is completed the brake system must be bled normally at each wheel cylinder or piston as per the repair manual procedure The test normally t
181. atic Stability Regulator AIR Switch AIR System Automatic Transmission Automatic Transfer Case Automatic Battery Voltage GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 354 D Glossary and Abbreviations BARO BATT BCM BFC BILVL BKE BKL BLK BLM BLT Bosch ABS BPMW BPW BST BYP CAG CAL CALIB CAN Capture Data CAR CARB CAT CC C C CCDCIC CCM CCP CEL CELL CFI CHI CH2 Barometric Pressure Battery Body Control Module Body Function Controller Bilevel Brake Enable Relay Brake Light Block Block Learn Multiplier Block Learn Memory Seatbelt T T Bosch s ABS 2U system contained in some GM vehicles Brake Pressure Modulator Valve Blower Pulse Width Boost Bypass Check Gauge T T Calibration Controller Area Network Save information coming from the vehicle Cold Advance Relay California Air Resource Board Catalytic Cruise Control Climate Control and Diagnostic Information Center Central Control Module Climate Control Panel Check Engine Light Cellular as in phone Cross Fire Injection Chime 1 Chime 2 CHG CHK CKT Class 2 CLCC CLF CLM CLSD E CO E a E E NTRL NTRLR NTS or NTCS C OO OC CY EN cO ON Z lt Control Test COOL CPI CRTC CRTM CSFI CSV CTL CNTL CNTRL CTS CURR CVRSS CYCL DAB Oil Change T T Check Circuit GM communication protocol that defines diagnostic data messages
182. ay prevent misuse of application cartridges and incorrect vehicle diagnosis Refer to Chapter 4 for complete information on the correct cables and adapters to use depending on which tester you have and the vehicle you are diagnosing Using This Manual Reading through this manual before putting your MTS 3100 to work introduces you to all of its capabilities and tell you how to use them immediately The application software is designed to reduce time consuming reference to manuals as much as possible Once you are familiar with the software and its operation you ll be able to spend more time diagnosing and less time reading Later if questions arise a quick glance at the flow chart for the test you are performing is probably all you need The flow charts in this manual consist of screen displays enclosed in boxes The displays are arranged in the order in which they appear while using the software Keys on the tester keypad are shown in the manual as white letters in small black boxes At the end of each test mode description there is a list of the active tester keys and their functions in that particular test Note that if you are using the MTS 3100 the display will look different for vehicle selection and data list software Otherwise the diagnostic routines are the same Tech 1 1A displays as those shown in this manual Refer to the MTS 3100 Operator s Manual for examples of MTS 3100 displays Most display screens require input from you suc
183. ays to check component operation If a malfunction is detected the EBCM sets DTC s which are displayed upon completion of the test To perform the Function test do the following 1 Ignition OFF 2 Install scantool 3 Turn ignition to RUN 4 Select OBD CONTROLS from the scantool 5 Press and hold brake pedal to run the Function Test 6 Note any DTCs set Submode F1 History Data History Data displays ABS Stop count and Ignition counts in History Block format with a total of 9 History Blocks Each time the user clears DTCs using the scantool it increments the current History Block erasing the oldest Block Each History Block stores the DTC s related to each GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 276 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL 4 Sensor Hydraulic Antilock Brake System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F2 DTC History DTC History displays DTC information in History Block format with a total of 9 History Blocks Each time the user clears DTCs using the scantool it increments the current History Block erasing the oldest Block Each History block stores the DTC s information as well as ABS Stop count and Ignition counts related to it See Submode F1 History Data for this information The controller can store up to 48 DTCs in each DTC History Block NOTE EH Block 0 always references the current DTC Block Submode F3 Tire Size Calibration Whenever the EBCM is replaced and or the tire size is chang
184. borted 11 When the Auto Bleed procedure is complete the brake pedal should be high and firm If it is not inspect the brake system for faults If after inspection brake pedal travel 1s still excessive repeat the bleed procedure 12 Disconnect tester from the vehicle DLC 13 Reinstall all four tire and wheel assemblies 14 Inspect the brake fluid level 15 Road test the vehicle GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 262 Mode F4 OBD Controls 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 1 BLEED BASE BRAKE SYSTEM NORMALLY 2 FOLLOW SERVICE MANUAL INSTRUCTIONS 3 TURN IGNITION ON 4 TURN THE ENGINE OFF CONNECT REQUIRED EQUIPMENT PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER PUMP BRAKES CONTINUOUSLY PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER LR SECONDARY CIRCUIT BLEED OPEN LR BLEED SCREW STOP PUMPING RELEASE BRAKE PEDAL PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER CLOSE LEFT REAR BLEED SCREW PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE LEFT REAR CIRCUIT COMPLETE PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE Y TEST REPEATS ABOVE SEQUENCE FOR RIGHT REAR CIRCUIT RF SECONDARY CIRCUIT BLEED OPEN RF BLEED SCREW PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE ENTER PUMP BRAKES PUMP BRAKES CONTINUOUSLY RELEASE BRAKE TEST IN PROGRESS PUMP BRAKES PUMP BRAKES CONTINUOUSLY RELEASE BRAKE TEST IN PROGRESS APPLY amp HOLD BRAKE PEDAL FIGURE 5 73 Automated Bleed ACTIVE KEYS Select A
185. brake or correct the cause of the red telltale staying on When the problem is resolved the tester displays the SELECT CHANNEL Menu 5 The tester displays instructions that prepare the vehicle to be tested Follow the instructions displayed by the tester then press to continue GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 227 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 6 After the vehicle is prepared the tester asks you a series of questions and requests that you perform certain actions such as pressing on the brake pedal Answer the questions and confirm that you have performed the actions by pressing the or Qe keys NOTE To help prevent damage to ABS components the tester terminates the Modulator Test if more than 45 seconds elapse between actions 7 After all tests have been performed press zi isis to view the test results The tester tells you whether all components passed if some components failed or if the test results were inconclusive If any components failed or if the tests are inconclusive rerun the Modulator Test to verify the results 8 Press 2B to return to the SELECT TEST menu NOTE When you exit from the Modulator test the tester rehomes the motors and displays a message informing you that the motors have been rehomed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 228 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F0 MANUAL CNTRL
186. cation 1986 2004 Page 210 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MONITOR NORMAL PUMP RUN CYCLE TIME PUMP ON UNTIL PUMP OFF 4 Seconds o PUMP RUN TIMER PUMP RUNNING WAIT FOR PUMP TO STOP PUMP STOPS DEPRESS BRAKE UNTIL PUMP RUNS PUMP OFF PUMP RUNS REMOVE FOOT FROM BRAKE PEDAL PUMP RUNNING XX X PUMP STOPS DEPRESS BRAKE UNTIL PUMP RUNS PUMP OFF REPEAT PUMP RUNS REMOVE FOOT FROM BRAKE PEDAL PUMP RUNNING XX X PUMP STOPS PUMP RUN 1 9 6 SECONDS PUMP RUN 2 12 2 SECONDS FIGURE 5 49 Monitor Normal Pump Run Cycle Test EXIT Terminate test and return to the PUMP MOTOR TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 211 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F1 Monitor Total Pump Run Time This test allows you to monitor the time required to recharge the accumulator from zero psi to maximum system pressure This information comes in two parts 1 The time required to recharge the accumulator from the time the ignition key was turned on K ON until the red BRAKE warning light goes out OK PRESS approximately 1800 psi and 2 The time required to recharge the accumulator from the point at which the red BRAKE warning light goes out OK PRESS until maximum system pressure is reached and the pump turns off approximately 2700 psi This information assists in
187. ccurred just before the trigger occurred FRONT WHL SPEEDS 55 MPH 55 MPH REAR WHL SPEED 55 MPH 55 More Data Samples FRONT WHL SPEEDS 55 MPH 56 MPH REAR WHL SPEED 56 MPH 56 VEHICLE SPEED ABS BATT VOLTA More Data Parameters FRONT WHL SPEEDS More Data Samples Trigger Position Data Sample that occurred just after the trigger occurred 56 MPH 56 MPH REAR WHL SPEED 56 MPH 56 More Data Samples after the trigger FIGURE 5 7 Snapshot Data Display Phase 13 While in the data display phase pressing GZ causes the tester to toggle between the sample index and sample time FRONT WHL SPEEDS 55MPH 55 REAR WHL SPEEDS 55MPH 55 84 ENTER FRONT WHL SPEEDS 55 MPH 55 REAR WHL SPEEDS 55MPH 8 74 The sample time display gives the time in seconds relative to the trigger sample at which the tester received the currently displayed sample For example a sample time of 8 74 means the sample was received 8 74 seconds after the trigger sample A sample time of 2 71 seconds means the sample was received 2 71 seconds before the trigger GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 125 Mode F3 Snapshot 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 14 The current sample displayed may be printed if the tester is connected to a printer To print the data press a The tester keyboard is disabled while printing the data SNAPSHOT data can also be printed in a tabular format us
188. ce shift quality cruise control speedometer odometer engine control electronic transfer case or ABS operational problems if the calibrator is not properly calibrated Only predetermined tire sizes can be selected The arrow keys scroll the available tire size options Three tire sizes appear at a time with the gt symbol indicating the current selected size Once the proper size is selected press GO to program the new tire size in the VSS Tire size calibration is only used on vehicles with a Kelsey Hayes three sensor 4WAL ABS system utilizing a VSS circuit If the following message is displayed when reading tire size try programming the correct tire size from the available list NOTE UNABLE TO RECOGNIZE TIRE SIZE IN THIS VERSION GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 304 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes VEHICLE TYPE 5TH DIGIT OF VIN F0 C K G P S T M L F0 READ TIRE CAL F1 NEW TIRE SIZE SELECT NEW TIRE F0 P225 75R15 F1 P215 75R15 LT215 75R15 SELECT NEW TIRE y P195 75R15 F5 205 75R14 205 75R15 SELECT NEW TIRE Y P215 65R15 F8 LT215 85R16 MORE SELECT NEW TIRE Y 225 70R19 5 P235 65R15 LT225 75R16 SELECT NEW TIRE y F3 P235 75R15 F4 LT235 75R15 F5 LT235 85R16 SELECT NEW TIRE Ay F7 P245 50RV16 F8 P245 60R15 F9 MORE UNABLE TO RECOGNIZ
189. cting and Operating Test Modes Submode F1 Pump Motor This function allows you to command the ABS pump motor on and off Once the pump has been commanded ON the EBCM automatically turns it off to avoid damage to the pump motor If the pump is commanded ON again the ECBM may refuse to actuate the pump again until a cooling off period has elapsed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 130 Vehicles with Bosch ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes BOSCH ABS SUSPENSION STEERING SYSTEMS VEHICLES WITH BOSCH ABS If you are testing a 1990 94 VIN B D E K or Y without ASR or TCS vehicle the following message is displayed until you install the adapter or press 22489 DATA LIST MODE INSTALL BOSCH ABS ADAPTER The following Bosch ABS Systems require the 12 12 Pin Bosch Adapter MODEL YEAR 12 12 PIN BOSCH ADAPTER REQUIRED 1990 D Y Cars 1991 B D E K Y Cars 1992 B D E K Cars 1993 B Cars E K Cars without TCS 1994 B D E K Y without TCS IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR BOSCH SYSTEMS When testing vehicles equipped with Bosch ABS systems B C D E K Y or V bodies the vehicle s ignition switch must be turned OFF after performing ABS testing disconnecting the tester and before the vehicle is driven ABS braking is not available until after the ignition is cycled Also the Service ABS indicator may be illuminated during testing BOSCH 2S MICRO ABS ASR SYSTEM
190. current to act against the EMBs If an EMB is not able to properly hold the motor the brake pedal moves F4 MOTOR PACK TEST Once the motor pack has been separated from the ABS hydraulic modulator the Motor test guides you through an automated ABS Motor Pack test F5 GEAR TENSION RELIEF Gear Tension Relief allows you to relieve tension from the motor gears in order to allow the motor pack to be separated from the modulator assembly F6 RELAY TEST UART Only This test allows you to test the Enable Relay while displaying the ABS relay battery voltage This allows verification of relay operation F7 VOLTAGE LOAD TEST or MOTOR TEST The Voltage Load test allows you to check the battery for adequate capacity for ABS operation Appropriate messages are displayed that indicate any required area of service F8 LAMP TEST Allows manual control of ABS amber warning lamp circuit red brake telltale circuit and amber ABS Active or TCS lamp if equipped GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 223 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes F9 ABS VERSION or SYSTEM ID The ABS or TCS Version function displays data about the vehicle s ABS Controller The submodes listed above are described in the following submode section Submode F0 Manual Control The Manual Control functions allow you to manually control each motor EMB and solenoid for component diagnosis The enable relay can also be controlled You can turn the so
191. d Scroll down through menu or deactivate selected solenoid Continue test Return to the previous screen or menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 191 Bosch 8 0 ABS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F1 Auto Bleed The Auto Bleed procedure is used to provide a complete brake system bleed for the 4 channel Bosch 8 0 ABS system The Auto Bleed procedure cycles the system valves and runs the ABS pump to purge air from all secondary circuits that are normally closed off during non ABS mode operations and base brake system bleeding The Auto Bleed test should be used when it is suspected that air has been introduced into the system s secondary circuits or when the ABS actuator assembly has been replaced or serviced Refer to the appropriate vehicle service manual for specific bleeding procedures GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 192 Bosch 8 0 ABS System Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT CONTROL F0 Solenoid Test F1 Auto Bleed Connect required braked bleed equipment Follow oo Service Manual Instructions ENTER eo Raise and support vehicle eo Check battery voltage and engine off Turn ign on Press ENTER to continue ENTER Open LF bleed screw Pump break pedal continuously e Press ENTER to continue ENTER Test in Progress Seconds Remaining XXX Close LF bleed screw Open RF bleed screw
192. d Only the state of the brake switch is known the brake pedal may have simply been depressed or shorted without any vehicle deceleration The second screen of information about the last failure displays the status of the brake telltale at the time of the fault ON or OFF and whether or not the brake had been depressed this ignition cycle If the brake switch circuit was OPEN no brake input is seen Also many drivers do not depress the brake when starting the car but do prior to putting the car in gear If no brake input was seen prior to the fault and the brake switch circuit is OK this information tells you the fault was probably detected shortly after the ignition switch was turned on Also on the second screen is whether or not the vehicle has been driven at a speed greater than 25 MPH during this 1gnition cycle and whether or not an ABS stop was in progress when the fault occurred This may point to a fault caused by additional stresses or vibration the vehicle encountered when in an ABS stop The third screen tells the code set and how many drive cycles since this code set Drive Cycles A drive cycle occurs when the ignition is turned ON and the vehicle is driven faster than 10 MPH However if a current code is set a drive cycle occurs counter increment for that code even if 10 MPH is not reached prior to turning off the ignition GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 220 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating T
193. d before the wheel cylinders and calipers Refer to Service Manual for step by step procedures LEFT INTERNAL 7 BLEED SCREW 1 OF 2 HPA BLEED VALVE GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 303 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F3 Tire Size Calibration The Tire Size Calibration option has two sub functions Read Tire Calibration and New Tire Size The Read Tire Calibration allows you to read the tire size calibration stored in the Vehicle Speed Sensor Calibrator VSS The New Tire Size Calibration allows you to program a New Tire Size into the Vehicle Speed Sensor Calibrator Depending on the application the Vehicle Speed Sensor Calibrator is mounted either on the parking brake pedal bracket G Van behind the glove box L Van C K Series and S Series Truck or next to the radio M L Van The VSS Calibrator e Converts the Vehicle Speed Sensor AC sine wave analog signal to a DC square wave digital signal e Adjusts the Vehicle Speed Sensor frequency to compensate for tire size and rear axle ratio options The EBCM uses the VSS calibrations processed signal to calculate rear wheel speed If different sized tires or axle gear ratios are installed the VSS calibrator NOTE must be replaced or reprogrammed depending on model Since the calibrator is an input to the vehicle s electronic system the customer may EH noti
194. d of line two in the trouble code display indicates the code is a current code History codes are not read during SNAPSHOT mode This function is not available with the Bosch ABS due to the fact that for this system trouble codes cannot be set during diagnostics The trouble code display can be frozen by pressing the key then unfrozen by pressing the key 1 Use the GP and keys to select the desired sample An index is displayed in the lower right hand corner of the tester display Sample 0 corresponds to the trigger sample sample 1 is the sample immediately preceding the trigger sample 1 is immediately after the trigger and so on The index range may be less than the maximum number of samples if not enough time was allowed for data capture before or after the trigger You can advance directly to the first last or trigger sample with the press of a button F4 Display first earliest sample F5 Display trigger sample 0 F6 Display last most recent sample 12 Pressing a allows you to determine what caused the SNAPSHOT trigger to occur For example if you selected the Automatic Trigger option pressing G might result in the following display SNAPSHOT TRIGGER OCCURED ON INTERMITTENT WHEEL SPEED GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 124 Mode F3 Snapshot 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes More Data Samples before the trigger Data Sample that o
195. damper solenoid manually for diagnostics Once selected more options are provided to allow selection of one of 4 dampers or cycle all dampers at once Select a damper and follow instructions on the screen of the tester SELECT DAMPER F0 LF DAMPER F1 RF DAMPER F2 LR DAMPER F3 RR DAMPER F4 CYCLE ALL FIGURE 5 41 Manual Control of Damper Solenoids Submode F1 System ID Select this RTD mode to get RTD module information RTD CONTROLLER and EEPROM ID information are displayed when selected The RTD CALIBRATE is made available when testing 1996 Y body vehicles equipped with Real Time Damping This function is to be used only when the RTD module has been replaced with a new factory unit The mode is only available on convertible Corvettes GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 194 Bosch RTD Real Time Damping System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes To calibrate RTD do the following 1 Press from the SELECT SYSTEM menu screen after selecting a 1996 Y Car 2 Select the RTD CALIBRATE option by pressing and follow the instructions on the screen After vehicle selection 1996 Y car the following SELECT SYSTEM screen is displayed SELECT SYSTEM F0 ABS TCS F1 RTD DIAG F2 RTD CALIBRATE NOTE A Refer to the service manual for information on when to use this function FUNCTION F2 RTD CALIBRATE After replacing any component of the Real Time Damping system a calibration should be performed
196. der from the rest of the system The TCS Prime valves open to allow the pump to get brake fluid to build pressure for braking The drive wheel circuit solenoids are energized as needed to allow for pressure hold pressure increase or pressure decrease STABILITRAK OPERATION ICCS2 AND ICCS3 Stabilitrak includes an additional level of control to the EBTCM Stabilitrak monitors the wheel speeds lateral acceleration and steering sensor inputs to calculate a desired yaw rate and compare it to the actual yaw rate reported by the Yaw Rate Sensor Steering maneuvers can cause the desired yaw rate to differ from the reported yaw rate by some amount This difference can result from tire compliance and wheel slip Stabilitrak tries to bring these yaw rates into agreement by selectively applying the front wheel brakes This is known as Active Brake Control ABC If wheel slip rates are excessive traction control may activate to reduce power GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 265 Mode FO Data List 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes The following are two types of Stabilitrak These are ICCS2 and ICCS3 The ICCS2 uses normal force information from the CVRSS module to detect rough road conditions to help enhance vehicle braking The ICCS3 does not use normal force information from the CRVSS module to detect rough road conditions to help enhance vehicle braking ICCS3 is used on vehicles that are not equipped with CVRSS MODE F0 DA
197. des SUBMODE LAMP TEST The Lamp test allows you to manually control up to five ABS Lamps for diagnostic purposes Different vehicles allow control of different Lamps The tester displays the list of Lamps for the vehicle you are testing To select Lamp Test do the following SELECT TEST 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing F3 TCS TEST F5 MAGNASTEER TEST 2 Select the LAMP Test 3 The tester display confirms that you are in the ABS Lamp Test The display automatically scrolls after four seconds or when you press the key SELECT LAMP 4 A Select Lamp menu is displayed Press the key G GD G3 PEDEM G9 G that corresponds to the Lamp you want to test Use the F2 TRACTION and keys to turn the Lamp ON and OFF or flash The commanded state of the Lamp is displayed on line 5 Press CX to return to the SELECT LAMP menu or press GA twice to return to the SELECT TEST menu SELECT LAMP F3 SERVICE STBLT F4 STABILITY 4 Seconds or keypress ABS LAMP COMMAND ON As ON y OFF ABS LAMP COMMAND OFF A ON OFF FIGURE 5 78 Lamp Test ACTIVE KEYS GD D GO Select the Lamp you want to test from the Select Lamp menu Gi Gi Turn the selected Lamp ON Turn the selected Lamp OFF Return to the SELECT LAMP menu Press twice to return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 274 Mode F4 OBD Controls 5 Selecting and Operating Test
198. des DTC and perform interactive tests on electronic suspension control systems such as Electronic Level Control ELC Road Sensing Suspension RSS Real Time Dampening RTD and Select Ride Control SEL Integrated Chassis Control System ICCS and Active Handling AH GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 3 GM Chassis Systems 1 GM Chassis Application Description TIRE INFLATION MONITORING SYSTEM TIM Tire Inflation Monitoring TIM System found on newer vehicles equipped with Delco VI ABS systems detects the differences in tire rotation speeds that are caused by changes in tire pressure It may not alert the driver if the pressure in more than one tire is high or low It also may not operate properly if the spare tire 1s In use The TIM system can alert the driver when a large change in the pressure of one tire exists The system only detects a low pressure condition while the vehicle is being driven The check tire pressure or low tire pressure indicator light turns on in the instrument cluster if the tire pressure in one tire becomes 12 psi 55 kPa lower or higher than the other three tires and the ignition switch is on the ON position The message does not appear if more than one tire is low or high or if the system is not calibrated properly The system does not inform the driver which tire is low TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPM The Tire Pressure Monitor TPM system warns the driver when a significant los
199. des from memory Print a copy of the codes or write the codes down for comparison to the codes displayed when testing is resumed 3 Disconnect the tester from the cigarette lighter plug or the battery terminal adapter 4 Disconnect the cables and adapters from the vehicle s DLC You may want to inspect the cable connector and cigarette lighter for any damage or corrosion 5 Store all hardware components in the tester storage case If the tester becomes dirty clean it by wiping it with a rag dampened with mild detergent or hand soap Avoid using harsh petroleum based cleaning solvents such as acetone benzene and trichloroethylene as they may damage the tester Although the tester is water resistant it is not waterproof so be sure to thoroughly dry off the tester prior to storage Do not submerge the tester in water NOTE GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 330 A ABS COMMUNICATION This appendix discusses the communications between electronic components within GM vehicles as they relate to the Antilock Brake Systems The purpose of this discussion is to give you additional insight into the system in order to aid in the intuitive approach to trouble shooting The ABS systems supported by this cartridge contain one or more components connected to a Serial Data Link SDL The SDL provides two functions for the vehicle It provides a means of sharing data between components for normal operation of the vehicle I
200. driven while these diagnostic data parameters are being displayed Intermittent analog signals can be monitored to determine if the signal varies Input output parameter status is also displayed Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F2 DTCS Trouble codes are stored in the ECU memory and can be displayed in the scantool In addition to the DTC number a brief description of the DTC can be displayed DTCs can also be cleared from ECU memory Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The ABS snapshot helps isolate problems of intermittent operation Information is captured before and after a trigger condition The manual and automatic trigger can be selected You will also be allowed to review a stored snapshot from this menu Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS Submode FO Solenoid Test The solenoid tests allow you to manually actuate each of the hydraulic control valves You can select between the actuation of the dump and isolation valves for each ABS channel Once a solenoid has been commanded ON the EBCM automatically turns it off after about 3 seconds to avoid damage to the solenoid If the solenoid is commanded ON again the ECBM may refuse to actuate the solenoid again until a cooling off period has elapsed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 129 ADVICS ABS TCS System 5 Sele
201. e press to return to the Select ABS Test menu Check the tester and DLC cable connections then press Gj to try to perform the Manual Control test again 5 The function selection menu displays all of the functions which you can control in this test along with the function key GU GE to press to select this function Note that the top row of function keys Ca GJ control tests for the Left Front functions The next row of function keys G9 control the same functions for the Right Front wheel Rear wheel components are controlled by function keys on the bottom row SCH and a Also the selection is arranged so the first key in a row controls motor apply the second key controls motor release the third key controls solenoids and the fourth key controls EMB Release MOTOR MOTOR APPLY RELEASE SE m LF FO Fl F2 F3 LF APPLY LF RELEASE LF SOLENOID LF EMB RF F4 F5 F6 F7 RF APPLY RF RELEASE RF SOLENOID RF EMB F8 F9 REAR REAR APPLY REAR RELEASE GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 224 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes NOTE Selections GA G3 GA GA and G do not apply to vehicles with Traction Control 6 Once you have selected a function to test use the key to turn function ON and the key to turn function OFF Pressing OG toggles the enable relay ON and OFF If you are testing a 1991 N body the following message is displayed the first tim
202. e Causes Two master cartridges are installed Master cartridge is malfunctioning Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Unplug connector from cigarette lighter and plug it back in Make sure that only one master cartridge is installed in the tester Remove all cartridges and see if MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING message is displayed If it is try installing another master cartridge MASTER CARTRIDGE MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING MASTER CARTRIDGE IS MISSING OR MALFUNCTIONING Most Likely Cause Master cartridge is not installed Other Possible Causes Dirty contacts on the master cartridge connector Master cartridge is malfunctioning Recommendations e Verify that a master cartridge is installed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 333 Wrong Display after Power Applied B If You re Having a Problem Clean contacts on master cartridge connector with methyl wood alcohol Try a different master cartridge WRONG DISPLAY AFTER POWER APPLIED Most Likely Cause Wrong master cartridge is installed Other Possible Causes Master cartridge is malfunctioning Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations e Verify that GM 86 00 CHASSIS Cartridge Ver 3 0 is installed in the bottom slot of the tester and that there isn t a master cartridge e g ALL 81 86 ECM in the top slot Try another cartridge Remove the master car
203. e Configurations 4 Getting Started Application Chart section at the beginning of this chapter Read the following sections that describe how to select an adapter for use with the vehicle you are testing ABS CHASSIS ADAPTERS Below is a table listing the adapters needed for use with the GM Chassis Application software Refer to the remainder of this section for appropriate adapter selection and usage CHASSIS ADAPTERS NEEDED ADAPTER DESCRIPTION P N ILLUSTRATION GM 12 14 Pin Used on most GM vehicle 12 pin DLCs 02001384 Adapter prior to 1996 RWAL AWAL Used on most RWAL AWAL ABS 02001579 Adapter systems with UART communication protocol 16 14 Pin OBD Used for vehicles with 16 pin DLC 02001969 Adapter Cable configuration from1994 to present Controller Area Used for vehicles with 16 pin DLC VIM Network VIM configuration from 1994 to present 02003211 or F 00K 108 115 16 24 Pin DLC Adapter Cable Cable 02001744 16 12 Pin Non Used for vehicles with the 16 pin DCL 02001575 OBD II Adapter configuration specifically designed to be used with RWAL 4WAL Adapter 12 12 Pin Bosch Used on most Bosch ABS systems prior 02001033 ABS Adapter to 1995 TABLE 4 1 Chassis Adapters Needed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 81 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started NOTE To purchase any Vetronix items mentioned in this manual please call A 800 321 4VTX
204. e codes such as brake light switch data ABS state vehicle speed and ignition cycles This information can be displayed using the ENHANCED DIAGNOSTIC DATA function This indicates the brake switch status to determine if brake switch was ON or OFF when trouble code was set The ABS state indicates if antilock brake mode was active when trouble code was set The vehicle speed at the time trouble code was set can be displayed Ignition cycles are displayed to indicate how many ignition cycles occurred since trouble code was set GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 169 Bosch 5 0 ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes See Mode F2 DTC s on page 113 for more information MODE F3 ABS SNAPSHOT The ABS snapshot helps isolate problems of intermittent ABS operation caused by wheel speed sensor signals Information is captured before and after a trigger condition The manual and automatic trigger can be selected See Mode F3 Snapshot on page 117 for more information MODE F4 MISC TESTS 1995 96 B E K BODY MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS 1995 96 D BODY 1996 Y BODY In this mode the ABS test mode performs function tests on ABS system used to verify proper system operation Testing and observing test results can further identify error conditions The following tests can be performed in this mode FO Solenoid Test Fl Auto Test F2 Lamp Test F3 TCS Test F4 Auto Bleed The submodes listed above are descr
205. e codes which are present in the ABS controller and displays information on the most likely cause of the codes This information is displayed immediately after the ABS code display has been completed See Figure 5 43 ABS CODE DISPLAY ABS ISOLATION ABS ISOLATION ABS ISOLATION MULTIPLE ABS POSSIBLE SOURCE CONSULT SERVICE DIAGNOSTIC OF FAULT S MANUAL FOR FAULT TROUBLE CODES CONFIRMATION ABS ISOLATION ABS ISOLATION TROUBLE CODES ABS CODES 4 5 7 CODES 32 33 56 CLEAR ABS CODES OPEN 10 WAY OPEN BRAKE SW CONNECTOR FUSE CIRCUITRY FIGURE 5 43 ABS Fault Isolation Example Delco Moraine ABS III GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 199 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Code Clearing 4 After all trouble codes and ABS fault messages have been displayed the scantool prompts you to CLEAR CODES If you press K9 you leave the TROUBLE CODE mode If you press the scantool asks you to clear IPC or ABS codes 5 If you want to clear the IPC trouble codes press in response to the message CLEAR IPC CODES The scantool then responds with either IPC CODES CLR D or CODE CLEAR FAIL The scantool displays this message for 3 seconds and then prompts you to clear ABS codes if the up option ABS is installed After you have been given the option to clear all codes the scantool display returns to the SELECT MODE display 6 If the CODE CLEAR FAIL message is d
206. e parameters display the state of the reset switches SOFT FAULTS 4WAL YES NO The Soft Faults parameter displays YES if any Soft Fault Codes are available for display This parameter is only available for vehicles with 4 wheel speed sensors It is not available if the vehicle only has 3 wheel speed sensors TROUBLE CODES 4WAL YES NO The Trouble Codes parameter displays YES if any RWAL trouble codes are stored in the ABS ECU VALVE RESET VCM RWAL OPEN CLOSED The Valve Reset parameter displays the state of the valve reset GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 350 VES C Data List Parameters VEHICLE SPEED VCM RWAL MPH or KPH 0 to 255 The Vehicle Speed parameter displays the vehicle speed in MPH or in KPH VES FEEDBACK CURRENT mA 0 to 833 The Feedback Current parameter displays the actual current at the VES Solenoid as measured by the CCM STEERING WHL SNR UNITS RANGE COUNTS 0 to 255 VOLTS 0 to 5 1 The Steering Wheel Sensor Input parameter displays the position of the steering wheel and is used to determine the desired amount of power steering assist VEHICLE SPEED MPH 0 to 255 The Vehicle Speed parameter displays the vehicle speed in MPH RTD EVO BATTERY VOLTAGE SIGNAL VOLTS 10 0 to 16 0 Battery voltage seen by the suspension control module COMPRESSOR SIGNAL IF EQUIPPED ON OFF The state of the compressor motor relay GM C
207. e test do the following 1 Press F4 OBD Controls from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Press F0 RTD Controls from the SELECT SYSTEM menu 3 Press F1 Compressor from the SELECT CONTROL menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 308 F4 OBD Controls 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 4 Press the Up Arrow key to turn the Compressor ON 5 Press the Down Arrow key to turn the Compressor OFF GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 309 Teves Mark Il ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes TEVES MARK ABS SYSTEMS TEVES MARK II ABS The Teves Mark II antilock brake system was introduced on GM vehicles starting in 1986 and continued production through 1991 During the Teves Mark II production life two different systems were produced The first Teves Mark II ABS system started production in 1986 and was NOT equipped with ABS diagnostic codes ABS diagnostics for this system requires 7 seven different lamp sequence checks and a Lamp Sequence Chart along with the vehicle service manual to pinpoint the ABS failure The first Teves Mark II ABS system has a red BRAKE warning lamp and an amber ANTILOCK indicator lamp on the instrument panel The lamps light in various combinations to indicate normal and abnormal brake system conditions The first Teves Mark II ABS system includes the following models 1986 1990 Pontiac A Body 1986 1988 C H body The second Teves Mark II ABS system started production in 1988 and
208. e test then automatically cycle each solenoid and pump motor 6 The tester informs you when the test is completed and displays trouble codes that were stored during the test 7 Press Qp to return to the OBD CONTROLS menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 173 Bosch 5 0 ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TEST F5 TP SENSR LRN SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID TST F1 AUTO TEST F2 LAMP TEST AUTOMATICALLY CYCLES EACH SOL AND PUMP MOTOR ENTER TO START AUTOMATIC TEST RUNNING Approx 7 Seconds ENTER AUTOMATIC TEST AUTOMATIC TEST COMPLETE CODES STORED 35 61 INITIALIZING TST Less than 1 Second EXIT FIGURE 5 30 Automatic Test Example ACTIVE KEYS Ga Select AUTO TEST from OBD CONTROLS menu ENTER Start the Bosch Automatic solenoid and pump motor tests EXIT Return to OBD CONTROLS selection menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 174 Bosch 5 0 ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F2 Lamp Test This test is available for all 1996 Y Cars and 1995 96 D E K and V Cars The Lamp Test mode allows you to control certain lamps ON and OFF with the tester in order to determine the operational status of the lamp s circuit switch and bulb To select Lamp Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS from the Select
209. e you press GON Drive the vehicle and then stop it to initialize the ABS system DRIVE VEHICLE ALL FOUR WHEELS MUST BE gt 4 MPH AT THE SAME TIME 7 To select a different function to test you can either press C48 to return to the FUNCTION SELECT menu to choose a different test or just press the function key for the test you want to perform NOTE Some vehicles equipped with DELCO ABS VI do not use Electromagnetic Brakes EMBs Therefore the F3 and F7 functions are not available for these vehicles and are not shown in the Function Selection menu 8 Press CX to return to the Manual Control test menu Press 24g again to display the Select Test menu NOTE When you exit from the Manual Control test the tester rehomes the motors EH and displays a message informing you that the motors have been rehomed ACTIVE KEYS Select MANUAL CONTROL test Select function to control Turn function ON Turn function OFF Turn enable relay ON and OFF Continue Manual Control test Return to SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 225 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F0 MANUAL CNTRL F1 MODULATOR F2 HYDRL CNTRL MANUAL CONTROL OF ENABLE RELAY EMB SOLENOIDS AND MOTORS TURN ON TURN OFF ENTER RLY ON OFF YES TO CONTINUE Select Function Menu ENTER 4 Seconds or keypress MAN SOL TE
210. ebedaiddgraceade da 6 Install Remove Cartridges with Tester OFF chi cad eae dae need can IER cad ERE ERE RS 6 Ay Pa EP ZE Aere bis ee PA ASAE 6 Protect SHON PG na dsecencandendandsaanadeadnan ERE ERGO ben NO DN qe quis 6 PRECAUTIONS FOR GM CHASSIS APPLICATION 0 2 eee eee eee 7 Lora DORME Ah e deck pd pd d due idi eade tas mida Ed 7 Check Jester induced DICS EA EE AE AE edd EXPE PE AM KANN EE 7 B TEHICLE EE ak Saco de ah oA ol 8 VEHICLE n EE 8 1986 Vehicle Coverage 4544546804284 2540405 dE EE dE AN AE A CHE CH UP E RR HR EE EEN EE En att dE Eeer eh Puditu e d 9 1958 Vehicle COVPEBO EE LURRARRXARZARAXR RARINARRERZVA PARES K A 10 T939 VERE COREE Add ddl addi n d dad dad dpud mh da ped dadas 12 1990 Vehicle COMPARE Susa sss RA 4b RRASATXATAXRENRRANTARRERTENEZUNAZCAINA RA 14 NEE 17 1992 Vehicle COVEFUDE sessukRASR 405 EE AA EE LER YR ROUGE URNA NR RES 20 P993 IPIE EEN Au 4 TRA RA RARE RARE COR Sa RO Me gg 23 1994 Vehicle COVEMEDO Su RE RR RENS EA EE EA RER EE 28 EEN sagqqu indes dieat qan qaudiaqeu qu eu ad EE Ed C ad dud 32 1996 Vehicle COVEFEBE sossaksuak E45 CU GU XAR XAR XARGUGGGARGNR EE BORE EEN 37 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 TOC i JO IBID A au ag we doen Ee g Els Ede Fae xag ded qee get e 41 T998 Vehicle Coverage 6466426 295488 danian IoP AE EAR AG 45 1999 PUR ee AER anre ndr dA bead us dea d ead cade Wa e am da Vd Rd ERR 49 2000 Police OVEREUE dee PAR UA ERRA DOLD ERE ARIA A Ad d deis 53 E uibus vele eA
211. ed it is necessary to reset the tire size calibration in the EBCM using the scantool For the ABS to work properly the EBCM must be calibrated to recognize the tire and wheel size All vehicles are programmed at the factory with these calibrations and remain programmed even if the battery is disconnected or the EBCM is removed from the vehicle Submode F4 Trim Calibration The trim level calibration corresponds to the different wheelbase and brake types available on each vehicle Whenever the EBCM is replaced and or the wheelbase 1s altered the EBCM must be programmed with the new trim level calibration using the scantool It is necessary to determine the wheel base and type of brakes through the RPO codes to select the correct rim level on the scantool For the ABS to work properly the EBCM must be calibrated to recognize the wheelbase and brake type of the various possible vehicle configurations All vehicles are programmed at the factory with these calibrations and remains programmed even if the battery is disconnected or the EBCM is removed from the vehicle GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 277 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL 4 Sensor Electric Hydraulic Parking Brake 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes KELSEY HAYES 4WAL 4 SENSOR ELECTRIC HYDRAULIC PARKING BRAKE The PBCM Performs self diagnostics and can detect and isolate some system faults When a fault is detected the PBCM sets a diagnostic trouble code and turns on the SERVICE PARK
212. eel STEERING WHEEL RATE RPM 0 to 667 The speed at which the steering wheel is being turned VEHICLE SPEED KPH 0 to 193 MPH 0 to 120 The vehicle speed sent to the suspension control module from the PCM GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 353 D GLOSSARY AND ABBREVIATIONS This appendix contains terms and abbreviations found in the General Motors body chassis and powertrain manuals 14L 1ST 2AR 2FP ZU 2ND 2PT 328 3RD 4TH 4WAL ABS A C or AC ACL ACCEL ACM ACO ACT A D ADVICS Skipshift 1 4 Shift Light First Gear Secondary Air Injection Reaction Secondary Fuel Pump Secondary Injector Module Second Gear Secondary Port Throttle 3 2 Solenoid Third Gear Fourth Gear Four Wheel Anti lock Brake System Anti lock Brake System Air Conditioning Low A C Lamp Accelerometer or Acceleration Heater and A C Programmer AIR Control Actual Analog to Digital Manufacturer of ABS systems AFECU AIR ALDL ALS ALT AMB Analog Data Parameter ANLG ARMD A S ASR ASW ASY A T ATC AUTO AUT Bt Alternate Fuel Engine Control Unit Air Injection Reaction Assembly line Diagnostic Link In 1993 the name was changed to Data Link Connector Ambient Light Sensor Alternator Ambient A parameter which represents a quantity and is displayed as a value with appropriate units volts C etc Analog Armed AIR Solenoid Acceleration Slip Regulation Autom
213. el Speed 51 MPH Wheel Speed 51 MPH Example of Snapshot with Multiple Data Lists GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 121 Mode F3 Snapshot 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SNAPSHOT SET UP PHASE To select a trigger condition press the function key to the left of the desired trigger condition To bypass the Data Capture phase and review previously captured data press REPLAY DATA F5 SOFT FAULT and F6 ABS STOP are only available for 4WAL systems SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST SET UP F1 CODE HISTORY F2 TROUBLE CODE PHASE F3 SNAPSHOT F4 ABS TESTS IF BOSCH ABS TCS V BODY SNAPSHOT OPTIONS F0 DIAGNOSTIC F1 NORMAL MODE SELECT TRIGGER POINT REPLAY PREVIOUSLY CAPTURED DATA FRONT WHL SPEEDS SNAPSHOT OPTIONS TRIGGER POINT AT 55MPH 56 MPH REPLAY DATA F0 BEGINNING REAR WHL SPEEDS MANUAL TRIG F1 CENTER or 55MPH 56 0 AUTO TRIG F2 END of data ANY CODE SINGLE CODE SOFT FAULT ABS STOP TRIG POINT SNAPSHOT MODE ENTER ABS CODE A0 Code then ENTER FRONT WHL SPEEDS DATA 55MPH 56 MPH CAPTURE REAR WHL SPEEDS PHASE 55MPH 56 W More Data Parameters FIGURE 5 5 Snapshot Set up Phase GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 122 Mode F3 Snapshot 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes To select Data Capture phase do the following 5 Once the trigger condition is specified the tester begins storing data par
214. elco Moraine III UART GM ABS 1989 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SES TYPE CONFIG 6000 STE A Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS 6000 STE AWD A Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Bonneville H Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Bonneville SSE H Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Grand Prix W Delco Moraine III UART GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 13 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1989 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MOREE 5TH DIGIT SE TYPE CONFIG C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL S T Truck S T Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL 1990 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1990 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SISTEM TYPE CONFIG Electra Park Avenue C Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Riviera E Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Reatta E Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Regal W Delco Moraine III UART GM ABS 1990 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT PEDTEM TYPE CONFIG DeVille Fleetwood C Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Brougham D Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Eldorado E Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Seville K Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Page 14 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1990 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS
215. em MODE F0 DATA LIST The purpose of DATA LIST mode is to continuously monitor diagnostic data parameters for all supported chassis systems The tester displays data parameters in pairs You can view the data pairs as displayed when entering Data List or create your own display pairs See Create Your Own Data Pairs on page 112 The tester display tells you in plain English which parameters are being monitored The current value of the parameter is displayed with the parameter units This means you don t have to hunt through manuals to determine what is being displayed Appendix C contains a description of a sample of Data List parameters for ABS Systems To select Data List do the following 1 Press af to select DATA LIST mode from the Select Mode menu 2 Select the data parameters to be displayed by scrolling through the parameters with the and Q9 keys If you hold either key down the tester scrolls through all of the parameter pairs in sequence LA Pressing a while in the DATA LIST mode allows one sample of all data parameters to be printed if connected to a VP 411 VP 414 or Tech 1 printer NOTE If using a Tech 1 the RS232 cartridge and serial printer must be connected to the tester when the G key is pressed A If communication with the component being tested 1s lost the tester informs you The tester attempts to reestablish communications If the attempt is successful the tester returns to the Data Li
216. eparate power circuits for ABS ignition and battery If only one of these two inputs drops below 10 volts during testing a high resistance may be present in that power feed circuit Submode F6 Motor Rehome The motor rehome function returns all of the hydraulic modulator pistons to their up most home position This allows all fluid paths within the modulator to be open so that the modulator can be properly bled The motor rehome function must ALWAYS be used prior to bleeding the brake system NOTE The motor rehome function cannot be performed if any current DTCs are present the vehicle must be repaired and DTCs cleared before performing the motor rehome function Submode F8 System ID This feature allows you to identify the ABS system the ABS version Electronic Brake Control Module EBCM manufacturing and calibration information without having to access or remove the EBCM GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 255 Delco ABS VI Class 2 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes System selection is not available for printing using the F8 PRINT function However Print Screen mode is available NOTE The software ID is not related to a PROM version in the ABS controller The ABS controller has NO SERVICEABLE OR REMOVABLE prom EB The ID and sequence number are for controller identification purposes only To select System ID do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing GE 2 Press to select
217. er instructs you to press the amp B key to clear all ride control trouble codes 4 Press CAD to return to the SELECT SYSTEM menu SELECT SYSTEM F0 ABS F1 SELECT RIDE SELECT MODE F0 FLASH CODES F1 CLEAR CODES WATCH SERVICE RIDE CONTROL CLEAR CODES PRESS 4 FIGURE 5 26 F1 Clear Codes ACTIVE KEYS Ga Choose SELECT RIDE Control system Select CLEAR CODES Select FLASH CODES mode CLEAR CODES Return to the SELECT SYSTEM menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 164 Bosch 2U RSS ELC System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes BOSCH 2U RSS ELC SYSTEM After replacement of the Road Sensing Suspension RSS control module the following steps must be performed e RSS control module calibration Steering sensor trim position adjustment Trim height adjustment NOTE New RSS control modules must be calibrated after installation A code S050 or S051 may be stored in memory of new RSS control modules and does not clear until the module is calibrated MODE F0 RSS CALIBRATE To calibrate the RSS Control Module do the following 1 Select RSS Calibrate by pressing a 2 Key ON engine OFF 3 Follow user instructions on scantool screen 4 After calibrating RSS control module a trim height adjustment procedure and a steering sensor trim position adjustment must be performed Selecting RSS DTCs RSS DTCs can be retrieved using the
218. erform the APPLY HOLD and RELEASE ABS functions for brake system diagnosis To select Hydraulic Control Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing af from the Select Mode menu 2 Press Ga to select the Hydraulic Control Test 3 The tester display confirms that you are in the ABS Hydraulic Functional Test and instructs you to raise the wheel to be tested When the wheel has been raised press 4 If the parking brake is on the tester tells you to release it If the parking brake is released within 10 seconds the tester automatically continues to the Select Channel menu If the parking brake is not released within 10 seconds or if the red telltale light remains on even when the parking brake is released the tester instructs you to release the parking brake or correct the cause of the red telltale staying on When the problem is resolved the tester displays the Select Channel menu 5 Choose the wheel you wish to test from the Select Channel menu 6 When a wheel has been selected the tester instructs you to place the transmission in neutral then firmly depress the brake pedal Do not release the pedal until the tester instructs you to do so 7 Have an assistant try to spin the wheel selected It should not spin This is to verify base brake apply 8 Press to start the test The tester displays RELEASE on the screen and your assistant should be able to spin the wheel selected This verifies ABS brake pressure
219. es TP SENSR LEARN TROUBLE CODES PRESENT PRESS F2 TO VIEW CODES IN PROGRESS TP SENSR LEARN FAILED SEE SERVICE MANUAL SECTION 5E1 TP SENSR LEARN 4 Seconds COMPLETE FIGURE 5 34 F5 TP Sensor Learn ACTIVE KEYS Select TP SENSOR LRN from the Select Mode menu G9 G Display trouble codes e t Acknowledge that you wish to perform the TP Sensor Learn function EXIT Return to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 180 Bosch 5 0 VES System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes BOSCH 5 0 VES SYSTEM Variable Effort Steering VES is available on selected 1992 93 D and N Body vehicles and 1992 94 Buick B Body vehicles The Variable Effort VE steering ECU outputs a signal which controls the amount of power steering assist relative to the vehicle s speed At low speeds the power steering assist is increased to improve maneuverability At higher speeds the amount of assist is decreased to improve road feel To do this the Variable Effort VE steering ECU drives a solenoid with a variable duty cycle signal With the tester you can display the duty cycle of this signal A low duty cycle corresponds to a high degree of power assist while a high duty cycle means a low amount of assist For 1993 D Cars you can control the duty cycle while monitoring the feedback current MODE F0 DUTY CYCLE TEST To select Duty Cycle Test do the f
220. es Light Emitting Diode Level Left Front Low Fan Left Fuel Integrator Courtesy Lamp Left Oxygen Sensor Voltage Low Coolant Light Left Rear Loop Status Light Low Tire Pressure Warning System Engine Load LVL MAF Magna Steer MANI MAP MAT M C MD MET MFI MIL MIN MIN T Misc Test MON MPH ms MSG MSM MSVA MT MTL MTR mV Oil Level T T Mass Air Flow A speed dependent steering system that incorporates its controller into the EBCM EBTCM Magna Steer controls the amount of effort needed to provide a road feel using an electromagnet and rotor at the input of the steering gear Magna Steer is speed dependent and uses inputs received from the ABS brake controller Manifold Manifold Absolute Pressure Manifold Air Pressure Manifold Air Temperature Mixture Control Modulated Displacement Metric Multi port Fuel Injection Malfunction Indicator Lamp Minimum Chevrolet Minimum Function T Body car Miscellaneous Test Monitor Miles per Hour Milliseconds 1000ths of a second Message Memory Seat Module 1996 Cadillac models Magna Steer Vehicle Assist an electronic steering control system that varies the power steering assist according to vehicle speed otherwise knows as Speed Dependent Steering System Manual Transmission Min T Lean Min T Rich Millivolts 1000ths of a volt GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 358 D Glossary a
221. es GM ABS Bonneville SSE H Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Grand Prix W Delco Moraine III UART GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 11 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1988 LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MOREE 5TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG C K Truck C K Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL 1989 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1989 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEE 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Electra Park Avenue C Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Riviera E Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Reatta E Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Regal W Delco Moraine III UART GM ABS 1989 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG DeVille Fleetwood C Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Eldorado E Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Seville K Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 12 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1989 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODELE 4TH DIGIT SOTEM TYPE CONFIG Corvette Y SEL UART GM 1989 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEE 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG 98 Regency C Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Eighty Eight C Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Tornado E Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Cutlass Supreme Ww D
222. ess to turn the lamp or relay off The tester displays the commanded state and the feedback state for the lamp or relay If vehicle speed greater than 3 MPH is detected the tester informs you and the test is prevented 3 Press G4 to return to the SELECT OBD CONTROLS menu or press 48 twice to return to the SELECT MODE menu RWAL SELECT F0 VCM RWAL F1 ZP RWAL F2 ALL OTHERS SELECT MODE Ay F0 DATA LIST F1 FUNCTION TEST F2 TROUBLE CODE F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS SELECT MISC TEST F0 BRK LAMP TEST F1 BRK RELY TEST F2 VSS TEST ABS TELLTALE ON Y OFF COMMAND OFF FEEDBACK OFF BRK ENABLE RELAY A ON Y OFF COMMAND OFF FEEDBACK OFF FIGURE 5 87 F0 Brake Lamp Test and F1 Brake Relay Test GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 293 VCM RWAL 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS Select BRAKE LAMP Test Select BRAKE RELAY Test Command lamp or relay on Command lamp or relay off Return to the OBD CONTROLS menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 294 VCM RWAL 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F2 VSS Test The following test is available for 1993 VCM RWAL systems only The VSS test allows you to monitor the Vehicle Speed Signal VSS as it is detected by the VCM RWAL controller To test VSS do the following 1 Select VSS Test from the SELECT OBD CONTROLS menu by pressing 2 The tester displays
223. est Modes NOTE If no ABS faults have occurred for 100 drive cycles the ABS controller A clears itself of all fault information To select DTC History do the following l 2 LA AR 5 Select DTC HISTORY from the SELECT MODE menu by pressing Gp The tester displays two screens of information about the first failure which occurred The first page indicates how many times the failure has occurred over how many drive cycles The second screen tells how many drive cycles have occurred since it was last set The screens automatically sequence at a five second interval Press to manually sequence through the screens or to stop the sequencing Step 2 is repeated to display information from the first five failures If fewer failures have occurred only information from failures that have occurred is displayed After the first five or fewer trouble codes have been viewed the tester displays additional information from the most recent failure Three screens are needed to display all of the information about the last failure as shown in the flow chart on the following page These screens automatically sequence at 5 second intervals or press to manually sequence through them or to freeze the display In the sample flow chart on the following page the first failure code 27 demonstrates an intermittent fault that was the first code set but it hasn t occurred for the past 14 drive cycles The second failure of
224. est Modes 233 A9 e REENEN EE ESA decks Paes 111 MODE PO DATA IST qiue aei a bee aco E b ra cete 111 Creale Your Own Data Palts 2iasiiedasdedt eetebesbekbtbRedbaad eis deg Rad Red 112 Data List Parameters ai ois cessus ded ded eq rad sed trike rti T Caw times OTRE ERA 113 MODE PE DICIS eeepc obe enu eet o adn ee nade a nat 113 MODE BI SNAPSHOT ectprenrcrem m eene ee hehe RE RR RERA Ue Ped 117 DU PONE AA EE AE E Re NEE SE eg d xe Qu ex de dme zd ed dodo i d AC qb 117 E Cond HOR Losasabcibdes be deed bera RE EE ER 117 Pinme Candid DOI cxacoqaveedeetues deque eed RET dude bad ud PA Cd CA TU ES 118 Primme LOPE ENSE aed Abr edere b MR ded edd Hee PP e PERS 119 DCC SHOPSHOL MORE cusesasdd eee order ned rea SES REX GA NUR RR Ub ded 119 MuR dE abl keke HE Reha UU EA 121 SUED SERE PERS a isaqceuaadaruau d dede Gea Sean aaa aa idR E TORT dab dade 122 Class 2 Snapshot Dota Display Phase aca ob ke OARS LASS RS ARR RE ERA RACE RAO RR 127 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 TOC ii MODE F8 INFORMATION ERUN ERI HR EN hehe eR RP es 128 ADVICS ABS SIBI Lioeste herbs cen Ie ep E E E Rea AE 129 ADVICS ABS TCS SYSTEM ssssssssse eee ea 129 MeT E IARE aha cand Rd ubica ob aus ele hdd dedica dde Ge 129 Meer DIEF 25 ak ee episco hbeblsy 4es32 dedu kde bg da edidit edd 129 MIO AN usuuaseetueu e daxsawsed dawataadaathadea tu aded ques 129 Mode FO OBDiI EEN 129 Bosch ABS Suspension Steering Systems 131 VEHICLES WITH BOSCH s uf
225. ester display confirms that you are in the Electromagnetic Brake EMB test The display automatically scrolls after four seconds or after pressing the key 4 The tester asks you to prepare the vehicle by turning the engine OFF and then placing the ignition key in the RUN position Press when you have performed these actions 5 After the vehicle is prepared the tester asks you a series of questions and requests that you perform certain actions such as pressing on the brake pedal Answer the questions by pressing the and CD keys NOTE To help prevent damage to ABS components the tester terminates the EMB Test if more than 45 seconds elapses between actions 6 After all tests have been performed the tester tells you if one or both EMBs passed if one or both EMBs failed or if the test was terminated due to the brake pedal being released If either EMB failed or if the brake pedal was released rerun the EMB Test to verify the results 7 Press AB to return to the SELECT TEST menu NOTE When you exit from the EMB Functional test the tester rehomes the motors and displays a message informing you that the motors have been rehomed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 232 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F3 EMB TEST F4 MOTOR TEST F5 GEAR TENSION ELECTROMAGNETIC BRAKE EMB FUNCTIONAL TEST 4 Seconds or Pkeypress PUMP BRAKES UNTIL VACUUM RESERVE
226. esters and Table 4 2 for OBD hardware interface TESTER INTERFACE MTS 3100 OBD II Compliant hardware internal to the tester Tech 1A OBD II Interface Kit Tech 1 OBD II Vehicle Interface Kit VIM TABLE 4 2 OBD Hardware Interface NOTE Applications with 16 pin SAE J1962 DLC OBD II provide power to the tester therefore the 12 volt power cable is not needed for supplying power to the MTS 3100 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 82 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started 16 PIN DATA LINK CONNECTOR DLC Along with the OBD II requirement came the definition of a new 16 pin data link connector DLC General Motors began using this data link connector DLC on its vehicles in 1994 even though the vehicle may not have been OBD II compliant A series of new 16 pin DLC adapter s were developed to connect all GM vehicles whether they are OBD II compliant or not to the Tech 1 1A and MTS 3100 testers NOTE In all cases of determining which adapter or adapter combination to use please reference the Vehicle Coverage tables and theChassis Adapter Usage Table SELECTING THE CORRECT ADAPTER First look up the vehicle you are testing in the Vehicle Application Charts provided in the beginning of this chapter You need to know the VIN number that identifies the body of the vehicle you are working on The 4th digit of the VIN identifies the body type for passenger cars and t
227. feature is provided to identify the ABS controller version and the ABS software ID and sequence number without having to access or remove the ABS controller NOTE The software ID is not related to a PROM version in the ABS controller The ABS controller has NO serviceable or removable PROM The ID and sequence number are for controller identification purposes only To select ABS Version do the following 1 Select the ABS TESTS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Select the ABS VERSION function by pressing GD The tester displays the Delco Moraine ABS controller version number for approximately 4 seconds The tester then displays the SOFTWARE ID and SEQUENCE number for the ABS controller for approximately 4 seconds The tester continuously alternates between displaying the controller version number and displaying the SOFTWARE ID SEQUENCE 3 Press 3A to return to the SELECT ABS TEST menu DELCO MORAINE ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM 2000 GM 10 VER 1 0 SELECT ABS TEST F3 PUMP MOTOR F4 ABS VERSION 4 Seconds ABS CONTROLLER SOFTWARE ID xxxx SEQUENCE xxxx 4 Seconds FIGURE 5 53 Display ABS Version EXIT Terminate test and return to SELECT ABS TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 218 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes DELCO ABS VI UART Delco ABS VI system uses electric motors to modulate displacement pistons The
228. fer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 307 Mode F3 Snapshot 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The snapshot mode helps isolate problems of intermittent operation Information is captured before and after a trigger condition Manual or automatic triggers can be selected You can review a stored snapshot from this menu Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions F4 OBD CONTROLS The OBD Controls mode allows the technician to activate various components in the RTD EVO system s in order to diagnose problems and verify proper system operation When in this mode the following tests can be performed RTD Controls e Solenoid Tests Compressor Test SRC Lamp Test EVO Controls VES Solenoid SUBMODE F0 RTD CONTROLS F0 Solenoid Test Solenoid Test allows the technician to cycle each individual shock absorber solenoid as well as the system Exhaust Solenoid ON and OFF To perform the test s do the following 1 Press F4 OBD Controls from the SELECT MODE menu 2 Press F0 RTD Controls from the SELECT SYSTEM menu 3 Press F0 Solenoid from the SELECT CONTROL menu 4 Press the Up Arrow key to turn the selected Solenoid ON 5 Press the Down Arrow key to turn the selected Solenoid OFF F1 Compressor Test The Compressor Test allows a technician to command the RTD compressor ON and OFF To perform th
229. g Test Modes Submode F9 ABS Version System ID This feature allows you to identify the ABS system the ABS version Electronic Brake Control Module EBCM manufacturing and calibration information without having to access or remove the EBCM Software ID selection is not available for printing using the F8 PRINT function However Print Screen mode is available NOTE The software ID is not related to a PROM version in the ABS controller The ABS controller has NO SERVICEABLE OR REMOVABLE prom EH The ID and sequence number are for controller identification purposes only To select ABS Version do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Press G to select the ABS VERSION or SYSTEM ID 3 The tester displays information about the Delco Chassis Division ABS controller on three tester screens e System identification screen Model year platform and ABS version number screen e Software identification screen This information may be referenced by service manuals or service bulletins It can be used to determine that the correct ABS controller is installed in the vehicle It may also be used for warranty purposes 4 The tester continuously scrolls through the three screens at 4 second intervals The display can be frozen by pressing the key and unfrozen by pressing the key 5 Press 3A to return to the OBD CONTROLS menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 244 Delco ABS VI UART
230. ge 254 Delco ABS VI Class 2 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F3 Gear Tension Gear Tension Relief Sequence When the displacement cylinder pistons are in their up most position each motor has prevailing torque due to the force necessary to ensure each piston is held firmly at the top of its travel This torque results in gear tension or force on each gear that makes motor pack separation difficult To avoid injury or damage to the gears the gear tension relief function briefly reverses each motor to eliminate the prevailing torque Always perform the gear tension relief function prior to removing the hydraulic modulator or motor pack from the vehicle Submode F4 Relay Test The test allows monitoring the voltage available to the EBCM while turning the Electronic Brake Relay ON and OFF When the relay is commanded ON the voltage should be equal to battery voltage When the relay is OFF the voltage should drop below 5 volts NOTE Voltage does not drop to zero when the relay contacts are open due to capacitors in the EBCM If the voltage drops below 5 volts the relay is operating properly Submode F5 Voltage Load The Delco VI ABS system can draw significant amounts of current when operating This test runs on many of the system components to load test the vehicle s electronic system If low voltage malfunctions or intermittent EBCM operations are occurring this test allows you to monitor two s
231. h as Qo and Gg To respond when the tester asks for information just press the appropriate key on the tester keypad Although there are exceptions pressing 241 generally takes you back to the previous screen or to the beginning of a process Please read Chapter 2 before beginning diagnostics for the first time Manual Title Page 5 Table of Contents 1 GM CHASSIS APPLICATION DESCRIPTION sss 1 OPERATING MODES ng EERSTEN AN REENERT E 1 Data Dit lnilnissezesewrecoheschedopedopsedegdoueqpreXacescsqipbpepbesewia eegube 1 DRC AER dere R46 AER E ad a 1 EE 2 EE A eh A Ae Ae a a ebd dioit ade panies 2 JUPE AE nd ved zudsccnd he di ake de Rig NE Deam edad z 2 GNLABSSYSIBNMIS eeu Mere ete ena tt eR to d Ro Re ORDER 2 OM CHASSIS SYSTEMS ceiceseeseremo eR IER eR eas PE Y e bend 3 Pariabie Effort Sleeving SPEE Ae e SE EE dn i ideit SE SE new ete dons 3 E E EE EE 3 Ee VONC OMPR asa toctinn doe wean Sd ve WU edd ana ORE Ea ra qe a ded dde 3 Tire Inflation Monitoring System 8 EEN EA ateke E Ed Ed ba 4 Tue Prose MONGO UVSC er ook sep red sed ge dE b ORE EE ETERS 4 Vehicle Stability Enhancement System eck a ie bee de a AR AR AREE A AR ERES 4 2 OPERATING PRECAUHONS ee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee 5 IRFTISODUGIC TICHN EEN 5 PRECAUTIONS FOR ALL APPLICATIONS 0 eee eee 5 Prolece ABN ROVE POY couoeduvemsea tag cuasadseuaatora da ae ea eee tee Bild be 5 Frofect Against Iolase SPRES a ne heed daredeodendedded
232. h they occurred This information can be used to identify situations where an initial fault that was detected no longer remains but the fault conditions explain the occurrence of a later fault An example is an intermittent wheel speed sensor which sets code A048 then further degrades such that no signal is present and now sets code A044 How often each of the first five faults have occurred This information identifies intermittent fault conditions and the degree of intermittence If a fault occurred 1 out of 35 drive cycles an unusual condition may have occurred such as a severe pot hole that caused the fault In any case a fault this intermittent is going to be difficult to locate Up front you know special diagnosis techniques are needed to identify the cause If the fault occurred 10 out of 15 drive cycles your chances of identifying the fault are much greater and re creation is probably much easier Again you know this before an attempt is made to identify the cause If the fault occurs every drive cycle the fault is HARD or easy to duplicate Diagnosis should be easier The last failure that occurred The last failure that occurred is identified specifically This fault is what brought the customer in for repair Additionally the following information identifies what was happening when the last fault occurred GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 196 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes The
233. hassis Application 1986 2004 Page 351 RTD EVO C Data List Parameters EVO ACTUAL CURRENT IF EQUIPPED The actual value attained for the EVO actuator EVO DESIRED CURRENT IF EQUIPPED The value the ECU is trying to achieve for the EVO actuator EVO DRIVE PWM IF EQUIPPED The value of the EVO modulation as a percentage EXHAUST SIGNAL IF EQUIPPED The state of the exhaust solenoid LIFT DIVE STATUS UNITS RANGE AMPS AMPS 0 to 1 0 to 100 ON OFF ACTIVE INACTIVE Information for the suspension control module from the PCM inputs indicating hard acceleration or braking LEFT FRONT DAMPER ACTUATOR RIGHT FRONT DAMPER ACTUATOR LEFT REAR DAMPER ACTUATOR RIGHT REAR DAMPER ACTUATOR The state of the shock absorber damper solenoid REAR LEVELING AIR PRESSURE IF EQUIPPED The pressure inside the rear leveling air system REAR LEVELING AIR PRESSURE IF EQUIPPED The value of the air pressure in the shock absorbers in volts ON OFF PSI 16 to 188 VOLTS 0 15 to 4 85 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 352 RTD EVO C Data List Parameters RF POSITION SENSOR LF POSITION SENSOR RR POSITION SENSOR LR POSITION SENSOR UNITS RANGE VOLTS 0 35 to 4 75 The measured value in volts of the vehicle height body to wheel STEERING WHEEL POSITION SIGNAL 1 STEERING WHEEL POSITION SIGNAL 2 VOLTS 0 35 to 4 75 The value in volts for position of the steering wh
234. he 5th digit for light trucks refer to Vehicle Identification Number VIN on page 108 Once you have located the vehicle in the Application Charts look in the column marked ADAPTER CONFIG and note the listing see below EXAMPLE from the Vehicle Application Chart 1997 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM CONFIG Bonneville H Delco Bosch 5 0 UART OBD Il ABS TCS MSVA OBD II Cy GM 16 Next look in Figure 4 3 Chassis Adapter Usage on page 85 for the adapter configuration number of the vehicle you are connecting to In the case of the example listed above the 1997 Bonneville Adapter Configuration number is OBD II C or GM 16 The Chassis Adapter Usage Chart on the following page provides listings of the adapters cables and other hardware needed to connect each Vetronix tester to the vehicle In this Example from Table 4 3 assume you are using the MTS 3100 The following adapters or cables would be needed for the OBD II or GM 16 OBD II C OBDII C VIM and Adapter Cable Part Nos 02003211 and 02001744 AnOBD II Compliant MTS 3100 or GM 16 GM 12 14 Pin Adapter Part No 02001384 16 12 Pin Non OBD II Adapter Part No 02001575 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 83 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started Example from Table 4 3 ADAPTER ADAPTER PART FIG SYSTEM Coupe TESTER DESCR
235. he SELECT MODE menu SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TESTS F5 TP SENSR LRN SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID TST F1 AUTO TEST F2 LAMP TEST LAMP TEST RED BRAKE LIGHT A ON y OFF FIGURE 5 20 Lamp Test ACTIVE KEYS G Select Lamp Test from the OBD CONTROLS menu Control the selected lamp on or off EXIT Return to SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 153 Bosch 2U ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F3 Pilot Valve Test This test applies only to 1994 95 Y and 1993 94 D E K and V Cars CAUTION To perform the following test both vehicle drive wheels must be securely raised or unintended vehicle movement occurs that could injure someone e The drive wheels must be off the ground to perform the Pilot Valve Test This test allows you to check the Pilot Valve s by controlling the valve s ON for 25 seconds while manually trying to turn the vehicle s drive wheels The E K and V Cars have Left and Right Pilot Valves that are tested independently D and Y cars do not have separate left and right pilot valve tests To select Pilot Valve do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing GE 2 Select PILOT VALVE by pressing a 3 If you are testing an E K or V Car select Left Pilot Valve by pressing or Right Pilot Valve by pressing a 4 Make sure the vehicle drive wheels have been securely raised The test is performed
236. he engine starts ANTILOCK warning lamp is ON for 3 5 seconds When LOCK NORMAL switch is moved to LOCK amber switch indicator lamp flashes The LOCK and ANTILOCK lamps turn ON when the transfer case differential vacuum actuated 7 The LOCK indicator lamp goes OFF when the transfer case differential spring mechanism unlocks the differential 8 All four lamps remain OFF at all other times NOTE d Refer to Lamp Sequence Check on page 311 before using Table 5 4 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 313 Teves Mark Il ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SYMPTOM LAMP SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION Lamps Ign ON Cranking Running Moving Braking Stopped Idle Normal Lamp sequence with ANTILOCK Excessive pedal travel or spongy pedal Antilock braking 1 BRAKE operation or valve cycling during normal stop on dry pavement Poor vehicle tracking during antilock braking See 1 Table 5 5 Lamps Ign ON Cranking Running Moving Braking Stopped Idle Continuous ANTILOCK ANTILOCK Normal BRAKE lamp 2 See 2 Table 5 5 BRAKE Lamps Ign ON Cranking Running Moving Braking Stopped Idle ANTILOCK lamp comes ON after vehicle ANTILOCK star
237. he vehicle can be driven while these diagnostic data parameters are being displayed Intermittent analog signals can be monitored to determine if the signal varies Input output parameter status is also displayed Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F2 DTCS Trouble codes are stored in the ECU memory and can be displayed in the scantool The ABS ECU also records when the DTC was stored and the ABS status In addition to the DTC number a brief description of the DTC can be displayed DTCs can also be cleared from the ECU memory Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 323 Teves Mark IV ABS TCS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The ABS snapshot helps isolate problems of intermittent ABS operation Information is captured before and after a trigger condition The manual and automatic trigger can be selected You will also be allowed to review a stored snapshot from this menu Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS Submode F0 Solenoid Tests The Solenoid Test for the Teves Mark VI system allows you to manually control the actuation of the hydraulic wheel circuit valves for each wheel You can select between actuation of the pressure hold function or the pressure release function for each solenoid The pressure hold function holds the pressure from
238. hold the brake pedal 6 Select Solenoid Test from the OBD CONTROLS menu 7 Select the desired Dump Solenoid Test Have the assistant command the Dump valve ON with the scantool 8 Attempt to move the wheel being tested by hand it should move even though the assistant is applying pressure to the brake pedal The wheels may be difficult to turn by hand but can be moved if the system is working properly GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 300 Kelsey Hayes 4WAL ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F1 History Data The History Data function identifies drive cycle ignition counts and ABS Activation counts relative to when codes were stored There are multiple Blocks of history records the tester indicates the Block being displayed Using the arrow keys scrolls through the different data blocks with the most negative number block being the oldest stored block To display History Data do the following 1 Select History Data from the OBD CONTROLS mode menu by pressing aj 2 The tester prompts you to turn the ignition OFF then ON 3 The tester then displays the most recent History Block data BLOCK XX IGN CNT1 XX IGN CNT2 XX ABS CNT XX GN GNTI Drive Cycles GN CNT2 Drive Cycles ABS CNT ABS Activation Counts Submode F1 Function Test The purpose of the FUNCTION TEST is to actuate the 4WAL system The tester sends a signal to the 4WAL ECU which causes the FOUR WHEEL ANTILOCK system
239. hould be able to diagnose and repair electronic control systems Disclaimer Every attempt has been made to provide complete and accurate technical information based on factory service information available at the time of publication However the right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice FCC Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Using This Application with the MTS 3100 The MTS 3100 diagnoses OBD systems in a similar manner as the Tech 1 Tech 1A but with the addition of data display enhancements All tester adapters required to perform OBD system diagnostics are described in this operator s manual Be sure to read the vehicle coverage tables for proper adapter configuration before connecting to the vehicle s diagnostic data link connector When used alone in the MTS 3100 the operation of the cartridge
240. ibed in the following submode sections Submode F0 Solenoid Tests Solenoid Valve Pressure Reduction This test activates selected wheel circuit valves in the modulator valve by placing the valve in the pressure reduce position Valve action can be verified by checking appropriate wheel for braking action The scantool indicates whether the valve operated correctly To perform pressure reduce test raise and support vehicle Depress brake pedal Use the scantool to command the PRESSURE REDUCE mode Try to spin the wheel being tested The wheel should spin if the solenoid valve reduces pressure Solenoid Valve Pressure Hold This test activates selected wheel circuit valves in the modulator valve by placing valve in pressure hold position Valve action can be verified by checking appropriate wheel for braking action The scantool indicates whether valve operated correctly To perform pressure hold test raise and support vehicle Spin wheel freely Use the scantool to command the PRESSURE HOLD mode Have assistant apply brakes Try to spin the wheel being tested Wheel should spin even with brakes applied due to the hold command Make sure you follow the procedures in the service manual when you are performing this test This test normally takes approximately 15 seconds to perform If the test is performed in less than 1 second or if you see a TEST INHIBITED message displayed on the tester you should cycle the ignition on the vehicle and G
241. ication 1986 2004 Page 87 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 7 GM Adapter Configuration for Tech 1A Tech 1A Application Cartridge GM 12 14 Pin Adapter GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 88 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 8 GM Adapter Configuration for Tech 1 RWAL AWAL ALDL Cable GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 89 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 9 GM R Adapter Configuration for MTS 3100 MTS 3100 DLC Cable GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 90 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 10 GM R Adapter Configuration for Tech 1A DLC Cable GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 91 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 11 GM R Adapter Configuration for Tech 1 Tech 1 RWAL AWAL ALDL Cable A cm GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 92 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 12 GM 16R Adapter Configuration for MTS 3100 MTS 3100 DLC Cable GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 93 Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 13 GM 16R Adapter Configuration for Tech 1A DLC Cable Tech 1A DC Power Cable Application Cartridge GM 16 12 Pin Non OBD II Adapter GM
242. icle Coverage 1996 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT QD TYPE CONFIG Caprice B Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 Camaro 228 F Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Cavalier J Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Beretta L Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Corsica L Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Lumina Ww Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 Monte Carlo W Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 Corvette Y Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS RTD GM 16 1996 GEO PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER m 4TH DIGIT STOTEN TYPE CONFIG Prizm S Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Metro M Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 38 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1996 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SED TYPE CONFIG Cutlass Ciera A Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Ninety Eight C Delco Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Aurora G Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Eighty Eight LSS H Delco Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA GM 16 Achieva N Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 Cutlass Supreme Ww Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 1996 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SES TY
243. ies current through the inflator modules which will cause deployment of the air bags in the event of a frontal crash of sufficient force up to 30 degrees off the center line of the vehicle Deterrent Detection Defrost Digital Fuel Injection Defog Defrost Trouble codes Set by a system to indicate the occurrence of abnormal conditions Driver Information Center Delayed Interior Light relay activates courtesy lights Direction A parameter which can be in one of only two possible states HIGH LOW ON OFF etc Discrete Signal DIV DLC DLY DOHC DR DRA DRL DSIR DTC DVM E amp C E amp C Bus E amp C Component EBCM EBTCM ECCP ECM ECU EEPROM EFE EFI EGI EG2 EG3 EGR EGV An individual voltage or ground signal that is carried on its own wire Division Divert Data Link Connector Delay Double Overhead Cam Door Digital Ratio Adapter Daytime Running Lamps Desired Diagnostic Trouble Code Digital Volt Meter Entertainment and Comfort Entertainment and Comfort Bus A communication link which interconnects components of the entertainment and comfort systems of the vehicle A component which performs an entertainment or comfort function and which is connected to the E amp C Bus Electronic Brake Control Module Electronic Brake Traction Control Module Electronic Climate Control Panel Engine Control Module or Electronic Control Module Electronic Control Un
244. included ABS code diagnostics by flashing ABS codes through the Antilock lamp located in the instrument cluster The second Teves Mark II ABS system included the following models 1988 1990 Pontiac E K Body 1989 1990 C H body TEVES MARK Il LAMP SEQUENCE DIAGNOSTICS The first Teves Mark II ABS system has a red BRAKE warning lamp and an amber ANTILOCK indicator lamp on the instrument panel The lamps light in various combinations to indicate normal and abnormal brake system conditions The first Teves Mark II ABS system includes the following models 1986 1990 Pontiac A Body 1986 1988 C H body Overview of Diagnostics 1 Make preliminary checks If a cause for an abnormal condition is found make the repairs at this point 2 Perform the Lamp Sequence Check on page 311 On Vehicles not equipped with ABS code diagnostics 1986 1990 Pontiac A Body 1986 1988 C H body perform Lamp Sequence Check GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 310 Teves Mark Il ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Onvehicles that have ABS code diagnostics 1988 1990 E K body 1989 1990 C H body perform the Functional Check on page 311 3 Based on the results of the lamp sequence or functional checks check the appropriate component s and make repairs To perform the Lamp Sequence Check do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position for 15 seconds 2 Turn the ignition switch to the RUN po
245. ing 1 Select the ABS TESTS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Select PUMP MOTOR tests by pressing Gp 3 Press to select LEAK DOWN test 4 If pump is running wait for pump to stop 5 When pump stops depress brake pedal until pump motor runs 6 When pump runs remove foot from brake pedal and wait for pump to stop 7 When pump stops again depress brake pedal with moderate force and hold it steady for the remainder of the test 8 Tester displays the elapsed time until the pump runs or until 60 seconds have elapsed whichever comes first 9 Tester displays the results 10 Press to return to PUMP MOTOR TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 214 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes POWERMASTER III BLEED DOWN CHECK WITH BRAKE PEDAL DEPRESSED 4 Seconds or PUMP RUNNING Y U l PUMP MOTOR IS PUMP NOT i RUNNING WAIT RUNNING 1 UNTIL PUMP MOTOR 1 I STOPS RUNNING PUMP STOPS i DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL UNTIL PUMP MOTOR RUNS PUMP RUNS lt PUMP RUNNING gt remove foot from brake DO NOT REAPPLY BRAKES PUMP STOPS DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL WITH MODERATE FORCE AND HOLD STEADY BRAKE APPLIED PUMP RUNS BEFORE 30 Seconds CHECK ACCUMULATOR PRECHARGE SEE SERV MANUAL xx SECONDS PUMP RUNS AFTER 30 to 60 Seconds PM IIl BLEED DOWN PUMP OFF FOR xx SECONDS BEFORE PUMP RUN RETURN TO AB
246. ing the tester s SCREEN PRINT feature This is enabled if the RS232 Cartridge is installed when using a Tech 1 by pressing for approximately 1 second until an RS232 SET UP menu is displayed Pressing Gp then enables the SCREEN PRINT function Refer to the RS232C I F Operators Manual for more detail when using a Tech 1 NOTE EH Snapshot printing capability may not be available for all vehicles 15 When you are finished viewing the sampled data press 248 to return to the Snapshot Option menu If you are finished with the SNAPSHOT mode press 240 again to return to the Select Mode menu SNAPSHOT DATA DISPLAY ACTIVE KEYS G Scroll through displayed data parameters Scroll through selected samples Fix top or bottom display parameter respectively G Display trouble codes for current sample G3 Display cause of SNAPSHOT trigger G Advance to first earliest sample G Advance to trigger sample sample 0 F6 Advance to last most recent sample Toggle between MPH and KPH display G3 Print current data sample if equipped with RS232C I F Cartridge and printer Toggle between sample index and sample time display Return to Snapshot Option menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 126 Mode F3 Snapshot 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes CLASS 2 SNAPSHOT DATA DISPLAY PHASE Snapshot data from a Class 2 system can be displayed before entering the GM Chassis Ap
247. installed ACTIVE KEYS ENTER Confirm displayed information is correct Advance to next display Select previously tested vehicle q Used to select a menu item Used to select menu item Stop automatic menu scroll Manually scroll menu EXIT Return to previous display GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 76 Perform Vehicle and or System Selection 4 Getting Started PERFORM VEHICLE AND OR SYSTEM SELECTION SELECTING THE MODEL YEAR 1 From the power up menu press iz to enter the vehicle selection mode 2 If the tester remembers the last vehicle you tested it gives you the option of continuing with the testing of that vehicle Enter the model year on the keypad to start testing of a new vehicle or press to continue testing the same vehicle Generally the tester remembers the previous vehicle under test if it has been less than 24 hours and you have not removed application cartridge from the tester NOTE If you select a new vehicle or the same vehicle as before but do not press any data saved from previous testing is erased This includes Snapshot and Review Codes LA The model year selection screen defaults to the current year The or arrow key scrolls through the available model years NOTE EH Holding down the or arrow key results in fast scrolling SELECT MODEL YEAR i 2004 4 Scrolling Arrows ENTER The brackets
248. ion the GM Chassis Software has the capability to print the captured data providing a hard copy of any selected data sample If you are using a Tech 1 the tester RS232C I F Cartridge P N 01001151 and a tester printer P N 01001419 or compatible is required to support this print function If you are using the MTS 3100 or Tech 1A a VP 411 VP 414 or equivalent is needed to print Snapshot data SELECTING SNAPSHOT MODE The operation of snapshot mode is divided into three phases Setup beginning with Step 1 Data Capture Step 5 through Step 8 Data Display Step 9 to the end To select Setup phase of Snapshot Mode do the following 1 Select the snapshot mode from the Select Mode menu by pressing Gp 2 The trigger condition and review data options are displayed next in a self scrolling Snapshot Mode menu To select a trigger option just press the function key displayed to the left of the desired trigger condition To replay previously captured data press With the Delco Moraine ABS III and Delco ABS VI systems you can choose a specific ABS trouble code for the trigger condition as explained below When the tester screen displays SNAPSHOT MODE ENTER ABS CODE A0 use numeric keys to enter the two digit trouble code number that you have selected then press GMAB The tester continues to store data until the specified trouble code is detected or until you press the af Gui or key If the code you enter does n
249. ions 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes The RWAL system is connected to the existing brake warning light on the instrument panel When ignition is turned on warning light should come on for approximately 2 seconds as a bulb test NOTE Data List is not available for some Kelsey Hayes RWAL systems SELECT SYSTEM F0 RWAL F1 4WAL INSTALL ADAPTERS 1 GM 12 14 PIN 2 RWAL AWAL ENTER RWAL SELECT F0 VCM RWAL F1 ZP RWAL F2 ALL OTHERS SELECT MODE Ay SELECT MODE F0 DATA LIST F1 FUNCTION TEST F1 FUNCTION TEST F2 DTC F2 DTC F3 MISC TEST SELECT MODE Ay SNAPSHOT H F4 VSS MONITOR F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TEST FIGURE 5 81 Selecting RWAL GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 280 Kelsey Hayes RWAL All Versions 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes KELSEY HAYES VOLTAGE CHECK When a vehicle equipped with an RWAL or ZP RWAL system is selected the tester automatically performs a voltage check When a VCM RWAL system is selected a communication check Ignition 3 circuit and Engine Codes check are automatically performed If the vehicle passes the tests the Select Mode menu is displayed and you do not see the tester displays shown below in the test descriptions If a problem is detected during the tests the tester indicates what you should do to correct the problem KELSEY HAYES RWAL ZP RWAL VOLTAGE CHECK After selection of an RWAL sy
250. is Software Included is A description of the states A description of the units and the range of the analog parameters Analog ranges are the widest possible ranges not necessarily realistic maximum or minimum ranges A description of the parameter NOTE The parameters listed on the following pages do not include all of the Data EH List parameters available in the Chassis Software GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 339 Delco Moraine III amp Delco VI ABS C Data List Parameters DELCO MORAINE III amp DELCO VI ABS ABS BATT VOLTAGE DELCO MORAINE IIl LOW OK FOR OPERATION Battery voltage is an input to the ABS controller that is used to determine if adequate voltage exists for proper operation If battery voltage to the ABS controller drops below 9 7 volts when the vehicle is moving ABS will disable itself due to low voltage ABS BATT VOLTAGE DELCO VI ABS IGN VOLTAGE DELCO VI VOLTS 0 0 to 17 1 ABS Battery Voltage and ABS Ignition Voltage are analog input signals read by the EBCM The EBCM uses ABS Ignition Voltage to detect ignition on or ignition off ABS will be disabled by the EBCM if the battery voltage falls below or rises above programmed thresholds ABS WARNING LAMP DELCO MORAINE Ill amp DELCO VI STATES ON OFF FLASHING The ABS warning light indicates to the driver the operational status of the Antilock Brake System If the light is OFF the system is fully operational If
251. isplayed re enter the TROUBLE CODE mode and try to clear codes again If it fails again then you probably have an intermittent connection to the Serial Data Link SDL It is also possible that the controller is malfunctioning 7 If you attempt to clear ABS trouble codes the following message 1s displayed on the scantool DISPLAY ENHANCED DIAG DATA LOST IF CODES CLEARED NO TO CLEAR This gives you the opportunity to examine more information that the ABS controller has saved about the ABS trouble codes Pressing causes the scantool to enter the DISPLAY ENHANCED ABS DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION mode Pressing Qe causes ABS codes to be cleared GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 200 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Y TROUBLE CODES F0 DATA LIST F1 DATA MONITOR WAITING FOR DATA F2 TROUBLE CODE Less than 1 second TROUBLE CODES NO IPC DATA 3 Seconds TROUBLE CODES ABS CODE A007 C REAR RELAY CNTS OPEN FUSE OPEN 3 Seconds TROUBLE CODES ABS CODE A048 H RF WHEEL SPEED JITTER TEST 3 Seconds TROUBLE CODES CLEAR CODES TROUBLE CODES CLEAR ABS CODES Indicates Current code Indicates History code Display enhanced diagnostic info Refer to ABS Tests DISPLAY ENHANCED DIAG DATA LOST IF CODES CLEARED NO TO CLEAR TROUBLE CODES ABS CODES CLEARED FIGURE 5 44 Trouble
252. it Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Early Fuel Evaporation Electronic Fuel Injection EGR Valve 1 EGR Valve 2 EGR Valve 3 Exhaust Gas Recirculation EGR Vent Solenoid GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 356 D Glossary and Abbreviations ELC ELEC EMB ENAB ENG EOLM EPR EPROM Equal ESB ESC EST ETS EVO EXH F12 FDBK or FB FDC FET FIX FLD FLR FNI FN2 FNCTN FOG FPR FREQ FRT FRNT FTD FTR Electronic Level Control Electric Electromagnetic Brake Enable Engine English Engine Oil Life Monitor Exhaust Pressure Regulator Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Equalizer Expansion Spring Brake Electronic Spark Control Electronic Spark Timing Electronic Traction Control System Electronically Variable Orifice an advanced GM steering system Exhaust Fan 1 and 2 Feedback Fuel Data Center Field Effect Transmitter Fixed Field Fog Lamps Relay Fan 1 Fan 2 Function Rear Defog Relay Fuel Pressure Regulator Frequency Front Functional Test Director interactive test procedure Fuel Trim Reset Function Keys FUP FWD FXS GAG GEN GFD GLT GMP4 GND GOV GRD G S GVWR HDL HFN H L HRN HT HVAC HYDRL IAC ICCS LD or ID I F IGN ILC INC INCANDES IND INDIC Keys on the tester which can be used to select a particular function af GG etc These keys double as numeric keys 0 9 Fuel
253. k separation process and prevent personal injury To select Motor Pack Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Press G9 to select the MOTOR PACK Test 3 The tester display confirms that you are in the Automated ABS Motor Pack Diagnosis test The display automatically scrolls after four seconds or after pressing the key 4 The tester asks 1f the motor pack has been separated from the modulator Answer by pressing the or QT9 key If the answer is YES the tester asks you to turn the ignition OFF If the answer is NO the tester performs a gear tension relief sequence and then informs you that the sequence has been completed Press to scroll to the next screen which asks you to turn the ignition OFF After you turn the key ignition OFF the tester prompts you to remove the motor pack from the hydraulic modulator assembly Refer to the service manual for the proper procedure The tester prompts you to connect the motor pack wiring to the motor pack Position the motor pack so that the gears are clear of all objects and then turn the ignition back ON The tester guides you through a series of actions to perform and questions to answer If an T is displayed in the lower right corner of the display press after the action is completed to continue to the next page of instructions If the tester asks a question answer by pressing the G9 or GIG key Nn 6 After all tests have been perf
254. ke fluid has occurred e Air ingestion is suspected If none of the above conditions applies use standard bleed procedures Refer to Hydraulic Brake Procedure section in the GM repair manual for the vehicle being diagnosed This procedure uses the scantool to cycle the system solenoid valves and to run the pump motor in order to purge the air from the secondary circuits These secondary circuits are normally closed and are only opened during system initialization at vehicle start up and during ABS operation The automated bleed procedure opens these secondary circuits and allows any air trapped inside the BPMV to flow out toward the wheel cylinders or the clippers where the air can be purged out of the system Refer to the appropriate vehicle service manual for specific bleeding procedures To perform DBC 7 Automated Bleed do the following Raise the vehicle 2 Remove all four tire and wheel assemblies 3 Inspect the brake system for leaks 4 Inspect the brake system for component damage 5 Inspect the battery state of charge 6 Connect the tester to the vehicle DLC 7 Turn the ignition ON 8 Select the AUTOMATED BLEED procedure 9 Bleed the base brake system Refer to the hydraulic brake system bleeding procedure found in the GM service manual for the vehicle you are working on 10 Follow the tester instructions for each ABS channel to complete the test NOTE EH If any DTCs are detected the bleed procedure is a
255. l through the list until the desired VIN code flashes Press to initialize communication F1 Light Truck After selecting light truck you will be asked to select the 5th digit on the VIN code the vehicle s body type The tester will display all body VIN codes available for the year selected Press or Qe to scroll through the list until the desired VIN code flashes Press to initialize communication ACTIVE KEYS Oh E Select model year Scroll to the left Go Scroll to the right Initialize communications Figure 4 4 is an example of possible screen combinations when selecting a passenger vehicle and Figure 4 6 is an example of possible screen combinations when selecting a truck GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 78 Perform Vehicle and or System Selection 4 Getting Started FIGURE 4 4 Passenger Car Selection SELECT MODEL YEAR 2004 4 ENTER Flashing B All 97 to present Class 2 systems VEHICLE TYPE F0 PASSENGER CAR F1 LIGHT TRUCK VEHICLE TYPE F0 PASSENGER CAR F1 U VAN APU F2 LIGHT TRUCK SELECT 4TH DIGIT OF VIN CODE BODY TYPE BCDEFHJKLNSVWYZ YES IS ENGINE TYPE 3 1L 8TH DIGIT OF VIN CODE D YES NO CAUTION ABS BRAKING IS NOT AVAILABLE DURING TESTING SELECT MODE Y F0 ABS DATALIST F1 CODE HISTORY F2 TROUBLE CODE F3 SNAPSHOT F4 ABS TESTS 4 Seconds or key press SELECT MODE Y
256. lco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F3 Pump Motor Submode F0 Monitor Normal Pump Run Cycle This test allows you to identify the amount of time required to recharge the accumulator under normal operating conditions from approximately 2200 psi to 2700 psi This time period is dependent on the accumulator pressure switch settings accumulator precharge pump motor output and vehicle voltage The vehicle service manual identifies acceptable pump run times The tester identifies excessive pump run times greater than 30 seconds by displaying an EXCESSIVE PUMP RUN TIME message To select Pump Motor do the following Select the ABS TESTS by pressing af from the Select Mode menu Select PUMP MOTOR tests by pressing Gp 2 3 Press to select RUN CYCLE 4 If pump is running the tester displays the WAIT FOR PUMP TO STOP message If you see this message wait until the DEPRESS BRAKE UNTIL PUMP RUNS message is displayed When the DEPRESS BRAKE UNTIL PUMP RUNS message is displayed depress the brake pedal and wait for the PUMP RUNNING message to be displayed UA When the pump stops running the PUMP OFF message is displayed along with the REPEAT message The time for the first pump run is displayed on the tester 6 Repeat Step 5 When the pump stops again the time for both runs is displayed 7 Press CAR to return to the PUMP MOTOR TEST menu GM Chassis Appli
257. le also uses the Steering Wheel Position and Speed Sensor to control steering effort The control module regulates the amount of current through the EVO solenoid Steering assist is varied depending on vehicle speed and steering wheel position At higher speeds the amount of steering assist decreases giving the driver improved road feel At lower speeds the amount of steering assist increases making cornering and tight maneuvering easier System Components e SCM Suspension Control Module e Compressor Leveling Module consists of a Pressure Sensor and Exhaust Solenoid Compressor Motor Relay Steering Wheel Position and Speed Sensor EVO Electronic Variable Orifice Solenoid Shock Absorber Solenoid Valves and Exhaust Valve Body to Wheel Position Sensors MODE F0 DATA LIST Diagnostic data parameters are monitored by the scantool The vehicle can be driven while these diagnostic data parameters are being displayed Intermittent analog signals can be monitored to determine if the signal varies Input output parameter status is also displayed Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F2 DTCS Diagnostic Trouble Codes are stored in the ECU memory and can be displayed on the scantool The SCM also records when the DTC was stored current vs history DTC In addition to the DTC number a brief description of the DTC can be displayed DTCs can also be cleared from the ECU memory Please re
258. le Coverage 1994 GM ALL PURPOSE PASSENGER VEHICLES BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 5TH DIGIT eres TYPE CONFIG Lumina APV U Delco VI UART GM Tran Sport Silhouette ABS VES 1995 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1995 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SES TYPE CONFIG Century A Delco VI UART GM ABS Roadmaster B Bosch 5 0 UART GM ABS VES Wagon B Bosch 5 0 UART GM ABS VES Electra Park Avenue C Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 3 8L GM 16 8th VIN L 1 Riviera G Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 4 0L GM 16 8th VIN C Le Sabre H Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 3 8L GM 16 8th VIN L 1 Skylark N Delco VI UART GM ABS Regal W Delco VI UART GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 32 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1995 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT eres TYPE CONFIG Fleetwood D Bosch 5 0 UART GM ABS TCS VES Eldorado E Bosch 5 0 UART GM ABS TCS w 4 6L RSS ELC SWPS Concours DeVille K Bosch 5 0 UART GM Seville ABS TCS w 4 6L RSS ELC SWPS 1995 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SYS TYPE CONFIG Caprice B Bosch 5 0 UART GM ABS VES Camaro 228 F Delco VI UART GM ABS Camaro Z28 F Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS w 3 4L GM 16 8th VIN S Camaro Z28 F Delco V
259. le Identification Number VIN Use the chart below to assist in interpreting the VIN of the vehicle being tested BODY CHASSIS TYPE FOR LIGHT DUTY TRUCKS AND APV S 5th DIGIT TYPICAL VIN 1G VIN CHARACTER 12 A EI Wi A oa e 1011 12 1314 15 16 17 VEHICLE MAKE BODY ENGINE MODEL YEAR 8rd DIGIT TYPE CODE 10th DIGIT 1 Chevrolet 4th DIGIT 8th DIGIT G 1986 2 Pontiac Passenger H 3 Oldsmobile Cars Only 4 Buick 6 Cadillac BODY FOR 7 GM of Canada MEDIUM DUTY 8 Saturn TRUCKS 6th DIGIT RONA lt XXS lt HWDUVUZECR GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 108 5 SELECTING AND OPERATING TEST MODES This chapter provides a detailed description of each test available in this application Following the test descriptions step by step instructions tell you how to quickly perform the test A list of the active keys for each test is included at the end of each test mode TEST MODES SUMMARY The following table gives you a quick summary of the test modes available within this application Detailed descriptions of the test modes are given in the appropriate sections of this chapter The tester only displays the test modes that are applicable to the vehicle being tested MODE FO Data List F2 DTCs SUBMODE F0 Current DTCs F1 History DTCs F2 Clear DTCs DESCRIPTION Displays Sensors and Input Output data about the current condition of
260. lect the ABS TESTS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Press G to select the MANUAL RELAY AND SOLENOID CONTROL test 3 A display confirming that you have entered the MANUAL CONTROL OF ENABLE RELAYS AND SOLENOIDS is shown for 4 seconds or until the key is pressed 4 A screen explaining which tester keys are used to control the various relays and solenoids is displayed until you press The display changes to the Select Solenoid menu 5 You can select any of six hold or release solenoids by pressing the function key to the left of the solenoid Selecting G allows you to look at the state of the ABS warning light e Gy Left Front Hold Solenoid e GI Right Front Hold Solenoid e GE Rear Hold Solenoid GE ABS Warning Light e Gy Left Front Release Solenoid gt Right Front Release Solenoid e G3 Rear Release Solenoid an Once a specific solenoid is selected use the key to turn the solenoid on and the key to turn it off You can also toggle the state of the enable relays by pressing GON The tester displays the commanded state of the solenoid along with the state of the feedback from the solenoid did the solenoid respond to the command The tester also displays the current state of the enable relays If you selected the ABS Warning Light Gp the tester displays the commanded state for the light along with the state of the enable relays m You can select a new solenoid or the ABS Warning Light without
261. lenoids and enable relay on and off turn the ABS motors on and off and control their direction apply or release and command the Electromagnetic Brake EMB mechanism to Hold or Release Opens shorts to ground and shorts to battery can be confirmed by comparing what is commanded by the tester what the ABS controller sees as a response motor feedbacks and what the actual output is at the actuator When the motor is moving the feedback current is less than the command current When the piston is at the top or bottom of the bore or stuck the feedback current is equal to the command current The solenoids and EMBs are automatically turned off if left on for more than 30 seconds and must cool before being turned back on The motors are automatically turned off after 5 seconds An INHIBITED message is displayed on line 1 if additional cooling time is required To select Manual Control Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Press a to select the Manual Control Test 3 A display confirming that you have entered the Manual Control test is displayed for four seconds or until the key is pressed 4 A screen explaining which tester keys are used to control the various functions is displayed until you press the key If data is being received from the ABS controller the display changes to the function selection menu If no data is received from the ABS controller the tester informs you In this cas
262. ll of the test modes or system selections cannot be displayed on the tester at the same time the tester automatically sequences between all pages of the menu To stop the automatic scrolling press the or key The menu may then be scrolled manually with the and keys Below shows the keys that are active on the tester when selecting an item from either the SELECT SYSTEM or SELECT MODE tester screens ACTIVE KEYS Stop the automatic menu scrolling then sequence to the previous page of the menu Stop the automatic scrolling then sequence to next page of menu Oh Oo Select Test Mode Return to vehicle selection Once you have selected the test mode operation begins Detailed operating descriptions for each test mode are provided in this section and listed according to the ABS or chassis system being tested Please note that not all test modes are available for the various ABS systems GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 110 Mode F0 Data List 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes COMMON TEST MODES The Common Test Mode section contains information about Common Tests that apply to most ABS systems The Common Tests all have the same active tester keys and menu layout for most ABS systems The following modes apply to the Common Test Mode section Data List DTCs e Snapshot Information Additional information may be available for the ABS system you are working on Refer to the specific ABS syst
263. ltage Check ERENNERT KENE EE EEN AE dE NN 281 Kelsey Hayes RWAL ZP RWAL Voltage Check 281 Kelsey Hayes HCH RWAL Voltage Check 281 Moss PT PIE EISE tee qaos work e di ap PA tede d dac OR iude Cd Bae aec 282 Mode F2 Trouble Codes 3 454484 6 aue pu e RAO ACULEGOROOOR ROO ECR TRENA GR 284 RWAL ABS SYSTEMS EXCEPT ZP RWAL AND VCM RWAL 286 Mode T2 MOUE del cicada nee heehee nce dob SE chaque d GOMES 286 VOMRBWALABSSYSIEMS esee cee sheng RE Rm pean ERREUR RR IR Rena 288 Mode POS TOURE COES ech there eh deed rus ded geb Se AE edu ds 288 ZP RWAL ABS SYSTEMS EE 289 Mode FS EE ek EEN dire EN Ae adsl woe A adr des eh re DECR e 289 Mode F3 OBD Controls 24446006 ius 205 ARE EE EE E EE HEAR NEE AER d 291 po dl MD 293 Moder a BEI CONO ores qiie duis ueque ee vem sauce seiauaa teqq a died indes 293 RWACANDZPRWAL EE 296 Mode Par FSS Monko Ath E dab a bdo aco Bebo ege dic EO RR dh en 296 KEBLSEY HAYES4WAL ABS NEEN tes eese ee Ee Rae 297 1990 92 Light Trucks Except FWD Pans cain dendvndeacav cre birdabcasenbeawae da 297 1993 95 Astro C and K Series G Series Safari S and T Series 297 1994 95 S and T Series Pick up and Sonoma 1995 Blazer and Jimmy 297 Kelsey Hayes RIAL Voltage Check AE EE IEN ELE dod EES cae nea is 298 Mode dob DU LIT l pp ebore doeet beide beibb sb PERRA 298 EE 298 ROC ns o4 05 1 MiEPICCPCPIET PITT 299 Made I ORO CIVA ortda dorian qd ue wenn dudssud zudsdnduda quad ed q
264. lts at a frequency proportional to speed FRT ENABLE RELAY DELCO MORAINE IIl ON OFF The front enable relay provides battery power to the front solenoids for ABS operation If this relay is OFF front Antilock braking is not possible GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 341 Delco Moraine III amp Delco VI ABS C Data List Parameters L FRONT SOLENOID R FRONT SOLENOID DELCO VI ON OFF This parameter indicates the state of the left and right front solenoids The display will show ON if the solenoid is being commanded ON by the ABS controller or OFF if the solenoid is being commanded OFF LEFT FRONT EMB RIGHT FRONT EMB DELCO VI J N L CAR RELEASE HOLD This parameter indicates the controller s commanded state of the left and right front Electromagnetic Brakes EMB The EMB is used to hold the motor shaft until motor movement is required The display will show RELEASE if the EMB is commanded on or HOLD if the EMB is commanded off LF HOLD SOLENOID RF HOLD SOLENOID REAR HOLD SOL DELCO MORAINE IlI STATES ON OFF The hold solenoid is used during Antilock braking to hold brake pressure at the pressure currently being applied to the hydraulic channel specified The rear axle solenoid holds the brake pressure at both rear wheels since they are both on the same hydraulic channel LF HOLD SOL FDBK RF HOLD SOL FDBK REAR HOLD SOL FB DELCO MORAINE III HIGH LOW The hold solenoid feedbacks are used
265. meter indicates the status of the Pump Monitor either ON or OFF GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 345 Bosch ABS C Data List Parameters REAR AXLE SPEED REAR WHL SPEEDS MPH or KPH 0 to 255 Rear wheel speeds are displayed such that the LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED is on the left hand side and the RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED is on the right hand side In some vehicles with Bosch ABS a single sensor is used for the REAR AXLE SPEED instead of left and right wheel speed sensors The rear wheel speeds are generated by the change in flux as a toothed ring passes in front of a variable reluctance sensor A sinusoidal waveform results at a frequency proportional to speed SR1 SPEED RANGE 1 CALIBRATED UNITS RANGE KPH 31 to 65 STATES YES NO The scantool indicates the tire pressure monitor system is calibrated and capable of detection in the applicable range If the parameter states NO the system is not calibrated and is not capable of detecting tire pressures in this speed range SR2 SPEED RANGE 2 CALIBRATED UNITS RANGE KPH 65 to 95 STATES YES NO The scantool indicates the tire pressure monitor system is calibrated and capable of detection in the applicable range If the parameter states NO the system is not calibrated and is not capable of detecting tire pressures in this speed range SR3 SPEED RANGE 3 CALIBRATED UNITS RANGE KPH 95 to 120 STATES YES NO The scantool indicates the tire pressure mo
266. mode FO Solenoid Test Solenoid Valve Pressure Reduction This test activates selected wheel circuit valves in the modulator valve by placing the valve in the pressure reduce position Valve action can be verified by checking appropriate wheel for braking action The scantool indicates whether the valve operated correctly To perform pressure reduce test raise and support vehicle Depress brake pedal Use the scantool to command the PRESSURE REDUCE mode Try to spin the wheel being tested Wheel should spin if solenoid valve reduces pressure Solenoid Valve Pressure Hold This test activates selected wheel circuit valves in the modulator valve by placing valve in pressure hold position Valve action can be verified by checking appropriate wheel for braking action The scantool indicates whether valve operated correctly To perform pressure hold test raise and support vehicle Spin wheel freely Use the scantool to command the PRESSURE HOLD mode Have assistant apply brakes Try to spin the wheel being tested Wheel should spin even with brakes applied due to the hold command Make sure you follow the procedures in the service manual when you are performing this test This test normally takes approximately 15 seconds to perform If the test is performed in less than 1 second or if you see a TEST INHIBITED message displayed on the tester you should cycle the ignition on the vehicle and disconnect and reconnect power to the tester If the S
267. n common test mode descriptions MODE F2 DTCS Trouble codes are stored in the ECU memory and can be displayed in the scantool The ABS ECU also records when the DTC was stored and the ABS status In addition to the DTC number a brief description of the DTC can be displayed DTCs can also be cleared from the ECU memory Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F3 SNAPSHOT The ABS snapshot helps isolate problems of intermittent ABS operation Information is captured before and after a trigger condition The manual and automatic trigger can be selected You will also be allowed to review a stored snapshot from this menu Please refer to the applicable section in common test mode descriptions MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS Submode F0 Manual Control This test is described in the Delco VI UART section of this manual See Submode F0 Manual Control on page 224 Submode F1 Hydraulic Control This test is used to verify base brake apply and ABS release hold and apply functions During testing if a problem is encountered the tester aborts the test and displays the diagnostic trouble code To perform the Hydraulic Control Test do the following 1 Turn the ignition off 2 Raise the wheels to be tested 3 Install the tester 4 Turn the ignition switch to the RUN position 5 Press to select OBD CONTROLS from the menu 6 Press ai to select Hydraulic Control from the OBD CONTROLS menu 7
268. n of the BRAKE and ANTILOCK lamps to Table 5 2 9 If the lamp operation is not normal use Table 5 2 to identify lamp and braking sequence patterns identified from the above 7 tests Then use the appropriate service manual to find the cause of the abnormal condition GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 311 Teves Mark Il ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Vehicle Engine Vehicle stopped running being after immedi driven at normal Ignition ately after approx 20 brake Engine stopped start mph Normal appl idling Ignition Starter e Transaxle e Transaxle brake Transaxle Transaxle ON engaged in park in drive appl in drive in park Vehicle Ignition Status ON Cranking Running Moving Braking Stopped Idle E E ANTI gt LOCK lt AMBER a E BRAKE RED 5 RED Z ke TABLE 5 2 Indicator Lamp Sequence Vehicle Status a Light shading ANTILOCK lamp ON Dark shading BRAKE lamp ON Blank areas no shading Lamp OFF Partially shaded blocks Lamp ON for part of stats period To perform the Ignition ON check do the following 1 With charged accumulator ANTILOCK light comes ON for 3 5 seconds with ignition ON If accumulator is discharged lamp may stay ON for up to 30 seconds 2 BRAKE and ANTILOCK lamps both turn ON during cranking 3 Immediately afte
269. n replaced or serviced Refer to the appropriate vehicle service manual for specific bleeding procedures To select Auto Bleed do the following Raise the vehicle 2 Remove all four tire and wheel assemblies 3 Inspect the brake system for leaks 4 Inspect the brake system for component damage 5 Inspect the battery state of charge 6 Connect the tester to the vehicle DLC 7 Turn the ignition ON 8 Select the AUTOMATED BLEED procedure 9 Bleed the base brake system Refer to the hydraulic brake system bleeding procedure found in the GM service manual for the vehicle you are working on 10 Follow the tester instructions for each ABS channel to complete the test 11 When the Auto Bleed procedure is complete the brake pedal should be high and firm If it is not inspect the brake system for faults If after inspection brake pedal travel 1s still excessive repeat the bleed procedure 12 Disconnect tester from the vehicle DLC 13 Reinstall all four tire and wheel assemblies 14 Inspect the brake fluid level 15 Road test the vehicle NOTE EH If any DTCs are detected the bleed procedure is aborted ACTIVE KEYS Select AUTOMATED BLEED from the OBD CONTROLS menu Scroll up through menu Scroll down through menu Continue test Return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 269 Mode F4 OBD Controls 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes
270. n to the SELECT SOLENOID menu or just press the key for the next wheel that you wish to test 8 To return to the OBD CONTROLS menu press 2440 while the SELECT SOLENOID menu is displayed 9 To return to the SELECT MODE menu press 24g while the OBD CONTROLS menu is displayed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 171 Bosch 5 0 ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TEST F5 TP SENSR LRN SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID TST F1 AUTO TEST F2 LAMP TEST IMPORTANT FOLLOW SERVICE MANUAL STEPS TO DIAGNOSE PRESS 4 SELECT SOLENOID F0 LEFT FRONT F1 RIGHT FRONT F2 REAR AXLE SELECT SOLENOID F0 LF F1 RF F4 LR F5 RR LF SOLENOID TEST PRESSURE HOLD PRESS RELEASE LF SOLENOID TEST PRESSURE HOLD PRESS RELEASE HOLD FUNCTION ON LF SOLENOID TEST PRESSURE HOLD t PRESS RELEASE SOLENOIDS OFF LF SOLENOID TEST PRESSURE HOLD PRESS RELEASE REL FUNCTION ON 15 Sec FIGURE 5 29 Solenoid Test Example ACTIVE KEYS Select SOLENOID TEST or a solenoid for testing Confirm if you wish to continue Solenoid Tests or actuate the pressure hold function Actuate the pressure release function Return to SELECT SOLENOID menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 172 Bosch 5 0 ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Subm
271. nd ANTILOCK warning indicator lights and Driver Information Center DIC CAUTION Once scantool is disconnected ensure ignition is off at least 10 seconds P before road testing vehicle This allows the system to return to normal operation When testing is completed ignition must remain OFF for at least 10 seconds to return ABS system to normal operation MODE F0 DATA LIST Wheel speed and brake switch status parameters are monitored by the scantool The vehicle can be driven while the diagnostic data parameters are being displayed See Mode F0 Data List on page 111 for more information MODE F1 CODE HISTORY In this mode trouble code history data is displayed on the scantool History data includes how many ignition cycles since trouble code occurred brake switch status vehicle speed and ABS state when trouble code occurred Up to 3 trouble codes are included in ABS history data See Mode F2 DTC s on page 113 for more information MODE F2 TROUBLE CODES Trouble codes are stored in the EBCM and are displayed in the scantool Up to 3 trouble codes can be stored in the EBCM The EBCM also records when a trouble code was stored and ABS status when trouble code was set During trouble code display a 3 second delay occurs between each trouble code displayed and a brief description of the trouble code is displayed Trouble codes can also be cleared from the EBCM memory The EBCM also stores other information about troubl
272. nd Abbreviations MXD N C N O NRM Numeric Keys 02 OAT OBD OBD II O D ODO On Board OHC OLF OLL Parameter PAS PCM PFI PGM PHN PK2 PKEY Mixed Door Maximum Normally Closed Normally Open Normal keys 0 1 9 which are used to enter numeric values such as trouble codes These keys double as function keys Oxygen or oxygen sensor Outside Air Temperature Sensor On Board Diagnostic On Board Diagnostics Phase II The California Air Resource Board CARB required that by 1996 all vehicles sold in California under 8500 GVWR contain a certain minimum on board diagnostic capability to diagnose emissions related failures of the engine control system These diagnostic requirements have been designated as OBD II with a goal of monitoring all of the emissions related components on board the vehicle for proper operation Overdrive Odometer Anything which is a permanent part of the vehicle Overhead Cam Oil Life Oil Life Lamp A piece of information which is displayed by the tester Pass Key Telltale Powertrain Control Module Port Fuel Injection Program Cellular Mobile Phone Pass Key 2 Starter Inhibit Pass Key PKL PM III P N POS POT Powermaste r M PRESS PSSR PRSSR PRK PRNDL PROM P S PSI PUR PWM PWR PZM QDM RA RAC RAD RAP R BLM RCV RCVR RECIRC REF REL REQ RES RF Parking Lamps Relay Powermaster III Park
273. nitor system is calibrated and capable of detection in the applicable range If the parameter states NO the system is not calibrated and is not capable of detecting tire pressures in this speed range SR4 SPEED RANGE 4 CALIBRATED UNITS RANGE KPH 120 to 140 STATES YES NO The scantool indicates the tire pressure monitor system is calibrated and capable of detection in the applicable range If the parameter states NO the system is not calibrated and is not capable of detecting tire pressures in this speed range GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 346 Bosch ABS C Data List Parameters SR1 SPEED RANGE 1 LOW TIRE UNITS RANGE MPH 19 to 40 KPH 31 to 65 STATES YES NO The scantool indicates the tire pressure monitor system detects a low tire pressure in the applicable range If the parameter states NO the system has not detected a low tire pressure in the applicable speed range SR2 SPEED RANGE 2 LOW TIRE UNITS RANGE KPH 65 to 95 STATES YES NO The scantool indicates the tire pressure monitor system detects a low tire pressure in the applicable range If the parameter states NO the system has not detected a low tire pressure in the applicable speed range SR3 SPEED RANGE 3 LOW TIRE UNITS RANGE KPH 95 to 120 STATES YES NO The scantool indicates the tire pressure monitor system detects a low tire pressure in the applicable range If the parameter states NO the system has not detected a
274. ntilock brake system is not in operation The pistons must be in the Pistons up home position to bleed the rear brakes To release gear tension from the ABS modulator use the tester to perform the Pistons down release selection CAUTION Refer to the appropriate service manual for complete procedures and e cautions when performing the Pistons down release procedure CAUTION Do not drive or operate the vehicle with the ABS brake control assembly in the Pistons down released position Always perform the Pistons up home before driving the vehicle To perform the Motor Test do the following Turn the ignition ON motor not running 2 Press F0 PISTONS UP HOME to bleed rear brakes and after any pump motor repair 3 Press F1 PISTONS DOWN REL to remove tension from drive gear or pump motor pack GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 253 Delco ABS VI Class 2 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes CAUTION SEE BRAKE SERVICE MANUAL BEFORE CONTINUING IGNITION ON ENGINE OFF MOTOR TEST F0 PISTNS UP HOME REHOMING F1 PISTNS DN REL MOTORS TEST IN AREHOME PROGRESS COMMANDED EXIT GEAR TENSION RELIEF SEQUENCE COMPLETED IMPORTANT RUN PISTONS UP HOME BEFORE DRIVING VEHICLE FIGURE 5 70 Motor Test ACTIVE KEYS PISTONS UP HOME PISTONS DOWN REL Continue test Return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Pa
275. ntly damage the EBCM 3 Wait at least 20 seconds 4 Reinstall the fuse that powers the memory 5 Test drive the vehicle to make sure the problem has been repaired GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 286 RWAL ABS Systems Except ZP RWAL and VCM RWAL 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes CODE2 DETECTED Approximately 5 seconds OPEN WINDING ISOLN VLV SOLNOD OR POSSIBLE ECU MALFUNCTION 5 seconds CHECK VALVE CONNECTIONS amp RESISTANCE 4 OHMS 5 seconds Return to Menu FIGURE 5 84 RWAL ABS Systems ACTIVE KEYS G Used to determine what DTCs to clear Display the next DTC Freeze the display of the latest DTC Terminate DTC display GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 287 VCM RWAL ABS Systems 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes VCM RWAL ABS SYSTEMS MODE F2 TROUBLE CODES Clearing Trouble Codes On vehicles built after August 6 1990 certain detected faults no longer result in the EBCM Latching the red BRAKE warning lamp circuit NOTES The lamp lights only while the fault exists and continues being lit for the rest of the ignition cycle for codes 6 and 9 Code 10 turns OFF when 12 EH volt signal is received from the brake switch After February 1993 only codes 5 13 14 and 15 latch a hard code Use scantool to read soft codes Grounding DLC terminal A to H results in a false code 9 and erases the true code
276. ode F1 Automatic Test The Automatic Test of the Bosch ABS performs a sequence of solenoid valve and pump motor actuations to test various functions within the ABS The results of the test are indicated by trouble codes set during the test The tester automatically displays the trouble codes at the completion of the test If no trouble codes are set the ABS passed the test This test normally takes approximately 6 seconds to perform If the test is performed in less than 1 second or if you see a TEST INHIBITED message displayed on the tester the test did not function properly You should cycle the ignition on the vehicle and disconnect and reconnect power to the tester before rerunning the test If the AUTOMATIC TEST COMPLETE message is not displayed within 30 seconds you probably have a bad connection to the DLC Check the connection cycle the ignition and cycle power to the tester before rerunning the test To select Auto Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing al 2 Select AUTO TEST by pressing a 3 If vehicle speed is detected the tester screen informs you that the test cannot be run while vehicle is moving Ifa current trouble code is set the tester informs you that the test cannot be run On vehicles with TCS if low voltage on the valve relay is detected you are instructed to cycle the ignition and see the service manual 4 Press Gi Misi to begin the Automatic Tests 5 The tester initializes th
277. of the first five faults have occurred The second page informs you how many drive cycles have occurred since the code was last set This information identifies intermittent fault conditions and the degree of intermittence If a fault occurred 1 out of 35 drive cycles an unusual condition may have occurred such as a severe pot hole that caused the fault In any case a fault this intermittent is going to be difficult to locate Up front you know special diagnosis techniques are needed to identify the cause If the fault occurred 10 out of 15 drive cycles your chances of identifying the fault are much greater and re creation is probably much easier Again you know this before an attempt 1s made to identify the cause If the fault occurs every drive cycle the fault is considered a HARD code or is easy to duplicate Diagnosis should be easier Last Failure The last failure that occurred is identified specifically This fault is what brought the customer in for repair Additionally the following information identifies what was happening when the last fault occurred The first screen of information about the last failure indicates the speed the ABS controller believes the vehicle was going at the time the fault occurred An unreasonable number here may lead you to suspect wheel speed sensor problems The status of the brake switch at the time of the fault OFF or ON This tells you if there was any brake application when the fault occurre
278. ollowing 1 Press a from the SELECT SYSTEM menu to test the VES system 2 Press a to select the DUTY CYCLE TEST from the SELECT MODE menu 3 For 1993 D cars press to command the duty cycle to 60 or press to command the duty cycle to 0 while monitoring the feedback current 4 Press CAI to return to the Select Mode menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 181 Bosch 5 0 VES System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT 4TH DIGIT OF VIN CODE BODY TYPE BCDEHJKLNUVWYZ B D or N Body SELECT SYSTEM F0 ABS TCS F1 VES SELECT MODE Ay F0 DUTY CYCLE VES ACTUATOR TST DUTY CYCLE 46 EXIT FIGURE 5 35 Duty Cycle ACTIVE KEYS Ga Select VES from the SELECT SYSTEM menu Select Duty Cycle Test Go to 60 duty cycle 93 D Car only Go to 0 duty cycle 93 D Car only Return to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 182 Bosch 5 0 RSS ELC SWPS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes BOSCH 5 0 RSS ELC SWPS SYSTEM After replacement of the RSS control module the following steps must be performed e RSS control module calibration Steering sensor trim position adjustment Trim height adjustment NOTE New RSS control modules must be calibrated after installation A code S050 or S051 may be stored in memory of new RSS control modules and does not clear until the module is calibrated MODE F0
279. ontrol system To select Flash Codes do the following 1 Press a from the Select System menu to FLASH CODES related to the Selective Ride Control system 2 Press to FLASH CODES on the Selective Ride Control Lamp 3 Press ai to select Clear Codes The tester instructs you to press the key to clear all ride control trouble codes 4 Press CAD to return to the SELECT MODE menu CAUTION When using the MTS 3100 the cigarette lighter adapter must be used to e supply a path to ground GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 144 Bosch 28S Micro Select Ride System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT SYSTEM F0 ABS F1 SELECT RIDE SELECT MODE F0 FLASH CODES F1 CLEAR CODES WATCH SERVICE RIDE CONTROL LAMP CLEAR CODES PRESS 4 FIGURE 5 16 Select Ride ACTIVE KEYS G Choose Select Ride Select Clear Codes Select Flash Codes Clear trouble codes Return to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 145 Bosch 2S Micro Select Ride System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F1 CLEAR CODES The selection CLEAR DTCs or CLEAR CODES is displayed when testing a Y car with Selective Ride Control and when the Select Ride system is selected on the tester When selected the tester erases the Ride Control DTC s that are present Selective Ride Control tests SEL are available for 1989 93 Y Body vehicles The
280. ops below 5 volts the relay 1s operating properly MODE F8 INFORMATION While performing diagnostic routines on the vehicle under test it may be necessary to be provided with quick access information Selecting information mode shall display helpful information about the vehicle or system under test This information may consist of PCM software identification calibration numbers part numbers make date and or system identification information GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 264 ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes DELCO BOSCH 5 0 ABS When wheel slip is noted during a brake application the ABS enters Antilock mode During Antilock braking hydraulic pressure in the individual wheel circuits is controlled to prevent any wheel from slipping A separate hydraulic line and specific solenoid valves are provided for each wheel The ABS can decrease hold or increase hydraulic pressure to each wheel brake However it cannot increase hydraulic pressure above the amount which is transmitted by the master cylinder during braking During Antilock braking a series of rapid pulsations are felt in the brake pedal These pulsations are caused by the rapid changes in position of the desired wheel speed This pedal pulsation is present during Antilock braking and stops when normal braking is resumed or when the vehicle comes to a stop A ticking or popping noise may also be heard as the solenoid valves rapidly cycle During
281. or The tester returns to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 236 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F3 EMB TEST F4 MOTOR TEST F5 GEAR TEN REL PREPARE ABS MODULATOR FOR OFF VEHICLE SERVICE 4 Seconds or keypress PRESS ENTER TO START THE GEAR TENSION RELIEF SEQUENCE ENTER GEAR TENSION RELIEF SEQUENCE COMPLETED IMPORTANT IGNITION MUST BE TURNED OFF BEFORE EXITING When key is turned OFF IGNITION OFF REMOVE MODULATOR PRESS EXIT TO RETURN TO MENU FIGURE 5 61 Gear Tension Relief Test ACTIVE KEYS Select GEAR TEN REL test Scroll to the next page of instructions Start the Gear Tension Relief sequence Return to SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 237 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F6 Relay Test The Relay test controls the enable relay while displaying the switched battery voltage into the ABS Controller This tests allows verification of relay operation NOTE For 1991 N Car the vehicle must be driven at least 4 MPH to allow the system to initialize prior to running this test To select Relay Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Press GP to select the RELAY TEST 3 The tester display confirms that you are in the ABS Enable Relay test The dis
282. or more information MODE F2 TROUBLE CODES Trouble codes are stored in the EBCM and are displayed in the scantool Up to 3 trouble codes can be stored in the EBCM The EBCM also records when a trouble code was stored and ABS status when trouble code was set During trouble code display a 3 second delay occurs between each trouble code displayed and a brief description of the trouble code is displayed Trouble codes can also be cleared from the EBCM memory The EBCM also stores other information about trouble codes such as brake light switch data ABS state vehicle speed and ignition cycles This information can be displayed using the ENHANCED DIAGNOSTIC DATA function This indicates the brake switch status to determine if brake switch was ON or OFF when trouble code was set The ABS state indicates if antilock brake mode was active when trouble code was set The vehicle speed at the time trouble code was set can be displayed Ignition cycles are displayed to indicate how many ignition cycles occurred since trouble code was set See Mode F2 DTC s on page 113 for more information MODE F3 ABS SNAPSHOT The ABS snapshot helps isolate problems of intermittent ABS operation caused by wheel speed sensor signals Information is captured before and after a trigger condition The manual and automatic trigger can be selected See Mode F3 Snapshot on page 117 for more information GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 132 Bosch 2S Micro A
283. ormation about trouble codes such as brake light switch data ABS state vehicle speed and ignition cycles This information can be displayed using the ENHANCED DIAGNOSTIC DATA function This indicates the brake switch status to determine if brake switch was ON or OFF when trouble code was set The ABS state indicates if antilock brake mode was active when trouble code was set The vehicle speed at the time trouble code was set can be displayed Ignition cycles are displayed to indicate how many ignition cycles occurred since trouble code was set See Mode F2 DTC s on page 113 for more information GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 147 Bosch 2U ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F3 ABS SNAPSHOT The ABS snapshot helps isolate problems of intermittent ABS operation caused by wheel speed sensor signals Information is captured before and after a trigger condition The manual and automatic trigger can be selected See Mode F3 Snapshot on page 117 for more information MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS In this mode the ABS test mode performs function tests on ABS system used to verify proper system operation Testing and observing test results can further identify error conditions When in this mode the following tests can be performed FO Solenoid Test Fl Auto Test F2 Lamp Test F3 Pilot Valve Test F4 TCS Test The submodes listed above are described in the following submode sections Sub
284. ormed the tester displays the test results If the test failed re run the Motor Test to verify the results 7 Press A to return to the SELECT TEST menu ACTIVE KEYS Select MOTOR PACK test Advance screen after performing requested action NO Indicate whether or not motors turned Start motor pack diagnosis Return to SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 234 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F4 MOTOR TEST F5 GEAR TENSION F6 RELAY TEST MAKE SURE MOTOR GEARS ARE CLEAR OFALLOBJECTS 4 AUTOMATED ABS MOTOR PACK DIAGNOSIS TURN IGNITION BACK ON 4 Seconds or keypress HAS MOTOR PACK BEEN SEPARATED FROM MODULATOR YES NO PRESS ENTER TO START MOTOR PACK DIAGNOSIS Mu ENTER ARE ALL THREE MOTORS TURNING YES NO MOTOR OR EMB ESB IS DEFECTIVE REPLACE MOTOR PACK GEAR TENSION RELIEF SEQUENCE COMPLETED ALL THREE MOTORS APPLY TO VERIFY RELEASE PRESS ENTER TURN IGNITION TURN IGNITION OFF OFF Key is turned OFF Key is turned OFF ARE ALL THREE MOTORS TURNING YES NO MOTOR OR EMB ESB IS DEFECTIVE REPLACE MOTOR PACK REMOVE MOTOR PACK FROM MODULATOR ASSEMBLY ALL THREE MOTORS RELEASE SEE SERVICE MANUAL TO DETERMINE
285. ot exist for the vehicle being tested an INVALID CODE message is displayed and the code has to be reentered LA AR In addition to offering a trigger condition selection this cartridge offers the option of selecting a trigger point If you select F9 TRIG POINT from the SNAPSHOT OPTION menu the following options is displayed F0 BEGINNING F1 CENTER and F2 END F0 BEGINNING The trigger is at the beginning of the captured data After the trigger occurs the tester continues to capture data until the memory is full then the data is displayed If not enough data samples have been collected to fill the tester memory because the key was pressed before the tester memory was full fewer than the maximum number of samples are saved e F1 CENTER If enough time has elapsed before and after the trigger point a similar number of data samples that occurred before and after the trigger point is available for display However if the trigger occurs at or near the start of the Data Capture phase there are fewer samples before the trigger point available for display Also if the key is pressed after the trigger occurs but before the tester memory is full fewer data samples captured after the trigger point are available for display F2 END Data that occurred before the trigger is displayed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 119 Mode F3 Snapshot 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS IN THE SET UP
286. ouette U X DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS Pontiac Montana U X DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS 2001 MEDIUM DUTY TRUCKS DATA ADAPTER MODEL ERIE YSTEM 9 S P 2 TYPE CONFIG T55 T85 Medium Tilt C T Series Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R 86 0 BBC F6 F7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor C Series Crew Cab D C Series Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R C7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor Bus Commercial T B7 Chassis Kelsey Hayes UART GM 16R Chassis Cowl B7 Hydraulic 4WAL 4 Sensor GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 60 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 2002 VEHICLE COVERAGE 2002 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM M 4TH TER TYPE CONFIG Park Avenue C Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS DRP ICCS3 MSVA TIM Le Sabre H Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS DRP ICCS3 MSVA TIM Century WwW DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TCS MSVA TIM Regal Ww DBC7 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS ETS TCS MSVA TIM 2002 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 4TH RES TYPE CONFIG El Dorado E Delco Bosch 5 0 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS TIM MSVA DeVille K Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS DRP MSVA VSES Seville K Delco Bosch 5 3 Class 2 OBD II C2 ABS TCS DRP MSVA VSES 2002 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH mun TYPE CONFIG Camaro F Bosch 5
287. play automatically scrolls after four seconds or after pressing the key 4 If you are testing a 1991 N Body codes 67 or 71 inhibit this test to protect circuits that might otherwise be damaged If you are testing a 1991 N Body the ABS must be initialized before this test can be performed This is done by driving the vehicle at least 4 MPH The tester displays messages to prompt you to do this 5 The tester displays the keys used to control the Enable Relay the status of the relay whether it is commanded OFF or ON and the current battery voltage as seen by the ABS controller 6 Use the key to turn the Enable Relay OFF and the key to turn the Enable Relay back ON If the relay is commanded OFF the battery voltage should drop to below 5 0V within two seconds If it fails to do this the tester informs you that the relay contacts appear to be closed Consult the service manual to make the necessary repairs 7 Press A to return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 238 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F6 RELAY TEST F7 BATTERY TEST F8 LIGHT TEST TEST OF ABS ENABLE RELAY If you are testing Vehicles a 1991 N Body other than 1991 N Body 4 Seconds or keypress DRIVE VEHICLE ALL FOUR WHEELS MUST BE gt 4 MPH AT THE SAME TIME When you drive vehicle RELAY TEST STOP VEHICLE When you stop
288. plication 1986 2004 Page 258 Tire Inflation Monitor TIM System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes The DBC 7 system uses three possible methods to initialize Ifthe driver s foot is off the brake pedal as the engine is cranked the system is initialized immediately The sound of the engine cranking is louder than the initialization noise Therefore it is very difficult to notice the ABS initialization noise Ifthe driver s foot is on the brake pedal and the car is moving less that 10 mph and the foot is taken off the brake pedal the system is initialized Noise from a moving vehicle tends to mask initialization noise Ifthe driver s foot is on the brake pedal as the car exceeds 10 mph the system initializes at 10 miles per hour Noise from a moving vehicle tends to mask initialization noise The driver may hear a momentary pump motor and solenoid clicking type noise and may feel brake pedal movement if the foot remains on the brake pedal The driver also may perceive a slight loss of braking performance if the car is moving down a sloped driveway as the brake is being applied TIRE INFLATION MONITOR TIM SYSTEM The TIM system looks at wheel speed information from the wheel speed sensors interprets that information and then compares the rolling radius of each tire The system is looking for differences over a period of time If the system sees a wheel speed difference from one wheel it then illuminates the low tire light T
289. plication software If a Snapshot is saved in memory the tester displays the following screen asking if you would like to replay the snapshot before entering the vehicle selection process Replay saved Snapshot data YES NO If you select NO the tester continues and allows you to select the model year and body VIN You can continue testing as normal however if you choose YES the tester displays the saved snapshot GENERAL MOTORS CHASSIS SYSTEMS 1986 2004 vX X ENTER ENTER If Snapshot is Saved Select Replay saved Model Year Snapshot data NO 2004 4 Y ENTER YES NO YES Go to Regular vehicle selection and testing SNAPSHOT TRIGGER OCCURED ON MANUAL KEY PRESS 5 Seconds Go to first frame of Snapshot Dvr Frontal Loop Disabled Pas Frontal Loop Disabled FIGURE 5 8 Class 2 Snapshot Data Display Phase GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 127 Mode F8 Information 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F8 INFORMATION The purpose for the Information test mode is to supply additional information about the vehicle or system under test Information test mode includes System Status System Identification Calibration Identification NOTE Not all ABS systems have the F8 INFORMATION option available SELECT MODE A F8 INFORMATION SELECT DATALIST F0 MODULE INFO 1 F1 MODULE INFO 2 BASE PART NUMBE
290. ply brakes Try to spin the wheel being tested Wheel should spin even with brakes applied due to the hold command Make sure you follow the procedures in the service manual when you are performing this test This test normally takes approximately 15 seconds to perform If the test is performed in less than 1 second or if you see a TEST INHIBITED message displayed on the tester you should cycle the ignition on the vehicle and disconnect and reconnect power to the tester If the SOLENOIDS OFF message is not displayed within 30 seconds you probably have a bad connection to the DLC Check the connection cycle the ignition and cycle power to the tester before rerunning the test To select Solenoid Tests do the following 1 Select ABS TCS TESTS by pressing 2 Select Solenoid Tests by pressing af If vehicle speed is detected the tester screen informs you that the test cannot be run while vehicle is moving GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 133 Bosch 2S Micro ABS ASR System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes LF SOLENOID TEST PRESSURE HOLD iz PRESS RELEASE OLD FUNCTION ON SELECT SOLENOID F0 LEFT FRONT F1 RIGHT FRONT F2 REAR AXLE SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 ABS TCS TESTS F5 TP SENSR LRN SELECT ABS TEST F0 SOLENOID TST F1 AUTO TEST F2 LAMP TEST IMPORTANT FOLLOW SERVICE MANUAL STEPS TO DIAGNOSE PRESS A SELECT SOLENOID F0 LF FIRE F
291. r a Class 2 line Thermal modeling is another parameter that the TCS uses to decide of the TCS should be engaged or not Thermal modeling is an algorithm in the EBTCM that estimates brake rotor temperature If drive time speed and the number of deceleration events add up to a specified value the TCS is shut down until the brakes cool off While the TCS is OFF a Trac light is illuminated ABS functions are still maintained there is no degradation in ABS performance ETS WARNING LAMP The amber TRAC OFF warning lamp is illuminated during the bulb check and also is illuminated if the ETS is disabled The amber LOW TRAC lamp illuminates when ETC is active and does not illuminate when ABS is active Some vehicles have a Trac Off switch to disengage the ETS ETS can be disengaged by using one of the following methods Selecting Drive range D2 or D1 This is useful when the vehicle is stuck in the mud or snow Set the parking brake to the first click This is useful when performing and emission test when the car must be run on a dynamometer Setting the parking brake tells the EBCM to avoid ETS for the current ignition cycle SELF TEST At the beginning of every ignition cycle the system tests itself for proper operation The DBC 7 unit checks all of the electronics actuates all the solenoids and runs the pump motor to ensure that the system is ready for use This self test is performed every time the engine is started GM Chassis Ap
292. r engine starting ANTILOCK lamp turns ON for 3 5 seconds 4 Both lamps should remain OFF at all other times GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 312 Teves Mark Il ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes AWD Differential LOCK NORMAL Switch Q E ES 3 lt 3 S E O 3 z S Z EI o ES 3 o o GD 3 E S E 2 E E 2 bw S S s E o ES E S X amp E z z S g S S S 9 2 o E O a o Ei a 2 BRAKE Red OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ANTI Amber ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON LOCK THEN THEN THEN OFF OFF OFF LOCK Amber OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FLASH OFF NORMAL SWITCH LOCK Amber OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON THEN THEN ON OFF TABLE 5 3 Warning Indicator Lamp Sequence a LOCK NORMAL switch set to NORMAL To perform the Normal Sequence check do the following 1 With ignition ON ANTILOCK warning lamp comes ON for 3 5 seconds if accumulator is charged ANTILOCK warning lamp may stay ON for up to 30 seconds if accumulator is discharged lock locks the differential 6 When LOCK NORMAL switch is moved back to NORMAL ANTILOCK warning lamp remains ON for 3 5 seconds and then go OFF Switch indicator lamp immediately stops flashing and remains OFF BRAKE and ANTILOCK warning lamps turn ON during cranking Immediately after t
293. r on page 75 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 73 Setting Up the Tester 4 Getting Started TECH 1 Before you operate the Tech 1 do the following 1 Make sure the vehicle ignition is OFF 2 Connect the tester DLC formerly called the ALDL cable to the tester and tighten the screws NOTE If you are testing a vehicle with an RWAL or 4WAL system you must use O a revised 12 pin DLC cable P N 02001578 to connect the tester to the vehicle The revised cable is easily identified by the power port built into the connector on the vehicle end of the cable The revised cable works with all other vehicle systems and tester cartridges 3 Insert the application into the Master Cartridge slot on the bottom rear of the tester Verify that no other Master cartridge is installed in the tester FIGURE 4 3 Inserting a Cartridge into the Tech 1 Application Cartridge i or Mass Storage Cartridge MSC 4 Install the appropriate adapter to the tester DLC cable Refer to Adapter and Adapter Cable Configurations on page 80 for information on selecting the correct adapters 5 Locate the vehicle s DLC Connect the DLC cable or the adapter attached to the end of the DLC cable to the vehicle Continue to Powering Up the Tester GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 74 Powering Up the Tester 4 Getting Started POWERING UP THE TESTER 1988 95 vehicles equipped with a 12 pin DLC require powering the tes
294. raction Control System TCS Test both the Pilot Valve s and Pump Motor can be turned on while a technician manually tries to turn the drive wheels To select TCS Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS from the Select Mode menu by pressing al 2 Select TCS TEST by pressing 3 The tester display informs you that the Pilot Valve test should be run before performing the TCS test If necessary run the Pilot Valve test 4 Make sure the drive wheels have been securely raised then press to begin the TCS test The pump motor and pilot valve s are run for 25 seconds then automatically turned off TEST COMPLETE is displayed by the tester at the completion of the test See the Service Manual for further information 5 Press 3A to return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 156 Bosch 2U ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 OBD CONTROLS F5 TP SENSR LRN If E K V Car If D Y Car SELECT TEST SELECT TEST F3 PILOT VALVE F3 PILOT VALVE F4 TCS TEST F4 ASR TEST PILOT VALVE PILOT VALVE TEST SHOULD BE TEST SHOULD BE RUN FIRST RUN FIRST Display for 4 Seconds Display for 4 Seconds or Advance with or Advance with Key Press Key Press TCS TEST ASR TEST DRIVE WHEELS DRIVE WHEELS MUST BE OFF MUST BE OFF GROUND 4 GROUND 4 e TEST RUNS PUMP TEST RUNS PUMP amp PILOT VALVE S amp PILOT VALVE
295. release the switch The low tire light stops flashing and goes out The auto learn process must be repeated If the tires are rotated if the pressure is change or if a different tire is installed the system must be reset Also check tires for roundness and for damage A fully inflated out of round or damaged tire can affect RPK enough to illuminate the low tire light GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 259 Magnetic Speed Variable Assist MSVA 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MAGNETIC SPEED VARIABLE ASSIST MSVA Magna Steer Variable Assist MSVA steering is imbedded in the EBCM EBTCM MSVA gives the driver a better steering feel and an improved steering effort At low speeds the system provides more steering assist so that the driver does not have to work to turn the steering wheel At higher speeds MSVA actually puts resistance in the steering system so that is a little more difficult for the driver to turn the steering wheel Primarily MSVA gives extra effort at parking lot speeds and better road feel at highway speeds The MSVA circuitry is housed in the EBCM EBTCM The EBTCM controls power steering assist by commanding a current from 1 6 amps to 3 amps to the MSVA actuator in the steering rack The MSVA actuator is polarized so that 1 6 amps provides full assist 0 amps provides some assist and 3 amps provides steering resistance MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS SUBMODE F0 SOLENOID TEST Solenoid Test Inlet
296. ress to command the duty cycle to 60 or press to command the duty cycle to 0 while monitoring the feedback current 4 Press CAD to return to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 158 Bosch 2U VES System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT 4TH DIGIT OF VIN CODE BODY TYPE BCDEHJKLNUVWYZ B D or N Body SELECT SYSTEM F0 ABS TCS F1 VES SELECT MODE Ay F0 DUTY CYCLE TEST VES ACTUATOR TST DUTY CYCLE 46 EXIT FIGURE 5 23 Duty Cycle ACTIVE KEYS Ga Select VES from the Select System menu elect Dut cle Select Duty Cycle TEST t o to o duty cycle Car only Go to 60 d le 93 D C I o to 0 duty cycle Car only 4 Go to 0 d le 93 D C ly EXIT Return to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 159 Bosch 2U VES System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F4 OBD CONTROLS Submode F1 VES Test This test mode is available when testing 1993 96 D and Y body vehicles equipped with Bosch ABS systems with Variable Effort Steering VES This test allows you to diagnose the VES actuator The Variable Effort VE steering ECU outputs a signal which controls the amount of power steering assist relative to the vehicle s speed At low speeds the power steering assist is increased to improve maneuverability At higher speeds the amount of assist is decreased to improve road feel To do thi
297. returning to the SELECT SOLENOID menu by pressing the appropriate function key The solenoid you were controlling is turned off automatically Press 2A to return to the SELECT SOLENOID menu Step 7 Press MI again to return to the SELECT TEST menu oo If a solenoid is turned ON and not turned OFF for 60 seconds the tester NOTE automatically turns it off A cool down period of up to 30 seconds is provided after a solenoid 1s turned off If you try to turn the solenoid back EH on before this time expires you see an INHIBITED message display on the top line of the tester You cannot turn the solenoid on until INHIBITED goes away GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 203 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT ABS TEST F0 MANUAL CNTRL F1 AUTO BLEED F2 HYDRL CNTRL MANUAL CONTROL OF ENABLE RELAYS AND SOLENOIDS 4 Seconds or TURN SOL ON TURN SOL OFF ENTER RLY ON OFF YES TO CONTINUE SELECT SOLENOID 3 Seconds F3 ABS LITE CMD FO LF HOLD F4 LF RELEASE F1 RF HOLD F5 RF RELEASE F2 REAR HOLD F6 REAR RELEASE LF HOLD SOLENOID LF RELEASE SOL CMD STATE OFF CMD STATE OFF FDBK STATE LOW FDBK STATE HIGH ENAB RELAYS ON ENAB RELAYS ON ABS WARNING LITE LIGHT CMD OFF ENAB RELAYS ON FIGURE 5 46 Manual Relay and Solenoid Control GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 204 Delco Moraine AB
298. rs to be open to adequately bleed the system Second it cycles the TCS modulator to move any trapped air in the modulator to the top of the unit so that it can be removed during the bleeding process The BLEED PREP function is available only for 1996 through 1998 DELCO ABS VI UART systems that have ABS TCS with the UART Protocol To select Bleed Prep do the following 1 From the ABS TCS or SELECT MODE screen press to begin the bleed prep procedure 2 Follow the instructions provided on the screen of the tester NOTES Do not perform the BLEED PREP function if there are DTC s present Always refer to the appropriate service manual before performing any ABS diagnostics or repairs Bleeding Tips After any hydraulic component service bleeding the system is required Pressure bleeding is the preferred bleeding method although manual bleeding can be used as an alternative It is essential that you always follow the Service Manual procedures The bleeding procedure on Delco ABS VI with Traction Control is a two step BLEED PREP sequence using the MTS 3100 The first step homes the ABS and traction control modulator pistons THIS FUNCTION IS TURN IGNITION USED TO PREPARE OFF THE ABS TCS SYS A FOR BLEEDING ABS TCS MOTOR REFER BACK TO REHOME COMMANDED SERVICE MANUAL TO CONT BLEED REHOMING MOTORS PROCEDURE A DO NOT PROCEED UNTIL INSTRUCTED TO DO SO BY THE SERVICE MANUAL REHOM
299. s the Variable Effort VE steering ECU drives a solenoid with a variable duty cycle signal With the tester you can display the duty cycle of this signal A low duty cycle corresponds to a high degree of power assist while a high duty cycle means a low amount of assist For 1993 D Cars you can control the duty cycle while monitoring the feedback current For vehicles other than 1993 D Cars the tester displays the current value of the actuator duty cycle of the control signal on DLC Pin D If there are no communications on Pin D the tester displays one of two messages If a duty cycle is not detected the tester displays NO DUTY NOTE CYCLE PRESENT This could be due to a fixed voltage at Pin D or an open circuit to Pin D If Pin D is shorted to ground the tester displays PIN D ALWAYS LOW Also the tester displays the NO DUTY CYCLE PRESENT message if VE steering is not installed on the vehicle or no pin is in cavity D of the DLC connector To select the VES test do the following 1 Once you are in the VES system of a D or Y car ABS selection press af to select OBD CONTROLS from the VES SELECT MODE screen This initiates the VES test 2 Follow the instructions as prompted on the screen of the tester NOTE Refer to the vehicle manufacturer s service information when performing this test GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 160 Bosch 2U VES System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes
300. s GM ABS Eighty Eight H Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS 1987 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SISTEM Ree N CONFIG 6000 STE Teves Mark II Flash Codes ABS 1988 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1988 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SSES TYPE CONFIG Electra Park Avenue C Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Reatta E Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Riviera E Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Regal W Delco Moraine III UART GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 10 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1988 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SES TYPE CONFIG DeVille Fleetwood C Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Eldorado E Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Seville K Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS 1988 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS 1988 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MOREL 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG 98 Regency C Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS Eighty Eight C Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Tornado E Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Cutlass Supreme Ww Delco Moraine Ill UART GM ABS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT pr TYPE CONFIG 6000 STE A Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS 6000 STE AWD A Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS Bonneville H Teves Mark Il Flash Cod
301. s do not display data parameters ABS TELLTALE VCM RWAL ON OFF The ABS Telltale parameter indicates the status of the ABS Telltale lamp If the parameter displays ON but the Telltale is not on there is a problem in the ABS Telltale lamp or circuit BRAKE ENABLE RELAY VCM RWAL STATES ON OFF The Brake Enable Relay parameter displays the state of the brake relay The system uses the relay to deactivate the antilock functions when a system malfunction occurs BRAKE SWITCH VCM RWAL ON OFF The Brake Switch parameter displays the state of the brake switch BRAKE TELLTALE VCM RWAL ON OFF The Brake Telltale parameter indicates the status of the brake telltale lamp If the parameter displays ON but the telltale is not on there is a problem in the brake telltale lamp or circuit GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 349 Kelsey Hayes RWAL AWAL ABS C Data List Parameters DRIVE STATUS 4WAL 2WD 4WD The Drive Status parameter indicates whether 2WD or 4WD has been selected DUMP VALVE VCM RWAL ON OFF The Dump Valve parameter displays the state of the dump valve IGNITION 3 VCM RWAL PRESENT ABSENT The Ignition 3 parameter displays PRESENT if ignition voltage is available for the brake system ISOLATION VALVE VCM RWAL ON OFF The Isolation Valve parameter displays the state of the isolation valve LF FRONT RESET REAR RESET RT FRONT RESET 4WAL OPEN CLOSED Thes
302. s equipped with 4 3L engine and a manual transmission RWAL system is controlled by the Vehicle Control Module VCM VCM is located behind glove box Power for ABS portion of VCM is provided by brake enable relay located behind instrument panel NOTE For identification purposes RWAL system has a Black connector top on EB the controller and ZP RWAL has a Gray connector top on the controller ZP RWAL RWAL Grey Colored Black Colored Connector Top Connector Top FIGURE 5 80 RWAL Connectors The ECU or EBCM receives signals from the stoplight switch and a speed sensor located in the transmission on 2WD vehicles or in transfer case and front axle switch on 4WD vehicles The VCM used on 1993 S and T Series pickup equipped with 4 3L and manual transmission receives input signals from pressure differential switch located on combination valve and reset switch which is part of antilock pressure valve On all vehicles speed sensor signal is sent through a Vehicle Speed Sensor VSS buffer located behind glove box On most vehicles VSS buffer is actually a part of the Digital Ratio Adapter Controller DRAC although the 2 terms may be used interchangeably If axle ratio or tire size is changed VSS buffer must be reprogrammed to match axle ratio or tire size as necessary The RWAL brake system is disabled when vehicle is in 4WD if equipped GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 279 Kelsey Hayes RWAL All Vers
303. s or gain of tire pressure occurs in any of the four tires It allows the driver to display all four tire pressures and the tire locations on the Driver Information Center DIC while the vehicle is being driven The system uses the remote control door lock receiver RCDLR and a radio frequency RF transmitting pressure sensor inside each wheel tire assembly to measure and collect tire pressure information The sensors transmit once every 60 seconds to minimize sensor battery consumption The RCDLR sends the tire pressure and location data to the DIC via the serial data circuit where tire pressures and their locations can be displayed When the TPM system detects a significantly under or over inflated tire the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message is displayed on the DIC The sensor s pressure accuracy from 10 to 70 C 14 to 158 F is plus or minus 14 kPa 2 psi The TPM system can also compensate for high and low altitudes using the PCM s manifold absolute pressure MAP sensor input via the serial data circuit VEHICLE STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM VSES The Vehicle Stability Enhancement system VSES is activated by the electronic brake control module EBCM which calculates the desired yaw rate and compares it to the actual yaw rate input The desired yaw rate is calculated from measured steering wheel position vehicle speed and lateral acceleration The difference between the desired yaw rate and actual yaw rate is the yaw rate error
304. s the Snapshot Data Capture phase early and the SNAPSHOT mode moves to the Data Display phase FRONT WHL SPEEDS FRONT WHL SPEEDS SNAPSHOT TRIGGER FRONT WHL SPEEDS 55 MPH 56 MPH 43 MPH 42 MPH OCCURED ON 41 MPH 41 MPH REAR WHL SPEEDS REAR WHL SPEEDS MANUAL KEY REAR WHL SPEEDS 55 MPH 56 W 42 MPH 42 T PRESS 40 MPH 40 0 Waiting for Trigger Trigger Occurs Trigger Occured On Display Data Phase FIGURE 5 6 Snapshot Data Capture Phase SNAPSHOT DATA CAPTURE ACTIVE KEYS G Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark top displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Ga Mark bottom displayed parameter as fixed for creating your own data pairs Toggle between MPH and KPH display G3 Manual trigger Manual trigger Manual trigger or Display captured data if trigger has already occurred GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 123 Mode F3 Snapshot 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes To select Snapshot Data Display phase do the following 9 The Data Display phase is indicated with a number initially zero in the lower right hand corner of the display Select the data to be displayed by using the and Q9 keys 10 Delco Moraine ABS III and Delco ABS VI systems only The current trouble codes present during each sample can be displayed by pressing The trouble codes automatically scroll once then the display returns to the Data Display list A C at the en
305. s to be fixed at the same time As an example let s say you wish to create a pair with FRONT WHEEL SPEED and VEHICLE SPEED To do so scroll through the pre programmed pairs with the or Qe key until you find a pair with FRONT WHEEL SPEED Fix FRONT WHEEL SPEED by pressing af since it is the top parameter Then scroll the other half of the display with the key until VEHICLE SPEED is displayed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 112 Mode F2 DTC s 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes FRONT WHL SPEEDS 55MPH 55 MPH REAR WHL SPEEDS 55MPH 55 MPH FIXES TOP PARAMETER FIXES BOTTOM PARAMETER FIGURE 5 2 Data Pair Display Parameters FRT ENABLE RELAY ON REAR ENABL RELAY ON DATA LIST PARAMETERS Appendix C of this manual lists some examples of the parameters which can be displayed in the DATA LIST mode along with their units for some of the systems which can be tested Some of the parameters are discrete parameters they can only have two values and their units are the descriptors for the states they can have For example the REAR ENABLE RELAY is either ON or OFF ACTIVE KEYS G Scroll through displayed data parameters Mark the top display parameters as fixed for creating your own pairs Ga Mark the bottom display parameter as fixed for creating your pairs F7 oggle between English an etric units vs Toggle b English and Metric units MPH vs KPH G3 Outpu
306. set at the beginning of every diagnostic session You can use the TROUBLE CODE mode to display IPC or ABS trouble codes that have been set by the vehicle You can also use the TROUBLE CODE mode to clear the codes set by the IPC or ABS after the codes have been displayed To select Trouble Codes do the following 1 N Select TROUBLE CODES mode by pressing If the Vehicle s ECM fails to respond to the scantool within 3 seconds the scantool displays NO COMMUNICATION WITH ECM CHECK CABLE Under these conditions you should Verify that the ignition is in the ON position Check the connection to the Data Link Connector DLC If this message persists check for a shorted serial data link or faulty ECM Once data has been received the scantool displays each code for 3 seconds Freeze the display by pressing and advance to the next code by pressing the The scantool displays IPC codes followed by ABS codes If the IPC or ABS is not installed the scantool displays NO IPC DATA or NO ABS DATA The ABS controller provides information identifying codes as either current or history codes A current code is a fault that is currently present in the vehicle while a history code refers to a fault that is no longer present The scantool distinguishes between current and history ABS codes by displaying C or H after the code number ABS Fault Isolation 3 The scantool performs analysis on th
307. sing aD 3 The tester display informs you that the Pilot Valve test should be run before performing the ASR test If necessary run the Pilot Valve test 4 Make sure the drive wheels have been securely raised then press to begin the ASR test The pump motor and pilot valve s are run for 25 seconds then automatically turned off TEST COMPLETE is displayed by the tester at the completion of the test See the Service Manual for further information 5 Press 3A to return to the SELECT ABS TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 140 Bosch 2S Micro ABS ASR System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 ABS TCS TESTS F5 TP SENSR LRN BS TEST VALVE ST PILOT VALVE TEST SHOULD BE RUN FIRST Display for 4 seconds or advance with keypress ASR TEST DRIVE WHEELS MUST BE OFF GROUND TEST RUNS PUMP amp PILOT VALVE S FOR 25 SECONDS START 25 second time out ASR TEST COMPLETE FIGURE 5 14 ASR Test ACTIVE KEYS Select ASR Test from the ABS TCS Select Mode menu Begin the ASR Test EXIT Return to SELECT ABS TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 141 Bosch 2S Micro ABS ASR System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F5 TP SENSOR LEARN This test applies to 1992 93 Y Cars If a new Throttle Position Sensor TPS or Throttle Body is installed EBTCM must learn
308. sition Observe the BRAKE and ANTILOCK lamps Both may light for approximately 30 seconds If this occurs wait until both lamps turn OFF and repeat Step 1 and this step Both may light for more than 30 seconds If this occurs go to step 3 The ANTILOCK lamp should light for 3 to 6 seconds and then turn OFF The BRAKE and ANTILOCK lamp should not light Parking brake released If this occurs go to step 3 3 Turn the ignition switch to the Start position Observe the BRAKE and ANTILOCK lamps They should both be lit 4 When the engine starts release the ignition switch to the Run position Observe the BRAKE and ANTILOCK lamps The BRAKE lamp should turn OFF immediately The ANTILOCK lamp should light for 3 to 6 seconds and then turn OFF 5 Drive the vehicle above 20 miles per hour for a short time Observe the BRAKE and ANTILOCK lamps Both lamps should remain OFF Note the conditions related to either lamp lighting 6 Stop the vehicle using a normal brake application Observe the BRAKE and ANTILOCK lamps Both lamps should remain OFF Note the conditions related to either lamp lighting 7 Allow the vehicle to idle for several seconds Observe the BRAKE and ANTILOCK lamps Both lamps should remain OFF Note the conditions related to either lamp lighting 8 Compare the operatio
309. sive pedal travel or spongy pedal Antilock lamp inoperative at key on Antilock lamp DIM or inoperative Brake lamp inoperative during cranking Valve cycling chatter during normal stops Low or spongy brake pedal Poor vehicle tracking during Antilock Stops ANTILOCK braking operation or valve cycling during normal stop on dry pavement Wheel speed sensor output Right rear wheel speed sensor output Left front wheel speed sensor output Left rear wheel speed sensor output Right front wheel speed sensor output Poor vehicle tracking during ANTILOCK Solenoid valves vehicle starts moving braking Left front valve Right front valve Rear valves 2 Continuous ANTILOCK Pinout check Normal BRAKE lamp Must use break out box J 35592 3 ANTILOCK lamp comes ON after Left front wheel speed sensor Right front wheel speed sensor Right rear wheel speed sensor Left rear wheel speed sensor Continuous BRAKE lamp 4 No ANTILOCK lamp while cranking ANTILOCK lamp DIM or INOP during cranking Normal BRAKE lamp Must use J 35592 Pinout box 5 No ANTILOCK lamp while ANTILOCK lamp INOP at key on Normal BRAKE lamp Must use J 35592 Pinout box 6 Intermittent ANTILOCK while driving ANTILOCK lamp ON and NO ABS codes present Normal BRAKE lamp Must use J 35592 Pinout box 7 Continuous ANTILOCK lamp BRAKE and ANTILOCK lamps ON Continuous BRAKE lamp 8 Continuous ANTILOCK BRAKE lamp ON
310. ssistant 1s applying pressure to the brake pedal To select Solenoid Test do the following 1 Ignition OFF position 2 Install scantool 3 Turn ignition to the RUN position 4 Raise vehicle such that wheels are about 6 inches off the floor with the transmission in neutral 5 Have an assistant press and hold the brake pedal 6 Select SOLENOID TEST from the SELECT TEST menu 7 Select the Hold or Release command for the wheel position under test Command the hold or release solenoid ON by using the UP arrow on the scantool 8 Attempt to move the wheel being tested by hand it should move even though the assistant is applying pressure to the brake pedal The front wheels may be difficult to turn by hand but can be moved if the system is working properly GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 190 Bosch 8 0 ABS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT CONTROL F0 Solenoid Test F1 Auto Bleed Put vehicle in park Press ENTER to continue ENTER SOLENOID TEST 0 LF Inlet LF Outlet RF Inlet RF Outlet LR Inlet LR Outlet RR Inlet RR Oulet LF Outlet VI Sol INACTIVE LF Inlet VI Sol INACTIVE OFF LF Outlet VI Sol INACTIVE LF Inlet VI Sol INACTIVE FIGURE 5 39 Example of Submode FO Solenoid Test ACTIVE KEYS Select Solenoid Test from SELECT CONTROL menu Select inlet or outlet valve to test Scroll up through menu or activate selected solenoi
311. st do the following Raise and support vehicle Remove wheels Inspect brake system for leaks or damage Repair as necessary before continuing Bleed base brake system N Ensure battery is fully charged Connect scantool to Data Link Connector DLC Turn ignition ON engine OFF Select F4 Auto Bleed and press GUE Tests are performed to determine Antilock Brake System Traction Control System ABS TCS condition If no faults are detected go to step 5 If faults are detected the bleed procedure is aborted go to next step LA If Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs are present scantool displays DTCs Present or list DTCs depending on when DTCs were set Select F2 DTC CODES to display or clear codes AR If DTC code s are set see appropriate DTC Chart under DIAGNOSTIC CHARTS If bleed procedure was aborted but no DTCs are set perform system Functional Check UA Install Bleeder Adapter J 35589 to brake master cylinder Pressurize bleeder to 30 PSI an Have an assistant continuously pump brake pedal making long steady strokes Press p Place proper size box end wrench over left rear bleeder valve Attach one end of clear tube over valve and submerge other end in container partially filled with clean brake fluid NOTE While bleeding each circuit the tester displays and flashes the TEST IN PROGRESS message for up to 2 minutes 7 Loosen left rear brake valve Press GO Tighten bleeder valve when
312. st Modes FUNCTION TEST CK FLUID LEVEL CK SET PRK BRAKE PRESS ENTER SELECT SYSTEM F0 DATA LIST F1 FUNCTION TEST F2 TROUBLE CODE APPLY AND HOLD BRAKE TO ACTUATE TEST TEST IS BEING CONDUCTED NO CODES TEST COMPLETE ADVANCE Y HOLD CODE XX DESCRIPTION FIGURE 5 83 Example of RWAL Mode F1 Function Test ACTIVE KEYS ENTER Cause the next screen of instruction to be displayed EXIT Return to SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 283 Kelsey Hayes RWAL All Versions 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F2 TROUBLE CODES To check Trouble Codes do the following 1 Turn ignition ON wait 5 seconds and observe the BRAKE warning light If the BRAKE warning light is ON go to next step If BRAKE warning light is OFF use the scantool to retrieve trouble codes 2 Turn ignition OFF Connect the scantool to DLC Access RWAL brake trouble codes by selecting OG from the Select Mode menu The scantool only displays the last recognized soft History codes Repair trouble codes in order they appear When one trouble code is diagnosed and repaired it is necessary to access RWAL brake trouble codes again to check for more stored trouble codes Hard Codes and Soft Codes Hard Current codes indicate an existing problem in the RWAL brake system Soft History codes indicate a problem that occurred in the past Hard Current
313. st Modes Submode F2 Lamp Test This test is only available for all 1992 93 Y Cars The Lamp Test mode allows you to control certain lamps on and off with the tester in order to determine the operational status of the lamp s circuit switch and bulb To select Lamp Test do the following 1 Select ABS TCS TESTS from the Select Mode menu by pressing 2 Select LAMP TEST by pressing 3 For 1992 93 Y Cars a menu of lamps that can be tested is displayed Select a lamp from the menu then use the key to turn the lamp on or the key to turn the lamp off 4 Press BALB to return to the LAMP TEST menu SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 ABS TCS TESTS F5 TP SENSR LRN SELECT ABS TEST F0 SOLENOID TST F1 AUTO TEST F2 LAMP TEST 1992 93 Y Car LAMP TEST F0 SERVICE ABS F1 ABS ACTIVE F2 SERVICE ASR F3 ASR ACTIVE F4 ASR OFF LAMP TEST SERVICE ABS A ON y 7 OFF FIGURE 5 12 Lamp Test ACTIVE KEYS G Select Lamp Test from the ABS TCS Select Mode menu Select a lamp to test s Control the selected lamp on or off Return to LAMP TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 137 Bosch 2S Micro ABS ASR System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F3 Pilot Valve Test This test applies to 1992 93 Y Cars CAUTION mE To perform the following test both vehicle drive wheels must be securely raised or unintended vehicle movement occurs that could
314. st display If after five seconds there is still no communication the tester displays messages indicating the cause of the fault GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 111 Mode F0 Data List 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes If you are testing a Bosch system a wait timer of up to 40 seconds is displayed if there is no communication 5 Press 3A to return to the SELECT MODE menu More Data Parameters REAR RELEASE SOL OFF REAR REL SOL FB LOW FRONT WHL SPEEDS 55 MPH 56 MPH REAR WHL SPEEDS 55 MPH 56 MPH SELECT MODE Y F0 DATA LIST F1 CODE HISTORY F2 TROUBLE CODE VEHICLE SPEED 55 MPH ABS BATT VOLTAGE OK FOR OPER More Data Parameters FIGURE 5 1 Selecting Data List Parameters CREATE YOUR OWN DATA PAIRS You can create data parameter pairs different from the pre programmed pairs Any two parameters from the current data list can be made into a pair New data pairs are created by simply scrolling either the top or bottom display parameter while the other display parameter is fixed Pressing causes the top display parameter to be fixed which is indicated with an in the left column of the second line of the display as shown in Figure 5 2 Pressing causes the bottom display parameter to be fixed as shown in Figure 5 2 To unfix the top parameter press a Press a to unfix the lower parameter The tester won t allow both the top and bottom parameter
315. stem the tester automatically performs a voltage check on pin H of the DLC connector If system voltage is normal 8 15 volts the tester advances to the SELECT MODE menu Examples of tester screens that might appear if an incorrect voltage is detected are shown in Figure 5 82 CHECK FOR CHECK BATTERY CHECK OPEN SHORT IN CHECK CONNECTION ALTERNATOR FOR VSS CIRCUIT BETWEEN OVER CHARGING OR BLOWN FUSE DRAC amp RWAL ECU AND BATTERY lt 1 5 VOLTS 1 5 8 VOLTS gt 15 VOLTS FIGURE 5 82 Incorrect Voltage Detected Messages If the system voltage is greater or less than the 8 to 15 volt specification the tester does not permit you to continue until the fault is corrected and voltage is within the normal range KELSEY HAYES VCM RWAL VOLTAGE CHECK Engine Codes Present If engine codes 51 53 or 55 have been set the tester instructs you to clear the codes before testing Press 228 2 9 to continue ENGINE CODES 5 Seconds CODES ARE SET 51 53 55 CLEAR CODES ARE PRESENT BEFORE TESTING PRESS ENTER Ignition 3 Circuit Check If Ignition 3 circuit voltage is not detected you are asked to check for an open or short condition in circuit 340 and for a blown brake fuse Press 240 to continue CHECK FOR 5 Seconds CHECK FOR BLOWN OPEN SHORT IN BRAKE FUSE CIRCUIT 340 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 281 Kelsey Hayes RWAL All Versions 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F1 FUNCTION TEST RWAL and Z
316. switch circuit 13 14 15 H EBCM malfunction 17 Brake enable relay circuit VCM RWAL applications only TABLE 5 1 RWAL ABS DTCs a H Hard Code IS Ignition latched soft code CS Condition latched soft code Before 1991 model year Before 1993 model year GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 285 RWAL ABS Systems Except ZP RWAL and VCM RWAL 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes RWAL ABS SYSTEMS EXCEPT ZP RWAL AND VCM RWAL MODE F2 TROUBLE CODES Clearing Trouble Codes On vehicles built after August 6 1990 certain detected faults no longer result in the EBCM latching the red BRAKE warning Lamp circuit NOTES The lamp lights only while the fault exists and continue being lit for the rest of the ignition cycle for codes 6 and 9 Code 10 turns OFF when 12 A volt signal is received from the brake switch After February 1993 only codes 5 13 14 and 15 latches a hard code Use scantool to read soft codes Grounding DLC terminal A to H results in a false code 9 and erase the true code To clear Trouble Codes do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch OFF 2 Remove the fuse that powers the memory e Cand K series HD remove the STOP HAZARD fuse 1993 S and T series pickup equipped with the 4 3L and manual transmission from the ECM B or VCM B fuse CAUTION Failure to turn the ignition key OFF before removing the fuse can permane
317. t DATA LIST parameters to a printer If using the Tech 1 the RS232C I F Cartridge must be installed ENTER Return to Select Mode menu MODE F2 DTC S For 1993 and later vehicles Trouble Codes are referred to as Diagnostic Trouble Codes DTCs Trouble codes or Diagnostic Trouble Codes the two terms have the same meaning in this manual are set when an abnormal condition is detected They are the keys to diagnosing many of the problems which can occur in the vehicle Therefore you should look to see if any trouble codes are set at the beginning of every diagnostic session You can use the DTCs mode to display trouble codes which have been set by the vehicle You can also use the DTCs mode to clear the codes after the codes have been displayed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 113 Mode F2 DTC s 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes To display Trouble Codes do the following 1 Verify that the ignition is in the ON position 2 Select DTCs mode by pressing 3 If the vehicle s ABS fails to respond to the tester within 6 seconds or within approximately 45 seconds for Bosch ABS the tester displays TROUBLE CODES NO DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS ECU Under these conditions you should Cycle power on the tester Cycle the vehicle s ignition and leave it in the ON position e Verify that the vehicle contains an ABS system Check the connection to the DLC If this message persists you sho
318. t also provides a means for an external test device such as the tester to communicate with the components for the purpose of performing diagnostics on the components In some cases the ABS controller is the only component connected to the SDL while in other cases a variety of components share the SDL In addition to the ABS these components may include the Engine Control Module ECM the Body Computer Module BCM the Instrument Panel Cluster IPC and the Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning HVAC module The tester gains access to the SDL via pin M or L on the Data Link Connector DLC Once it is connected it becomes part of the vehicle s electronic system the same as the other components The testing which the tester performs on the ABS systems is usually done with the SDL components in the diagnostic mode normal mode on some vehicles In this mode the tester becomes the master device of the Serial Data Link and controls communications on the SDL This means that the tester can send commands to the components ECM IPC and ABS and have them respond accordingly The tester can command a component to perform a special function e g command the ABS controller to turn on a solenoid or it can command the component to send it certain information e g ABS trouble code information One diagnostic mode is the DLC data list mode In this mode the tester commands the component to send it a set of diagnostic parameters The DLC data
319. t caution you against abusing or overusing this test 5 When ABS VOLTAGE TEST is displayed on the tester screen start the engine and leave the transmission in park neutral Press amp B to continue the test 6 The tester asks you to press on the brake pedal firmly Do so and the tester display informs you of the current ABS ignition voltage and the ABS battery voltage Press to start the test If the Voltage Load test has just been performed you may have to wait up to 60 seconds for the components to cool before the test can be run again If you attempt to run the Voltage Load test again too soon the tester displays a warning and also displays a countdown timer of how long before the test can be run again 7 The test takes 6 to 10 seconds to complete during which time you must keep the brake pedal depressed The tester informs you that the test is in progress When the tester concludes the test the results of the tests are displayed 8 Press 3A to return to the Select Tests menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 240 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT TEST F6 RELAY TEST F7 VOLTAGE LOAD F8 LIGHT TEST TEST FOR ADEQUATE BATTERY CAPACITY FOR ABS OPERATION ONLY RUN TEST WHEN DIRECTED TO BY SERVICE MANUAL 4 Seconds or e keypress ABS VOLTAGE TEST IMPORTANT DO NOT ABUSE THIS TEST ABS VOLTAGE TEST START ENGINE
320. ter via the DC Power Cable Connect the DC Power Cable to the vehicle cigarette lighter or the optional Battery Adapter Cable which connects to the vehicle battery When testing a 1995 to present vehicles equipped with a 16 pin DLC the tester is powered through the DLC Cable except when using a Tech 1 tester Continue to Selecting the Application SELECTING THE APPLICATION 1 Once the tester is powered one of the following screens is displayed Vetronix Corp Vetronix Corp High Capacity General Motors 16MB MSC vX X Diagnostics c 2004 ENTER c 2004 vX X 16MB Mass Storage General Motors Cartridge MSC Diagnostic Cartridge Press or wait two seconds to proceed to the Applications menu screen If the display is not correct see Appendix A The available software applications are displayed APPLICATIONS GM P T GM CHASSIS GM BODY 2 Select the application If your application is on a MSC use the and keys to move the cursor arrow and press Gas If the application is on a MAC select the function key next to the desired application The GM Body Systems title screen is displayed GENERAL MOTORS CHASSIS 1986 2004 Vx x ENTER GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 75 Selecting the Application 4 Getting Started 3 If the display is correct turn the ignition ON and you are ready to proceed with selecting the vehicle model year Continue to Selecting the Model Year on page 77
321. tester prompts you to enter certain information such as the model year the type of vehicle being tested the system you wish to test and other specific information How to enter the information is explained in Chapter 4 Once the information is entered a Select Mode menu is displayed showing the test modes available for the selected vehicle Only test modes available for the selected vehicle are displayed in the menus Not all test modes described in this manual are available for every vehicle DATA LIST The Data List mode displays Sensors and Input Output data reflecting the current operating conditions for various chassis systems Examples include Wheel Speed sensor data Vehicle Speed and Brake Switch status DTC S DTC s mode displays Diagnostic Trouble Codes recorded by the chassis ECU The ability to Clear DTC information is also found in this mode GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 1 GM ABS Systems 1 GM Chassis Application Description SNAPSHOT Snapshot mode gives you the ability to capture Data List information for later analysis Trigger point and trigger type are selectable by the user OBD CONTROLS OBD Controls mode provides the ability for bi directional control of a component or device ON and OFF reset memory values or write to vehicle memory Examples include Solenoid tests Auto Bleed and Tire Size Re calibration INFORMATION Information mode displays helpful information about the vehicle or s
322. the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 246 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Ay F3 SNAPSHOT F4 ABS TESTS F5 MOTOR REHOME Ignition below 10 5V BE SURE ENGINE KEY IS IN THE RUN POSITION Ignition above 10 5V 10 seconds SWITCHED IGN LESS THAN 10 5V AT ECBM REPAIR AS NECESSARY Ignition above 10 5V Wheels turning TEST CANNOT BE RUN WHILE VEHICLE IS MOVING Wheels stopped Brake depressed REMOVE FOOT FROM BRAKE Brake released Codes present MOTOR REHOME COMMANDED ABS DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE S PRESENT MOTOR REHOME CANNOT BE EXIT REHOMING MOTORS 3 Seconds 3 Seconds MOTOR REHOME COMPLETE PERFORMED REPAIR AS NECESSARY SEE SERVICE MANUAL 3 Seconds FIGURE 5 66 Motor Rehome GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 247 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes MODE F6 BLEED PREP The BLEED PREP function is available only on DELCO ABS VI systems that have ABS TCS with the UART Protocol According to the factory GM Service Manual this procedure must always be performed prior to bleeding a DELCO ABS VI brake system The procedure is broken into two parts First the BLEED PREP function returns all of the hydraulic modulator pistons to their home positions This allows all hydraulic circuits inside the modulato
323. the System ID 3 The tester displays information about the Delco VI ABS controller on three tester screens a System identification screen b Configuration ID and data code c PROM ID and build sequence number This information may be referenced by service manuals or service bulletins It can be used to determine that the correct ABS controller is installed in the vehicle It may also be used for warranty purposes B The tester continuously scrolls through the three screens at 4 second intervals The display can be frozen by pressing the key and unfrozen by pressing the key 5 Press 3A to return to the OBD CONTROLS menu SELECT TEST F8 SYSTEM ID DELPHI ABS VI PRESS ENTER TO CONTINUE PROM ID DATE CODE SEQUENCE CALIB ID 33 GD keys scroll through system information FIGURE 5 71 System ID ACTIVE KEYS GJ Select ABS VERSION from SELECT TEST menu Continue to next screen G Scroll through system information Return to the SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 256 ABS Warning Lamp 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes DBC 7 The DBC 7 is a combined Antilock Braking ABS and Traction Control System TCS The DBC 7 system has the following features ntegrated Hydraulic Control Unit HCU and Electronic Controller e HCU that uses solenoids and a pump Positive pedal feedback during ABS braking events Instead of motors and gears the DBC
324. the flow chart demonstrates a hard fault that is currently present since there have been 0 drive cycles since it occurred and it occurred on 5 of the last 5 drive cycles In the example the last failure is the same as the second failure since only two failures had occurred It is also possible for the last failure to be the same as the first because the first is an intermittent problem and could possibly cause another trouble code to be set after the second failure has been set Press AA to return to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 221 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Ay F0 DATA LIST F1 DTC HISTORY F2 TROUBLE CODE LAST FAILURE CODE 42 WAS SET AT 55 MPH THE BRAKE WAS ON FIRST FAILURE CODE 27 WAS SET 1 OF LAST 14 DRIVE CYCLES 5 Seconds 5 Seconds BRAK T TALE ON BRAK SW SEEN SPEED 25 MPH amp ABS NOT ACTIVE FIRST FAILURE CODE 27 WAS LAST SET 14 DRIVE CYCLES AGO 5 Seconds 5 Seconds WHEN CODE XXX WAS LAST SET THERE HAVE BEEN XXX DRIVE CYCLES SECOND FAILURE CODE 42 WAS SET 5 OF LAST 5 DRIVE CYCLES 5 Seconds 5 Seconds SINCE THIS LAST FAILURE REPAIR VEHICLE PRIOR TO CLEARING CODES SECOND FAILURE CODE 42 WAS LAST SET ODRIVE CYCLES AGO 5 Seconds FIGURE 5 54 F1 DTC History DELCO ABS VI UART A
325. the hold solenoid during Antilock braking to release brake pressure from the hydraulic channel specified The brake pressure in both rear wheels is released at the same time since they are both on the same hydraulic channel LF REL SOL FDBK RF REL SOL FDBK REAR REL SOL FB DELCO MORAINE III HIGH LOW These release solenoid feedbacks are used to verify proper electrical operation of the solenoid identified The feedback state represents the voltage the controller sees at the solenoid when the enable relays are on If the solenoid is commanded on by the ABS controller the feedback state should be LOW ground If the solenoid is a commanded off the feedback state should be HIGH battery voltage The feedback states are used to identify and isolate faults in the solenoid circuits The feedback state may not always coincide exactly with the solenoid state due to delays within the ABS PUMP MOTOR DELCO MORAINE IlI ON OFF CIRCUIT OPEN The Powermaster III pump motor state is an input to the Antilock brake controller The pump motor state identifies the current state of the Powermaster III pump motor If the pump motor circuit is OPEN the pump motor state 1s invalid and cannot be used REAR ENABLE RELAY DELCO MORAINE IlI ON OFF The rear enable relay provides battery power to the rear solenoids for ABS operation If this relay is OFF no Antilock braking will be available GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 343
326. the identification of improper accumulator switch points low pump output and Powermaster III internal leakage Because the timer starts when the ignition key is turned on it is extremely NOTE important that the Powermaster III be completely pumped down Follow the directions on the reservoir lid and be sure the brake pedal is HARD J before beginning the test The tester identifies excessive pump run times greater than 60 seconds by displaying an EXCESSIVE PUMP RUN TIME message To select Pump Run Time Test do the following 1 Select the ABS TESTS by pressing from the Select Mode menu 2 Select PUMP MOTOR test by pressing Gj 3 Press ai to select MONITOR TOTAL PUMP RUN TIME TEST 4 If ignition is ON turn the key OFF for at least 5 seconds 5 With the key OFF pump down Powermaster III until pedal is hard then turn ignition ON The tester automatically measures the time from the ignition being turned on to the minimum acceptable brake pressure and then measures the time until the pump shuts off 6 Press 3A to return to select PUMP MOTOR TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 212 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 4 Seconds or MONITOR TOTAL PUMP RUN TIME 0 PRESS TO MAX SYSTEM PRESSURE PUMP PWR UP TEST TURN IGN OFF amp WAIT 5 SECONDS IGNITION TURNED OFF WITH KEY OFF PUMP DOWN PM III UNTIL PEDAL HARD
327. the new TPS idle Position Voltage This learn procedure is necessary to ensure effective engine torque reduction during ASR operations To select TP Sensor Learn do the following 1 Select F5 TP SENSOR LRN from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to acknowledge that you wish to run the TP Sensor Learn procedure TP SENSOR LEARN IN LA PROGRESS is displayed while the TP Sensor Learn function is being performed If the tester successfully resets the EBTCM TP SENSOR LEARN COMPLETE is displayed for 4 seconds then the Select Mode menu is displayed If the tester does not accept the TP Sensor Learn command or if a trouble code is stored you are instructed to turn the ignition off then turn it back on After the ignition is cycled the tester attempts to run the TP Sensor Learn test again If the process is successful the tester informs you that TP Sensor Learn is complete If the TP Sensor Learn function is still unsuccessful the tester informs you either that the TP Sensor Learn test failed and that you should refer to Section SEI of the Service manual or you are informed that trouble codes are present and to press to view the codes Resolve the cause of the trouble codes then run TP Sensor Learn again 4 Press SMIB to return to the SELECT MODE menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 142 Bosch 2S Micro ABS ASR System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 MISC TEST F5 T
328. tic functions It is suggested that you read this manual completely before operating the tester and the Chassis System Software VEHICLE COVERAGE 1986 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1986 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT PXOTEM TYPE CONFIG Electra Park Avenue C Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS 1986 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODED 4TH DIGIT SE TYPE CONFIG DeVille Fleetwood C Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 8 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1986 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SAFTEN TYPE CONFIG 98 Regency C Teves Mark Il Flash Codes GM ABS 1986 PONTIAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SALE ae CONFIG 6000 STE Teves Mark Il Flash Codes ABS 1987 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1987 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Electra Park Avenue C Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS 1987 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 4TH DIGIT SIREM TYPE CONFIG DeVille Fleetwood C Teves Mark II Flash Codes GM ABS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 9 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1987 OLDSMOBILE PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODERE 4TH DIGIT SSES TYPE CONFIG 98 Regency C Teves Mark II Flash Code
329. tion 1986 2004 Page 23 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1993 BUICK PASSENGER CARS CONTINUED Reatta E Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS TCS w out 4 3L Riviera E Bosch 2U UART GM ABS TCS w 4 3L Riviera E Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS TCS w out 4 3L Le Sabre H Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS TCS Skylark N Delco VI UART GM ABS Regal W Delco VI UART GM ABS 1993 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SES TYPE CONFIG Deville C Teves Mark IV UART GM ABS TCS Fleetwood D Bosch 2U UART GM ABS TCS VES Brougham D Bosch 2U UART GM ABS TCS VES Eldorado E Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS RSS ELC Eldorado E Bosch 2U UART GM ABS TCS w 4 6L RSS ELC Seville K Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS RSS ELC Seville K Bosch 2U UART GM ABS TCS w 4 6L RSS ELC Allante V Bosch 2U UART GM ABS TCS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 24 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1993 CHEVROLET PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT SNP TYPE CONFIG Caprice B Bosch 2U UART GM B ABS Camaro F Delco VI UART GM ABS Cavalier J Delco VI UART GM ABS Beretta L Delco VI UART GM ABS Corsica L Delco VI UART GM ABS Lumina W Delco VI UART GM ABS Corvette Y Bosch 2S Micro UART GM B ABS ASR SEL 1993 GEO PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN ADAPTER 4TH DIGIT STOARM CONFIG Prizm Delco VI UART AB
330. tion cycle when vehicle reaches approximately 4 mph The scantool performs this test automatically during ABS tests mode The auto test cycles each solenoid valve and pump motor to check component operation If failure exists EBCM sets a trouble code and activate the ABS light This test normally takes approximately 6 seconds to perform If the test is performed in less than 1 second or if you see a TEST INHIBITED message displayed on the tester the test did not function properly You should cycle the ignition on the vehicle and disconnect and reconnect power to the tester before rerunning the test If the AUTOMATIC TEST COMPLETE message is not displayed within 30 seconds you probably have a bad connection to the DLC Check the connection cycle the ignition and cycle power to the tester before rerunning the test To select Auto Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing a 2 Select AUTO TEST by pressing a 3 If vehicle speed is detected the tester screen informs you that the test cannot be run while vehicle is moving Ifa current trouble code is set the tester informs you that the test cannot be run On vehicles with TCS if low voltage on the valve relay is detected you are instructed to cycle the ignition and see the service manual 4 Press Ui to begin the Automatic Test 5 The tester initializes the test then automatically cycle each solenoid and pump motor 6 The tester informs you when the test is
331. tire at the floor and draw a line on the floor adjacent to the mark on the tire Move the vehicle one revolution of the tire so the mark on the tire contacts the floor at the same position as previously At the point the mark on the tire contacts the floor draw another line Finally measure between the two lines This is the tire circumference Next the tester prompts you to obtain the axle ratio Find the axle ratio code stamped on the axle housing or on the SERVICE PARTS IDENTIFICATION sticker in the glove box Nn 6 After entering the tire circumference and axle ratio drive the vehicle 50 mph using the calculated speed on the tester screen NOTE Vehicles with manual transmissions should be driven in 4th gear automatic transmissions should be driven in 3rd gear 7 The tester calculates the speed using engine rpm and the entered axle ratio and tire circumference The screen displays ECM RWAL and CALCULATED mph The axle ratio and tire size is displayed at the bottom of the screen as a reminder GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 291 ZP RWAL ABS Systems 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes ACTIVE KEYS Select 2 5L engine VIN code E Ga Select all others Oh E All number keys Cause the next screen of instruction to be displayed Return to Select OBD Controls Mode Submode F1 Brake Switch Test The purpose of the Brake Switch Test is to determine if there is a malfunction in
332. tridge and perform the tester Self test refer to the tester OPERATORS MANUAL NO DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS CONTROLLER TROUBLE CODES NO DATA RECEIVED FROM ABS ECU Most Likely Cause Tester cable is not plugged securely into DLC GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 334 Install Bosch ABS Adapter B If You re Having a Problem Other Possible Causes Ignition switch is not in RUN Ignition has been cycled without cycling tester power Bosch ABS only Serial data link is shorted or open circuited ABS is malfunctioning Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Verify that tester is plugged securely into DLC Cycle power on the tester and then cycle the ignition Verify that ignition is in RUN Check for serial data link shorted or open If you are testing a Bosch ABS system also look for a shorted or open diagnostic enable circuit pin H on the DLC cable Remove the cartridge and perform the tester Self test refer to the tester OPERATORS MANUAL INSTALL BOSCH ABS ADAPTER DATA LIST MODE INSTALL BOSCH ABS ADAPTER Most Likely Cause Bosch ABS Adapter not installed Other Possible Causes Bosch ABS Adapter malfunctioning Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Verify that Bosch ABS Adapter is plugged securely into DLC cable Check continuity on Bosch ABS Adapter Pins C and D on tester end connected together Pin A on tester end connected to pin A on vehicle end Pin
333. ts moving 3 Normal BRAKE lamp BRAKE See 3 Table 5 5 Lamps Ign ON Cranking Running Moving Braking Stopped Idle No ANTILOCK lamp while cranking ANTILOCK Normal BRAKE lamp 4 See 4 Table 5 5 BRAKE Lamps Ign ON Cranking Running Moving Braking Stopped Idle No ANTILOCK lamp Normal BRAKE lamp ANTILOCK See 5 Table 5 5 5 BRAKE Lamps Ign ON Cranking Running Moving Braking Stopped Idle Intermittent ANTILOCK while ANTILOCK driving 6 Normal BRAKE lamp BRAKE See 6 Table 5 5 Lamps Ign ON Cranking Running Moving Braking Stopped Idle Continuous ANTILOCK lamp ANTILOCK Continuous BRAKE lamp 7 See 7 Table 5 5 BRAKE i TABLE 5 4 Lamp Sequence Table GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 314 Teves Mark Il ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SYMPTOM LAMP SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION Lamps Ign ON Cranking Running Moving Braking Stopped Idle Continuous ANTILOCK ANTILOCK Normal BRAKE lamp 8 See 8 Table 5 5 BRAKE Lamps Ign ON Cranking Running Moving Braking Stopped Idle Normal ANTILOCK lamp ANTILOCK Continuous BRAKE 9 lamp BRAKE See 9 Table 5 5 TABLE 5 4 Lamp Sequence Table GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 315 Teves Mark Il ABS 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SYMPTOM DESCRIPTION PERFORM SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS TESTS FOUND IN VEHICLE SERVICE MANUAL 1 Exces
334. tte lighter power intermittent Tester is malfunctioning Recommendations Cycle power to the tester unplug and re plug the cigarette lighter adapter Check tester cartridge socket and cartridge edge connector Check DLC cable and connector for wear and corrosion REPAIR SERVICE NOTE If you are having a problem with your tester unit read the operating instructions carefully to ensure that you are operating the unit properly Avoid the inconvenience of returning a non defective unit for repair It is advisable to exercise the Self test procedures in the tester Operators Manual to determine if a problem exists If it is determined that a problem exists or you have any questions call 1 800 321 4VTX USA GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 338 C DATA LIST PARAMETERS The tester is capable of displaying data parameters in Data List and Snapshot modes Parameters displayed in Snapshot mode are the same as those displayed in Data List mode with the addition of a time and index stamp showing where the data occurred relative to the Snapshot trigger There are two basic types of parameters parameters that can be displayed in one two or three different states e g On Off On Off Circuit Open or analog parameters that represent quantities and are displayed as a value with appropriate units Volts Amps MPH KPH Following is a description of some parameters that can be displayed using the 1986 to present GM Chass
335. u can also select the location of the trigger point TRIGGER POINT The Trigger Point menu allows you to specify which data to capture data that occurs before and or after the point at which the trigger occurs If no trigger point is selected the center trigger point is used and a similar number of data samples before and after the trigger is saved TRIGGER CONDITION The trigger condition defines the specific circumstances under which you want the trigger to occur The possible trigger conditions are NOTE Trigger selections mentioned below may not be available for all ABS EB applications MANUAL TRIGGER While operating the snapshot mode you can always cause the trigger to occur by pressing the a CUE or GED keys AUTOMATIC TRIGGER This trigger condition is not available for Kelsey Hayes 4WAL systems The tester examines the ABS data and triggers the snapshot if an abnormal condition occurs The ABS automatic trigger feature is intended to identify deviations in data or input signals that may not set an ABS code If an automatic trigger condition is encountered it may provide information to support customer complaints of irregular ABS performance or intermittent ABS warning lights The automatic trigger occurs if one of the following conditions exists A sudden change in speed of one wheel Be sure you are driving at a constant speed on a clean dry smooth surface when a trigger occurs Spinning the tires locking
336. ua dud he 300 GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 TOC v Mode DAHON Ate vss 1s cde EE ba ERU eae Reda gp deck ted ae 306 Real Time Dampening Variable Effort Steering RTD EVO 307 MODE F0 DATA LIST ag deemed re de dett xD matt Rod da a ncn 307 MODE EZ DICS be ike bee wet EE ead dic idend ew Rura be 307 MODE FS SNAPSHOT eege nk ned iret e oe e a dad 308 PI OBDCONTROLS serataning ae puer ek don secet cei Ret pis doa 308 SEENEN RER vd s cae wad aye cae mannan a Bem nuke eae e RU e 308 Teves Mark ABS See ce os es gu err xac x HE Y a Oc EX ceres 310 TIEVESMABKILABS Inoltre ont oe eate tr e o ad E RO AS eh 310 Teves Mark HH Lamp Sequence TOBRO oskar tatt t eate eee eed ERE ERR E EO C 310 Teves Mark HABS Using ScanTUU E dee d e RR AR SR RP b TE da 317 Mode PH HOW TO REGO EE 319 Woe RI Test EE 320 Mode EE oddsesseqecem Sed de qvod dadsqeduaquamqaquamued dada 321 Mose CR DFCI sapieri gege EB P dab diede ipae dde d 322 TEVES MARK IV ABS TCS usse ese NETRE que he beet 323 JunLosk Bonus LIA auae ERA ASA ACIER TERT RR EVER TRE ARAATRR A 323 AMO PTT aarpasrquark wow eos qus dato ar e iuris Pie dg Ed rdc Be bdo 323 Mode Far DICOS REELLE DERAAE ULLA PARR ARD ERED EE AE HORE 323 Mode PS ISO augen decent dde AR so dede d dc b dicil buh ache dd ra ee RU Rod 324 Model OBD CORTON sexes uae idet de bbc d ege EE dd 324 O SENG L eege ed Ede a rd 330 A ABS COMMUNICATION 246243423 cheb 09 2 ddud d d dada 331
337. uld check for a shorted serial data link or a faulty ABS ECU If you are testing a Bosch ABS system also look for a shorted or open diagnostic enable circuit pin H on the DLC cable With Delco ABS VI systems this can happen 1f power or ground is not available to the ABS controller Refer to the Diagnostic Circuit Check in the service manual 4 Once data has been received the tester displays each code for 3 seconds You can freeze the display by pressing the key Pressing causes the tester to sequence to the next code Refer to the Service Manual for a description of the trouble codes 5 Most ABS ECUS provide information identifying codes as either current or history codes Acurrent code is a fault which is currently present in the vehicle during this ignition cycle e A history code refers to a fault which occurred during a previous cycle The tester distinguishes between current and history ABS codes by displaying C or H after the code number 6 Some ECUS provide additional History Code information that displays the most likely cause of the code This information is displayed immediately after the ABS code display has been completed C1211 HISTORY ABS WARNING LAMP CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION Code Clearing 7 After all trouble codes and ABS fault isolation messages have been displayed the tester prompts you to CLEAR ABS CODES If you press Qe the software returns to the Select Mode menu C1211 HISTORY ABS WARNING LAMP
338. unctions to be manually controlled F3 PUMP MOTOR The following functions allow you to test the pump motor F0 RUN CYCLE Measures the time that the ABS pump is on F1 TOTAL TIME When the ignition is turned on measures the time it takes for the ABS pressure to reach an acceptable level and the time before the pump shuts off F2 LEAK DOWN Provides a means of measuring Powermaster III internal leakage and accumulator precharge F3 CYCLES WITHOUT BRAKE APPLY Counts the number of pump runs without the brake being applied and measures the time interval F4 ABS VERSION The ABS Version function displays data about which version of the ABS controller is installed in the vehicle GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 202 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F0 Manual Relay and Solenoid Control This feature allows you to control the ABS solenoid enable relays and solenoids for the purpose of trouble shooting Opens shorts to ground and shorts to battery can be confirmed by comparing what is commanded by the tester what the ABS controller sees as the response solenoid feedbacks and what the actual output is at the solenoid Solenoids are automatically turned off if left on for more than 60 seconds and must cool before being turned back on An INHIBITED message is displayed if additional cooling time is required To select Manual Relay and Solenoid Control do the following 1 Se
339. ut of range realign sensor 7 Follow user instructions on scantool screen NOTE This procedure requires the function to be performed with the key ON and EH the engine OFF GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 187 Bosch 5 0 RSS ELC SWPS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE F0 RSS CALIBRATE F1 ELC TRIM SET F2 SWPS STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR RECALIBRATION PRESS ENTER ENTER ENSURE VEHICLE IS ON A FLAT AND LEVEL SURFACE BE SURE ENGINE IS OFF AND IGN KEY IS IN THE RUN POSITION IS VIN CORRECT XXXXXXXXX AY STRAIGHTEN FRONT WHEELS SEE SERVICE MANUAL AV REMOVE EXCESS WEIGHT FROM VEHICLE SEE SERVICE MANUAL AY TEST IN PROGRESS STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR RECALIBRATION IS COMPLETE FIGURE 5 38 Steering Wheel Position Sensor Adjustment 1995 96 Cadillac with RSS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 188 Bosch 8 0 ABS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes BOSCH 8 0 ABS SYSTEM The Bosch 8 0 Antilock Brake System increases directional stability and the steer ability of the vehicle and provides optimum deceleration in severe braking conditions The ABS monitors wheel speeds and controls brake line pressure to eliminate uncontrolled skidding The Bosch 8 0 ABS system consists of the Electronic Brake Control Module EBCM Brake Pressure Modulator Valve BPMV solenoid valves pump motor
340. vehicle RELAY TEST A ON_ Y OFF RELAY CMD ON BATTERY 12 9V RELAY TEST A ON Y OFF RELAY CMD OFF BATTERY 0 9V If voltage fails to drop when relay is commanded OFF RELAY CONTACTS APPEAR TO BE CLOSED REPAIR AS NECESSARY FIGURE 5 62 F6 Relay Test ACTIVE KEYS If code 67 or 71 set TEST CANNOT BE RUN DUE TO PRESENCE OF CURRENT CODE F6 Select RELAY TEST from the SELECT TEST menu Turn relay ON Turn relay OFF Return to SELECT TEST menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 239 Delco ABS VI UART 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F7 Voltage Load Test NOTE EB This test does not apply to vehicles with Traction Control In the Voltage Load test you can energize many of the ABS components to create a significant current draw Ignition voltage and ABS battery voltage are then monitored If one or both voltages drop significantly appropriate messages are displayed to direct you to the required area or service To select Voltage Load Test do the following 1 Select OBD CONTROLS by pressing af from the Select Mode menu 2 Press to select the VOLTAGE LOAD Test 3 The tester display confirms that you are in the ABS Voltage load test The display automatically scrolls after four seconds or after pressing the key 4 Press the key to sequence through the three message displays tha
341. wheel speeds are displayed such that the LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED is on the left hand side and the RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED is on the right hand side The front wheel speeds are generated by the change in flux as a toothed ring passes in front of a variable reluctance sensor A sinusoidal waveform results at a frequency proportional to speed PEDAL TRAVEL RELEASED 40 DOWN This parameter indicates whether the brake pedal 1s being partially or fully depressed or if it is released GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 348 Kelsey Hayes RWAL AWAL ABS C Data List Parameters REAR WHL SPEEDS UNITS RANGE Rear wheel speeds are displayed such that the LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED is on the left hand side and the RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED is on the right hand side The rear wheel speeds are generated by the change in flux as a toothed ring passes in front of a variable reluctance sensor A sinusoidal waveform results at a frequency proportional to speed On the rear wheels the sensor ring assembly is contained within the rear integral wheel bearing assembly SERVICE PROTOCOL This parameter defines the protocol used by the ABS controller and is reserved for future use SOFTWARE VERSION This parameter displays the software version of the PROM that is installed in the Teves ABS controller KELSEY HAYES RWAL 4WAL ABS At present only 4WAL and VCM RWAL ABS systems are capable of displaying data parameters 1988 92 RWAL and 1993 ZP RWAL system
342. which regulates the amount of power steering fluid flow provided by the vehicle s power steering pump The tester can monitor the EVO actuator Duty Cycle and retrieve and clear the system controller s trouble codes Some applications allow you to view other related parameters associated with the EVO system on the screen of the tester EVO systems are typically found on vehicles equipped with Bosch Delco ABS VI and Teves ABS systems MSVA Magna Steer MSVA steering system varies the driver effort required to steer the vehicle as vehicle speed changes MSVA controls the torque on the input rotary shaft of the steering gear using current controlled by the ABS EBCM Magna Steer systems can be found on vehicles with Delco VI and Delco Bosch ABS systems The tester when plugged into the Data Link Connector can perform the following functions Display Magna Steer Diagnostic Data Parameters Display and Clear Magna Steer Diagnostic Trouble Codes TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEMS ASR ETS and TCS The tester can diagnose GM s traction control systems Acceleration Slip Regulation ASR Enhanced Traction Systems ETS and Traction Control Systems TCS by displaying Diagnostic Trouble Codes and diagnostic data parameters Various vehicles equipped with these systems can be tested by controlling outputs for enhanced diagnostic testing ELECTRONIC SUSPENSION ELC RSS RTD SEL ICCS AH The tester can read and display data Diagnostic Trouble Co
343. x 3 Press E to select the CYCLES W O BRAKE APPLY test 4 Depress the brake pedal until the pump motor runs then release pedal Pump runs until accumulator is fully pressurized and then shut off DO NOT DEPRESS BRAKE PEDAL AFTER PUMP SHUTS OFF The tester displays the number of pump runs and the total elapsed time This test can be run for as long as four hours 5 Press CA to return to PUMP MOTOR test menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 216 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes 4 Seconds MONITOR NUM OF or WITH IGNITION ON PUMP RUNS WITH DEPRESS BRAKE NO BRAKE APPLY UNTIL THE PUMP POSS CODE 56 MOTOR RUNS BRAKE DEPRESSED lt PUMP RUNNING gt RELEASE BRAKE IF BRAKE PRESSED TEST WILL END PUMP STOPS TEST IN PROGRESS LEAVE IGN ON TIME XX XX PUMP TURNS ON TEST IN PROGRESS PUMP RUNS 1 TIME XX XX PUMP RAN xx xx IGN TURNED OFF BRAKE IS DEPRESSED TEST ENDED TEST ENDED NO ABS DATA BRAKE DEPRESSED PRESS 4 TO PRESS 4 TO SEE TEST RESULTS SEE TEST RESULTS TEST RESULTS PUMP RUNS x TIME XX XX PUMP RAN xx xx RETURN TO ABS PUMP TEST SELECTION FIGURE 5 52 ABS Spurious Pump Run Test EXIT Terminate test and return to PUMP MOTOR test menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 217 Delco Moraine ABS III 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F4 ABS Version This
344. y Hayes UART GM R 4WAL 3 Sensor 4WAL PCM L M Van L M Kelsey Hayes UART GM R 4WAL 3 Sensor 4WAL PCM RWAL Tracker E J Kelsey Hayes UART GM R RWAL ZP RWAL VCM RWAL 1995 GM ALL PURPOSE PASSENGER VEHICLES BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL 5TH DIGIT SYSTEM TYPE CONFIG Lumina Venture U X Delco VI UART GM Tran Sport Silhouette ABS VES GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 36 Vehicle Coverage 3 Vehicle Coverage 1996 VEHICLE COVERAGE 1996 BUICK PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL YSTEM 9 4TH DIGIT TYPE CONFIG Century A Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Roadmaster B Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 Wagon B Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS VES GM 16 Park Avenue C Delco Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA GM 16 Riviera G Teves Mark IV UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS GM 16 Le Sabre H Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS MSVA GM 16 Skylark N Delco VI UART OBD II C2 ABS GM 16 Regal W Delco VI UART OBD Il C2 ABS VES GM 16 1996 CADILLAC PASSENGER CARS BODY VIN DATA ADAPTER MODEL SYSTEM 4TH DIGIT TYPE CONFIG Fleetwood D Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS VES GM 16 Eldorado E Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 ABS TCS RSS GM 16 ELC SWPS Concours DeVille K Bosch 5 0 UART OBD II C2 Seville ABS TCS RSS GM 16 ELC SWPS GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 37 Vehicle Coverage 3 Veh
345. y for the next wheel that you wish to test 8 To return to the OBD CONTROLS menu press 241 while the Select Solenoid menu is displayed 9 To return to the test mode menu press 249 while the OBD CONTROLS menu is displayed GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 149 Bosch 2U ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes SELECT MODE Y F3 SNAPSHOT F4 ABS TCS TESTS F5 TP SENSR LRN SELECT TEST F0 SOLENOID TST F1 AUTO TEST F2 LAMP TEST IMPORTANT FOLLOW SERVICE MANUAL STEPS TO DIAGNOSE PRESS 4 SELECT SOLENOID SELECT SOLENOID F0 LEFT FRONT F0 LF F1 RF F1 RIGHT FRONT F4 LR F5 RR F2 REAR AXLE LF SOLENOID TEST PRESSURE HOLD PRESS RELEASE LF SOLENOID TEST PRESSURE HOLD PRESS RELEASE HOLD FUNCTION ON LF SOLENOID TEST PRESSURE HOLD PRESS RELEASE SOLENOIDS OFF LF SOLENOID TEST PRESSURE HOLD PRESS RELEASE EL FUNCTION ON FIGURE 5 18 Solenoid Test ACTIVE KEYS Select Solenoid Test or a solenoid for testing Confirm if you wish to continue Solenoid Tests or actuate the pressure hold function Actuate the pressure release function Return to SELECT SOLENOID menu GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 150 Bosch 2U ABS TCS System 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes Submode F1 Automatic Test This test is automatically performed once by EBCM during each igni
346. you how to enter the code Ifyou select the SOFT FAULT option the tester triggers when the ECU recognizes an intermittent fault A soft fault is an occurrence such as a loose wire which breaks and makes contact when driving over a rough road This option is only available for Kelsey Hayes 4WAL UART systems Ifyou select the ABS STOP option the tester triggers when the brake while driving is applied hard enough to cause the Kelsey Hayes 4WAL UART system to activate This option is only available for Kelsey Hayes 4WAL UART systems Once the trigger occurs the tester retains data according to which trigger point you have selected VIEWING CAPTURED DATA You have the option of bypassing the Data Capture phase and displaying previously captured data by selecting FO REPLAY DATA from the SNAPSHOT menu All data captured during snapshot is retained in the tester until it is overwritten by a new snapshot or if the tester is unplugged from the cigarette lighter for more than 24 hours If no data has been captured or if data stored in the tester memory is not data from the vehicle currently being tested i e it s from a previously tested vehicle tester displays the following message for four seconds or until the amp 9 or GD key is pressed CAPTURED DATA NOT FROM SELECTED VEHICLE GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 118 Mode F3 Snapshot 5 Selecting and Operating Test Modes PRINTING CAPTURED DATA In addit
347. ypically the system switches on the low tire light when a tire is down by 12 psi It is not possible to identify two low tires at the same time The tire inflation monitor system uses wheel speed sensor information to calculate what the value of the air pressure is in a particular tire A difference of 12 psi does not affect ABS performance so a low tire does not cause the ABS light to be illuminated Diagnostics look for jitters or variations in wheel speed that really does not match what the wheel should be doing and illuminates the ABS light in that particular case TIM diagnostics do not affect the operation of the ABS light The EBCM EBTCM contains the TIM software TIM begins working as soon a the vehicle is driven An auto learn sequence must be completed for combining approximately three different speed ranges TIM calibrates itself for each tire Typically TIM requires about half an hour depending on the driving conditions to train the algorithm in the EBCM EBTCM The characteristics of each individual tire are different Each tire has a slightly different set of revolutions per kilometer RPK The system must calibrate itself to match each tire If a low tire light is illuminated check tire pressures If the tire pressure is low fill the tire to the recommended pressure Then locate the reset switch inside the passenger door area fuse panel Press and hold the reset switch for three to five seconds When the low tire light flashed
348. ystem under test This can consist of ECU part number Module ID number or VIN Vehicle Identification Number GM ABS SYSTEMS The GM Chassis application software covers various chassis systems found on GM vehicles ranging from 1986 to the present Below is a list of the various ABS Brake Systems found on GM vehicles Delco Moraine ABS III Delco ABS VI Bosch ABS 2 0 3 0 5 0 5 3 and 8 0 Teves Mark II IV e Delco Bosch 5 0 5 3 DBC7 e Kelsey Hayes Rear Wheel Antilock RWAL e Kelsey Hayes Four Wheel Antilock 4WAL ADVICS There are significant differences in the diagnostic procedures for testing each of the above listed ABS systems so be certain that you are following the correct operating procedures for the vehicle and ABS system you are testing Chapter 3 lists the ABS systems that are selectable for each vehicle GM Chassis Application 1986 2004 Page 2 GM Chassis Systems 1 GM Chassis Application Description GM CHASSIS SYSTEMS VARIABLE EFFORT STEERING SYSTEMS EVO EVO is a type of variable effort steering system that regulates the amount of effort required by the driver to steer the vehicle under varying conditions by controlling the amount of power steering assist Power steering assist is reduced as the vehicle speed increases to provide the driver with road feel or feedback from the road to improve handling at higher speeds The effort is controlled by an Electronic Variable Orifice EVO

GM Chassis Application 1986-2004view - ZR

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents